Home

IM-DXL-ADM-1.5.0 - Harding Instruments

1. Output Settings output port you have chosen will be displayed in the Port information box The Function pull down allows you to select the purpose of the output At present the Output Type NO Contact only selection possible is as a Master Call Request Status Indicator E The Settings tab allows you to set the output to one of Ferias Cal Request staus r six possible patterns Output Settings Off Pattern Blink on 1 8 off 7 8 at 1 Hz Flash on 1 2 off 1 2 at 1 Hz Fast Flash 1 2 on1 2 off at 2 Hz Wink on 7 8 off 1 8 at 1 Hz On IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 59 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 5 2 IMS and TMM Master Stations 3 5 2 1 IMS and TMM Master Properties Switches The Switches tab is shown on the right The IMS Master xl po Secondary Status Registers Permissions Paging Feedback Outputs uses two audio lines and each audio line can provide Identification Switches Tones CallSettings Levels CCTV Fiters Control contact closure information for up to two switches Contact closures for only three of the four possible 1 switches are used in an IMS Master The entries shown Hook Swich in the Master Properties window are the default entries for standard operation of an IMS Master PTT Switch Microphone Mute Switch The IMS switches have terminating resistors and can be p Switch Input Supervision Supervise Port 1 Supervise Port 2 supervised to chec
2. Exchanges area and are now all a part of the audio trunk Exchanges ring Support Services 20 Housing 1 30 Housing 2 40 Special Handling Administration To delete an exchange from the audio trunk click on the exchange that you want to delete and then click on the Delete button IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 cnc iol xi Exchanges Support Services Housing 1 Housing 2 Special Handling Administration Page 47 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 5 Masters The DXL supports Intercom Master Stations IMS Touch Screen Master Modules TMM Telephone Set Master Stations TSM Paging Microphones Master Groups and Internet Protocol IP Masters and IP Touch Screen Master Modules TMM IP In the Master Properties window with the x e pe Secondary Permissions Paging Feedback Outputs Identification tab selected you will have to choose the a A A Type of master Use the pull down menu to select the Number 11 type of master Name Central Control 1 Tipe IP Master e Info MAI 425 D5M 1 40 al TMM Master de M l ia h Exchange Box ard Pott ld EPAD Support Services y Dece 21M5 MCI 7 fi y A short description of the various types of Masters 1s provided below Cancel IMS Master Intercom master stations IMS 4XX series are used with desktop IMS 440 master stations with built in displays The IMS masters require a connection to the data exchange network Lo
3. Host Port 1 Door Control Registers 0 40100 40100 1 Handshake Host Port 1 Door Control 0 40101 40105 5 Command Host Port 1 Door Control 0 40106 40110 5 Status Host Port 1 Door Control 0 40111 40120 10 Alarm Queue Host Port 1 Door Control 0 40121 40130 10 Ack d Queue Host Port 1 Door Control 0 40131 40140 10 Disabled Queue Host Port 1 Door Control 0 40500 40501 2 Master Connection Status Master 10 Central Control 0 40502 40502 1 Master Manned Unmanned Status Master 10 Central Control 0 40800 40800 1 Page Zone Connection Status PageZone 1 Page Housin 0 690950 690950 1 Station Call Status Station 2010 Cell 4103 0 690951 690951 1 Station Enable Status Ds Station 2010 Cell 4103 DXL Registers IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 149 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 25 ALA Audio Level Alarm Detectors An audio level alarm ALA is an alarm that is triggered when a sound exceeds a predefined threshold level ALAs can alert an operator to unusual and unexpected sounds The threshold level to trigger the alarm is based on the volume the frequency characteristics and the duration of the sound The alarm can be configured for any intercom station in the system providing the supporting hardware is available on the DCC DCE to which it is wired Up to four different ALA configurations can be defined for each station allowing different thresholds to be selected for various times of the day The DXL allows an operator to disable an ALA or t
4. Program Group 200 Tunerlnputs 3 6 1 5 Speaker Station Template Properties Levels The Levels tab for the Speaker Station Template Properties dialog box and the Speaker Station dialog box are identical and is discussed in Section 3 7 Speaker 16dB jo 16dB 3 6 1 6 Speaker Station Template Properties ALA The ALA tab for the Speaker Station Template Properties dialog box and the Speaker Station dialog Station Template 21 Cell A101 Properties x Identification Switches Tones Call Settings Levels ALA Filters Outputs Microphone Cancel Station Template 1 Cell A101 Properties x Identification Switches Tones Call Settings Levels ALA Filters Outputs box are identical and is discussed in Section 3 7 TALA Detectors Levelt hea y Level 2 Money Level 3 Money Level Nove y Action Queue Call Request C Attempt Connection Master 10 Central Control Call Request Priority Page 68 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 6 1 7 Speaker Station Template Properties Filters The Filters tab for the Speaker Station Template xi Properties dialog box and the Speaker Station Identification Switches Tones Call Settings Levels ALA Filters Outputs Frequency Response dB vs Hz Properties dialog box are identical and is discussed in input ites C Output Fiter Section 3 7 Type N
5. masters to compound stations are set up as calls between a master and the constituent members of a visiting booth or a compound station You will have to carefully decide the sequential order of the cameras and the monitors for each Station as the CCTV connection between a master and a station will be set up in the sequential order See the sections on Video Switches Video Cameras and Video Monitors for further details IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 81 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 2 Compound Stations A Compound Station is a group of stations up to a maximum of 4 that are treated as a single station When you make a call connection from a master to a compound station all the stations in the compound group are connected to the master The audio from each of the individual stations in a compound station is combined into a single audio signal The most common application of compound stations is for door entries where the two individual Stations on either side of the door are treated as a single station 3 7 2 1 Compound Station Properties Identification Select a Template from the drop down menu if you x want to base the Station on a pre defined template Identification Tones Call Settings Members ALA Status Registers Permissions y Number 2500 Select None in the Template entry if you do not want Name Housin 1 Entry Door to base the Station on a template Select the Type of E 3 Info Es Station to
6. IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 7 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 2 4 1 2 Open Project Select this option to open an existing project The Open Project window will pop up Click on the name of the project that you want to open Initially the contents of the default DXL projects directory will be displayed the entry in the Look in box Project files have a dxl extension You can navigate to other locations 1f you have saved your project in another directory Look in DXL Projects e ex E Grey Institution dxl Data TrainingProject dxl Data VOIPExample dx Data Grey Institution dxl Click on the name of the project that you want and then click on the Open button in order to open this project For example if you want to open the project called Grey Institution select the dxl icon labelled Grey Institution dxl and then click on Open 5 000 IES Files of type DXL Project Files dx y Cancel Remember that you can only have one project open at a time Click on Cancel to close the Open Project window 2 4 1 3 Close Project Click on Close Project if you want to close the project that is open Note that the program does not display a confirmation message before closing as long as you have saved the edited configuration If you have not saved the edited configuration then the program will ask for confirmation before closing When you close a project it will leave the MicroComm DXL
7. JV Supervised Status Input 3 Y Supervised Status Input 4 SELI 400 Series y SCC Z 400 Series y None 1300 Series 400 Series 401 Series IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software After you have added a DCC and a DCE s to the exchange then the exchange will display an expansion contraction icon This indicates that the exchange has sub components The view of the Tree pane appears as shown on the right Configure Hardware View Containment a El Grey Institu gt Upport Serm DCE l Housing Unit 1 BR DCC DCE 1 DCE 2 DCE 3 E PZE l Housing Unit 2 ER DCC DCE 1 ff DCE 2 Special Handling H DEC DCE Administration DCC DCE Configure Hardware View Containment E Main PCC E 2 IMS MCC E 400 Series SCC 1 400 Series SCC 2 DCE Housing Unit 1 Housing Unit 2 Special Handling Administration IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 MicroComm DXL Configure Hardware VIEW Containment 7 E Grey Institution dl Support Services Housing Unit 1 Housing Unit 2 Special Handling Select the sign to expand each expansion contraction icon This will display the DCC and DCE sub components in each of the exchanges Notice that each DCC and DCE has an expansion contraction icon that allows for further expansion of the Tree pane As an example expanding the DCC for the Support Services
8. Sent periodic broadcast request to determine clock master NU_SUCCESS This exchange is acting as the clock master Sent periodic broadcast request to determine clock master NU_SUCCESS 10 164 tmo_ex Ex 84 lt from IP gt g Info fInternal Intercom Tasks CLK January 20 2005 09 52 27 31 AM Debug fInternal Intercom Tasks CLK January 20 2005 09 52 27 31 AM UiInfo fInternal Intercom Tasks CLK January 20 2005 09 55 27 31 AM X Debug fInternal Intercom Tasks CLK January 20 2005 09 55 27 31 4M 09 58 27 31 AM January 20 2005 fInternal Intercom Tasks CLK fInternal Intercom Tasks CLK January 20 2005 09 58 27 31 AM IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 MicroComm DXL 5 2 6 Format Menu i Format You can change the type size and colour of the text being used in the Log Viewer window a by choosing an option in the Format menu You can also change the column settings and Font Size 4 layout as well as add or remove the scroll bar through the Format menu Colors gt 5 2 6 1 Font Column Settings Reset Layout Show Scrollbar To change the font select Font from the Format menu This brings up the standard Font selectable dialog shown below The changes that you are making to the font will all appear in the Sample window Use Font to change the font type Use the scrollbar to view different types of fonts and then click on the font that you want to use Use Font Style to change the display st
9. 3 1 1 File Menu The File menu allows you to create a New configuration Open an existing File Edit configuration and Close Save copy Save As or Rename an open configuration In da E is e E i Open Ctrl 0 addition this menu has options that allow you to import and export configurations as well as a to upload download and activate various configurations These latter operations are available Save Cti s through the File Manager menu selection rw Rename Revert 3 1 1 1 New Click on New if you want to define a new configuration This brings up xi the New Configuration dialog box as discussed above in Opening a New ee Configuration Corea 3 1 1 2 Open Selecting this menu item brings up the Configurations information box which xl lists all the configurations that have been saved for this project Configuration_1 0 Configuration_1 1 Configuration_1 2 Configuration_3 Configuration_4 New Cancel To develop a new configuration select the New button and proceed as discussed above in Opening a New Configuration To open an existing configuration select the name of the configuration and then click on Open or simply double click on the name of the configuration that you want to open Then proceed as discussed above in Opening an Existing Configuration 3 1 1 3 Close Select this menu item if you want to close the existing configuration This will leave t
10. Class amp Type Filter b certain time period and date The setting can then be saved for reuse Exchange Filter i b and loaded when required assis aika in Modify Shift Ctrl T Load Save As Delete Modify Option Select Modify to display messages that occur at or within a certain time period and date This brings up the Time Filter settings window You have to setup the filter by setting the earliest time E T and the latest time L T of logs that you want to display When the time filter is enabled the Log Viewer displays only those log entries whose time is between the E T and the L T There are two basic modes of operation Other static and Relative In the relative mode the E T is always specified to be some fixed amount of time before the L T 1 e it is relative to the L T In the other mode static mode the time period is always specified between a fixed date and time and therefore does not change How to specify Date and Time for the entries below a January 2005 Select the date in Specify by using the calendar that appears in the drop down menu cm Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri The standard calendar control lets you scroll through the months by using the arrow buttons To change the year click on the year and use the scroll to change to the E if p y required year You can enter the date by simply clicking on each entry and typing it in 18 19 21 manually You can also change the time directly by cl
11. Hz Order fo acoustics 3 7 3 4 8 Talkback Station Properties Permissions The Permissions tab is used to specify which master x stations are allowed to call monitor or control this Identification Switches Tones Call Settings Levels ALA Filters gt Permissions Dutputs Selectors station The pull down menu for Function displays the cas unction Call Station v various functions that can be performed NTC Housing Super i Unit amp Control Function Call Station Call Station Control Station Audio Level Alarm Control Station Call Requests Control Station Program Monitor Station For a particular function the ADD button will generate a popup menu that lists all the master stations in the configuration From this list of master stations you can assign the master station s that are allowed to perform the selected function Page 90 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 7 3 4 9 Talkback Station Properties Outputs The Outputs tab allows you to activate an output when xi Identification Switches Tones Cal Settings m ALA Filters the station is in various operating states When the nae nana a Add button is clicked a tree of the system hardware is Number Function Add displayed The tree nodes can be expanded until the desired output port is displayed If an output is already used it will be dimmed if not it will be selecta
12. IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 2 MicroComm DXL Administrator Setup MicroGomm DXL Administrator Setup 1 4 066 2 MicroComm DXL Administrator Setup MicroGorim DXL Administrator Setup 1 4 0566 MicroComm DXL Administrator Setup MicroComm DXL Choose Install Location Choose the folder in which to install MicroComm DXL Administrator Setup will install MicroComm DXL Administrator in the following folder To install in a different folder dick Browse and select another folder Click Mext to continue Destination Folder C Program Files DXL Administrator 1 4 Space required 20 3MB Space available 44 8GB lt Back Next gt cancel Choose Start Menu Folder Choose a Start Menu folder for the MicroComm DXL Administrator shortcuts 15 x Select the Start Menu folder in which you would like to create the program s shortcuts You can also enter a name to create a new folder icroComm DXL Accessories Administrative Tools Adobe Adobe Design Premium CS4 Auslogics Games Ad 7 Do not create shortcuts sox mar cons o Completing the MicroComm DXL Administrator Setup Wizard MicroComm DXL Administrator has been installed on your computer Click Finish to dose this wizard _ Show Release Notes Visit the MicroComm DXL Website Back Finish Gancel Page 5 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 2 3 Getting Started To open the MicroComm DXL Administrator click
13. IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 199 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 5 1 1 Opening the Log Viewer You can open the Log Viewer window by clicking on the Logging button on the MicroComm DXL Administrator This option lets you view the different types of events that are logged by the system and the log message content of each event Once you press this button the program displays a window with a menu from which you can select various options Logging 5 1 2 Connecting to the Exchanges If the computer is not already connected to any Exchange s on xj the DXL and you open the DXL Log Viewer then a a EN E Communications Link Setup window appears As the eo communication setup windows are shared by several utilities only Configuration test a brief description is provided below Please refer to the p 4 Communications Link previous MicroComm DXL Diagnostics and Maintenance e E section for more information Ethemet r In this window the Manual Entry option is disabled and therefore you have to use the Configuration option to connect to the Exchange s on the DXL This window is the same as the window that appears when you try to open the File Manager window through the DXL Configuration Editor Note that 1f the computer is already connected to the Exchange s on the DXL E Cancel then the program will skip the Communications Link Setup window and will directly display the Select Exchanges window which 1s d
14. Note that the number of octaves log fupper flower 1 1f Lupper flower 2 corresponds to 1 octave As you increase the bandwidth of the band pass filter you are effectively increasing the range of frequencies that the filter will allow to pass Note that this increase in bandwidth always takes places symmetrically on a logarithmic scale around the centre frequency From the figure on the right the lower corner frequency is 500 Hz and the upper corner frequency is 1000 Hz and hence the bandwidth is 1 Octave lower corner frequency IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Frequency Response dB vs Hz 200 3 400 Bid A Bet Bearer 250 500 1 000 2 000 upper corner frequency Page 151 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Low pass Filter Low pass Filter Centre frequency is the frequency that is the geometric mean or the Frequency Response dB vs Hz centre of the two corner frequencies This frequency is only defined for band pass and band stop filters Note that the upper and lower corner frerquencies are always symetrically distributed about the centre frequency 250 500 1 000 2 000 Center Frequency 700 Hz Order of a filter determines how steeply the slope of a response curve decreases A filter with a lower order attenuates a signal much more gradually than a filter with a higher order Hence higher order filters are more Selective in terms of the audio that they allow through and the audi
15. Position Le Length 0 00 sec 0 00 sec Play Save Cancel You will receive an error message 1f you try to save a sound file without entering xj a name for the file in the Name entry The name cannot be empty IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 25 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL You will receive an error message if you attempt to save a sound file by clicking on Save in the Record Sound window when a sound has not been recorded 5 Thereisno sound recorded You can listen to a tone or message by selecting the sound and clicking the Play button Page 26 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software 3 2 Creating a Configuration MicroComm DXL From this initial window use the Add Exchange button to add and configure the exchanges in the system DXL Configuration Editor Configuration_1 0 File Edit Configure Hardware y Lock Ese Lar ey Institution dsl View Containment Y Property vae S OE Function Unassigned Add Exchange At this point you have a starting point to begin adding your MicroComm DXL hardware components and adding and configuring your devices The following sections give an overview on how this accomplished but be aware that we are always updating and adding new devices and features so some device types and settings may differ or not be shown 3 2 1 Order of Adding Design Components to the Configuration To dev
16. Volume Program Group 200 Tunerlmputs Cancel IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 14 1 4 Page Zone Properties Members The Members tab is used to specify the devices that will xi Identification Tones Call Settings Members Permissions be connected or activated when this page zone is paged The Device Kind pull down menu allows us to make the appropriate selections Device Kind Speaker Line Device Kind E Number Name Add GamesRoomSpk1 212 GamesRoomSpk2 Delete 213 GamesRoomSpk3 214 GamesRoomSpk4 The Speaker Line entry will only be displayed after you have added a paging output that includes one or more speaker line groups Similarly the Status Output entry will only be displayed after adding a paging output that includes one or more Zone Select Outputs Clicking Add after selecting the Station entry will bring up a list of all the stations in the facility From this list select any stations you wish to include in the page zone Selecting Masters will allow you to select any masters in the system Clicking Add after selecting Paging Output will bring up a list of all the paging outputs Select the paging outputs that you want to include in this page zone In this example only audio amplifier 1 is selected When you click Add after selecting Status Output only the status outputs associated with current paging output members will be displa
17. and the devices that cause the alarm to trigger Except for connections between visiting booths members the status associated with each output can be configured to include a specific Master Station or any Master Station Page 156 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Alarm Contacts can be configured so that they are activated in response to a variety of events Deactivation can occur on the transition to the acknowledged state or the cancelled state or the end of a call for the In Call or Monitored state The events that activate and deactivate the alarms are discussed in the next section and a table is included that summarises all the possibilities 3 26 1 3 Video Switch Properties Alarm Contacts Alarms If you chose the Alarm Contacts option and then open the Alarms tab a dialog box appears which requires that you specify up to 5 parameters to control the video switch You can use the Delete button to delete an alarm that has xi Identification Connection Alarms Status Dutput OnEvent OffEvent Device Device2 you want to delete and then click on the Delete button Call Request Answer Ac Station 2001 H Any Master already been defined To do this click on the alarm that To view or edit the properties of an existing alarm click on the alarm in the Alarm tab dialog box and then click on the Properties button Alternatively you can double click on the alarm Either of
18. exhange shows that the DCC consists of a Main PCC card an MCC card that is configured for 2 IMS Masters and two SCC cards that support the 400 series intercoms In a similar manner the Main PCC card can be expanded as shown on the right In this case further expansion of the RS232 Modem Serial Port and PCI Slot indicates that a modem and an Xlon PCI card have been specified Configure Hardware View Containment El Grey Institution dsl Ee 2 Upport The l Main PCC lt lt Ethemet Port Audio Trunk Port USB Port 1 USB Port 2 Serial Port 1 Er seral Port 2 E PCI Slot E Lon PC Card E 2 1M5 MCC E 400 Series SCC 1 400 Series SCC 2 el DICE Housing Unit 1 Housing Unit 2 Special Handling Administration Page 39 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL A In a similar manner the 2 IMS MCC can be expanded to show all the ports associated E 2 IMS MCC with the MCC These include the two master station ports two line level audio inputs i gt ted eye two line level audio outputs 4 status inputs and 4 status outputs m Line Level Input 1 Pe Line Level Input 2 gt Line Level Output 1 2 Line Level Output 2 E Status Input 1 E Status Input 2 H Status Input 3 E Status Input 4 E Status Output 1 i E Status Output 2 i E Status Output 3 EE Status Output 4 3 3 2 3 Modifying a DCC DCE Ei The Modify button is available to allow some changes to a DCC or DCE t
19. x Your screen is not large enough to display logs in the selected Font Try increasing your screen resolution New Font Size 25 w Y SE or hiding some columnis Coreei Page 228 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 5 2 6 3 Colors Font Font Size b You can set the colours of the Log Class and the Log Types Once this selection has been made the colour scheme can be saved for reuse and loaded when v All Black required Hold the pointer over Colors and then select a particular option All Column Settings Modify A Reset Layout the options are listed below Load Show Scrollbar Save As Delete Select All Black to ensure that any data concerning the log messages in the Log Viewer window appears in black This is the default of the system and this option appears with a tick mark beside it if it 1s being used This option is only unchecked when the colours are modified This option is particularly useful if you want to make everything temporarily black for a print job Message Classes The logs can be filtered so that messages of certain classes and or types are displayed in different colours There are 5 main types of message classes Host Internal Maintenance System Activity and System Startup and they are displayed in the Class column on the Log Viewer window Each of these classes has one or more subclasses that can be viewed by clicking on the icon Log Ty
20. ALA Filters Outputs Properties window with the default Type set to Number 21 Speaker Station Select the pull down next to the Type Name Cel A10 entry box to see the list of the Station types that can be Info fICM 430 211 007 selected Speaker Station 400 Seres Handset Station 400 Seres Handset Speaker Station 400 Series Compound Station Type Speaker Station 400 Series z LED Station 401 Series Generic Station 300 Series Talkback Station Privacy Station 407 Series IP Station You can create as many station templates as you like for each of the station templates types defined in Type entry Once you have selected a Type of station the Station Template Properties dialog box will contain the same set of tabs for the Speaker Handset Handset Speaker LED Station Privacy Station Talkback Station IP Station and Generic Station Templates except the Handset the Handset Station Templates will not have an ALA tab The template for a Compound Station Template Properties dialog box is similar to the entries for the Compound Station Properties dialog box except that the members cannot be defined In all cases see Section 3 7 for more details on Station settings IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 65 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL The Station Template Properties dialog box is similar for the Speaker Handset Handset Speaker LED Station Privacy Station Talkback Station IP Station and Generic Station Temp
21. Assigned Masters allow the host to send a command directly to the mee ans Master as well as to the associated devices that are Cis Unit C Control NE Tower Show Host Port Registers connected to this Master OK Cancel If the Independent master registers box is unchecked then the Master Station that is assigned to the host port cannot have Master Registers If the Independent master registers box is checked then you can define and edit the Master Registers for each Master by clicking on the Edit Master Registers button This brings up the Master Registers window Descriptions of registers for Master Stations e Handshake registers Depending on whether the Peer to peer or the Polled option has been chosen this set of registers will behave in exactly the same fashion as described previously e Command register The external host writes into the Command register when it wants to send a command to a particular Master on the DXL e Status registers Each Master has two optional registers that indicate the device that the Master is connected to This is indicated in the Status registers The first register indicates the type of device that the Master is connected to and the second register indicates the ID Number of that device e Queue registers the DXL maintains an optional block for each Master of queue registers that display the top entries on the active queue for each Master Station Each q
22. Bld Name the sound file into the New Name entry Click on OK to B00H2250ms change the name or click on Cancel to cancel the operation New Name Chimes Rename in only enabled when you have a single sound selected Cancel Play Click on Play to play a sound type so that you can hear what 1t sounds like This option is not available 1f a sound card is not installed The Play button will change into a Stop button while the sound is being played This is so that you can press Stop at any time 1f you want to stop playing the sound type Export Click on Export to export and save sound types as 2 x wave wav files Save in Desktop gt cf ER My Documents 4 My Computer This brings up the Export Sound To window Use the icons to select the destination for saving the file Type CD Config Editor Screen Shots the name that you want to give the exported sound file E ScreenShots C rielvion in the File Name entry Click on OK to export the MicroComm Info CD Oct 2005 e Company file or click on Cancel to cancel the operation fp Keiths 43 My Documents 5 Shortcut to Current Versions l whistle wav File name 200Hz 250ms wav F Save as type Sounds wav y Cancel A Page 24 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Import First click in either the Shared Sounds or the 2x Configuration Sounds area whichever area that you Lookin G Desktop z e
23. Control Status Registers Permissions Paging Feedback Outputs are no switches associated with the Paging Microphone Identification f Switches Call Settings Levels CCTV Filter Master Station You need to define a PTT switch which is an external switch that is connected to one of the 7 Delete switch inputs on the DCC or DCE EE Properties Number Function Add Select the Add button to add a switch to the Paging Microphone Master Station This brings up the Switch Properties window followed by a Select Switch Port window Cancel In the Select Switch Port window expand the tree structure to select a switch 10 x Switch Port port Once you select the switch input you want click the OK button The Select Switch Port window will disappear and you will revert to the Switches Property window Cancel Use the pull down Function menu to select the x purpose of the switch The path where the switch is Function ARE located is displayed in the Port entry information You can use the Select button next to the Port entry to bring up the Select Switch Port window again if you SupportServices DCC 2 IMS MCC Status Input 1 Switth1 Change wish to change the switch you have selected Browse Contact Type through the tree structure to locate the switch you want dl to use Once you find the switch select the switch by clicking on 1t and hit the OK button This will again
24. Dare SAA Page 255 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL e Finally press the key to complete the editing session At this point the new value is stored and the cursor is returned to the first character position of the display e If you had wanted to escape from the editing session 1 e cancel the time System Time Date change you could have pressed the key at any time during the session This would have restored the time to its original value Note that Hime 2 33 am e Date Feb 20 2002 in this example the clock had been running while editing so the time has OS advanced by one minute 6 5 1 3 The Ethernet IP Mask Option You can select this screen if you want to change any of the values that appear fethernet ID Mask with a colon or a gt symbol in the case of the remote terminal beside them 00121F000003 The field MAC which appears with an sign beside it cannot be changed 010 000 000 a EIA O When you scroll to the top of the screen 1t will only be possible for you to scroll uta dara until the IP field this field is designated as the lt first 1tem gt by the DXL This is 192 168 000 because it is not possible to edit the MAC field 192 166 000 You can use this option to set the DCC s static Ethernet IP address es and net mask as well as the PPP Ethernet and gateway IP addresses System Time Date Mime 12 38 AM Dare A O NO 6 5 1 4 The DCE Add R
25. Device Kind Page Zone When Page Zone is selected in the Device Kind you have to place a tick mark next to each Page Zone that you want to select Identification Connection Protocol Messages Monitor Masters Registers Status Registers Status Message Moden Peer to peer Polled Device Kind ENERO You will have to fill in an address for the Connection Status which is a single optional register that indicates the current communication status of the Zone DXL Address Length Connection Status 40800 fi le Zone Status Register Block Select Apply Changes to update the changes to the system Note that you will have to carry out this procedure for each Page Zone that you are adding Note that this setting can also be seen in the Page Zone Properties under the Status Registers Tab window which _Staw ssPattFiesster _ is viewed by selecting the Page Zones section in Configure Show Host Port Registers Button You can click on the Show Host Port Registers button at any time to display a window that details the register function its length the start and end of its address location the kind of device it is associated with and the name and number of the device The window also displays register functions that are conflicting and the conflicting parameters will show up in red This window will be empty if no registers have been defined yet This window displays registers
26. Paging Feedback Outputs 1 Normal Announce Tone 2 Normal Announce Tonel 2 Alt Announce Tone 3 Normal Monitor Tone 4 Alt Monitor Tone A Acknowledge 6 PenodicAemider E Monitor Reminder The Call Request Acknowledge tone works in the following way when for example a master initiates a call request to a second master a tone will be sent back to the master that initiated the call request to let the person making the call know that his call request has been queued at the second master This 1s usually selected so that the operator that initiated the call request is informed that his call request has been queued and is not left wondering whether or not the second master received the call request This options works similarly for a station When a station makes a call request to a master a tone is heard at the station to inform the person that made the call request that his call request has been queued at the master Recent additions also allow for custom tones and allow control of the type and volume of some tones for IP Master and IP TMM Master types 3 2 2 9 Call Request Priority Master 1 IP Master Properties Permissions Tones Secondary Switches Identification Call Announce End 1 Call Announce v Reminder None Previous Next L Outputs Paging Feedback Control Call Settings Levels Call Reminder M Enable Call Reminder Tone Tone St
27. button In this case the program will only upload the files to only those exchanges that you have specified in the Select Exchanges window The Copy button is dimmed and not selectable if your PC is not currently connected to any of the Exchanges on the DXL Select a configuration from the Installed Configurations area and then click on the gt Copy gt button The configuration will be added to the Configurations on Exchange s area and hence will be uploaded to the exchanges that the computer is currently connected to Page 182 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL In this example let s say that we want to copy the Configuration 0 002 001k from the Project Configurations area the computer to the Configurations on Exchange s area the exchanges on the DXL To do this click on 0 002 001k and then click on the gt Copy gt button You will see that the configuration is added to the Configurations on Exchange s area with the name 0 002 001K Therefore the Configuration 0 0002 001k has been uploaded to all the exchanges that the computer is connected to Configurations an Exchanges Project Configurations O 0 002 000d O 002 001 O 0 002 001k O 0 002 002a O 0 002 0000 O 0 002 001 CJ 0 002 001K gt Copy gt Activate Show Exchanges Import Export Note that if the memory on the exchange is full when you x try to copy the file s then you will receive an
28. request will be sent to Input Settings Select the master that you want the call request to be sent to from the Master drop down menu This is an Master extremely important setting if you do not assign a 10 CentralControl master then the station will not be able to issue a call Call Request Priority request Set the call request priority of the station by using the Call Request Priority slider Cancel 3 7 1 2 2 Adding a new switch To add a new switch in addition to the pre defined switches click on the Add button that appears on the Switches tab Switch Properties Input When you click on the Add button to add a new switch the Switch 101 x Properties window opens followed automatically by the Select Switch Port qm window shown on the right Use the expansion icons to expand the tree dial structure until the desired switch is located Select the switch and click on the et E Status Input 1 OK button and you will return to the Switch Properties window an E Status Input 2 E Status Input 3 Switch Properties Properties i x ad Function MIST ets Input Settings Port H ousing Building 1 DCC 2 IMS MCC Status Input 1 Switch 1 Change Contact Type Cancel MNO Momentary Normally Open Y If you selected Switch 1 this port is now displayed in the Port entry of the Switch Properties window You can now select the function of this switch in this e
29. 2 Camera 2 3 Camera 3 that you want to associate with this master and then click on OK 4 Camera 4 Cancel The cameras that you have added will appear in the x i p Secondary Status Registers Permissions Paging Feedback Outputs window shown on the right Identification Switches Tones Cal Settings Levels CCTY Filters Control To delete a camera click on the video camera that you Device Kind Video Camera want to delete and then click on the Delete button Has Camera 2 Camera 3 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 55 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL To move a video camera down or after another camera by one place click on the camera entry and then click on the Move Down button Note that this will change the sequence number of the camera In the figure below we have selected camera C102 sequence number of 2 and have clicked on the Move Down button Notice how the camera C102 has moved below camera C103 Also notice how camera C103 now has a Sequence number of 2 The Sequence numbers always remain in sequential order Device Kind Video Camera y Device Kind Video Camera y Sequence Number Name i 1 1 C101 click on the Move Down 3 3 CI button 4 4 2104 gt Add Delete Move Up Move Down Add Delete Move Up Move Down The Move Up button operates in a similar way except that it moves the device that you have chosen one place upwards Hence depending o
30. 317 le Program Group Properues MEnDEES A a a 113 O A ada 114 ES Tones Dilo BO a 114 3 18 1 1 Tone Properties Tagen CatOM add A O a 114 3 18 1 2 Tone Properties E In ii a Ain 115 IAI MESSI A e E O a Nel Dl Se Baas 116 IAM gt Message Dialos BORA AA A 116 3 19 1 1 Message Propertics Identification nissenana a an i a AAS a a iiie 116 31912 Message Properties IA 117 DZD SUS EAS A SA A EEEE AEE OOE 118 JAWE SMR Dial OS BOXES a 118 3 20 1 1 Signal Properties Identity eo 118 3 20 1 2 signal Properties Call Sets hea suns a baat tiians 118 3 20 1 3 Sonal Prop rti s Peril SSI da 119 AL A oa 120 ll Schedule Wal Os BO lolis 120 321 131 Schedule Properties IGS nie Al OM apa riaia a a a 120 321 12 Schedule Properties gt Send diia 120 Dele Dene dile dera od od 123 3 2241 Scheduled Operations Dalos BOK ni E O puaacnnen eased 123 322 11 Scheduled Operations Properties IdentifiCatiON cccccccccnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 123 3 22 12 Scheduled Operations Properties Operation ooocccccnnnnnnnncnnnonononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 123 Kad INS TEM PRO DE ESAS AAA A AAA NASA AENA ARE 125 Sil System Properties Dialos BOX ica 125 3 23 1 1 System Properties ESM Diallin t essiant a cat 125 3 23 1 2 System Properties Master Oper aliOn idas 131 3 23 1 3 System Operation Cl A A A ES 132 3 23 1 4 Sysen Properes Los NS r a T nd 133 3 234
31. DAS ot fers ome len Power on Detected indicates that the user has powered the DXL f Power on Detected using the switch at the back of the DXL Loading Application Power on Restart also indicates that the user has powered the DXL DXL V1 1b2 APP User Reset indicates that the user has initiated a reset of the DXL This may appear when the user loads a new Application or enters a new IP address etc In this case the DXL would ask the user whether it is to reboot or reset itself Exception Code xxH where xx is the two digit HEX error code indicates a firmware or hardware error or issue such as entering an incorrect IP address Please refer to Boot Mode section for a further description of the options that may be entered in a boot mode situation IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 241 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 6 1 1 The Remote Front Panel The LUI may also be accessed remotely via a Telnet client that is connected through the Ethernet port a serial port or the modem port This Remote Front Panel interface provides a mirror of the local display and allows you to carry out the same operations as if you were using the front panel keyboard It also allows you to make changes using the remote computer s keyboard rather than using the front panel keypad Diagnostics The port number used to access the Telnet client referred to below as terminal is 50000 This port number can
32. Note that 1f you are using the Remote Front Panel to edit the LCD Adjustment window then the degree of the Contrast and the Backlight option will be denoted with Xx rather than with a bar plot W a Al a _ IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 251 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 6 4 Password Protection Each Exchange is afforded a password that is maintained via the system Configuration Front panel access for browsing 1s always allowed however you may not be allowed to change editable values except LCD contrast and backlight intensity may not be modified if password protection is in force If you press the gt key with the cursor on an editable line or the key with nico Dace the cursor on an unacknowledged fault then you will get the screen illustrated at the right if password protection has been enforced Password You can enter the password by using the a a v Y gt and 4 keys followed by the key During password entry the character is used to confirm that a keystroke was entered If you enter a valid password then you will be returned to the previous screen with the first editable field of the line selected for modification if password entry was invoked via the gt key If password entry was invoked via the key then you will SE also be returned to the previous screen however you will have to press the key again to actually acknowledge a fault The password remai
33. You can use the graph to determine what levels to set the sensitivity value at to trigger on desired sounds while not triggering on normal activity in that area First set the sample period and history so that you get an adequate indication of the noises you are going to make A sample period of 100 ms and a history of 5 seconds gives you an overview of most common sounds you may be interested in screams door slams conversation etc The Run button is a Run Pause button once you have a good sound then pause it to examine the graph closely so that you can pick some settings You make some sounds and pick a trigger level that is above the background noise but somewhat below the loudest noise you make Note that another factor is time it has to be above the trigger level for the time in Duration below Make sure that in your tests you pick a value that is at least your chosen threshold for your chosen time The following shows an example initiated by a scream near an intercom station Look at the red line on the top graph That is the short window the trigger settings equivalent to the settings configured above The blue line is the long term window basically the equivalent of the averaged background noise in the room Note that the yellow green and cyan boxes indicate some possible threshold time settings for this example and are not part of the DXL Administrator software In this graph background noise is about 62 to 64 db
34. You will receive a confirmation message when you select the Clear All option When you select this option the Enter IP Addresses window will appear with the IP address set to zero You will have to enter the IP address and then go to the line containing DONE CONTINUE and then press the gt key to continue loading the Default Application Subsequently if you enter an incorrect IP address Page 276 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL then the DXL will not be able to load the Application and will continue to return to the Enter IP Addresses window Please refer to the Clear IP Addresses option for a description of this subsequent process Note that when you select this option and subsequently enter the correct IP address then the default Application will be loaded on the DXL as all the other Applications have been cleared k k xWARNING kk BOO Options Clear ALL will erase all Clear IP Addresses configura tions and Continue to load Y Clear ALL SOO cle ETON e 200 al UE Default Application Der Meme less and load the default Selec Hoolacec Lom apps prom DONE FAO CO ee rai 7 1 1 3 The Do Memory Tests Option Select this option 1f you want to perform extensive memory tests on the SDRAM This will add a few minutes to the booting time of the DXL If the tests proceed without detecting any errors then the window will display a message saying that the test was OK and will continue loading t
35. increments and Call Priority it can be set from O to 100 Initially the default values are set to O dB and 50 respectively The Output Active Status Output pull down will display all the available status output entries of type Audio Output Active It lets you select an output which will be activated when this page output is used This status output is normally used to key the audio amplifier 3 13 1 3 Paging Output Properties Levels The Levels tab has one slider adjustment for Output which can be set from 16 dB to 16 dB The level adjustment is set for a particular configuration and cannot be changed whereas the volume adjustment can be changed by an operator while the system is running Level adjustments are used to compensate for the acoustic properties of different spaces so as to provide a uniform level of sound volume throughout a facility Volume adjustments can be used to compensate for voice characteristics of different personnel and can be carried out while the system is operating 3 13 1 4 Paging Output Properties Selectors The Selectors tab is used to specify which outputs may be activated included when a paging output is activated The Selector Kind pull down menu is used to select the kind of selector to add Selector End Speaker Line Groups bl If we select Speaker Line Groups then click the Add button all the available speaker line groups are displayed From this list of groups you can select the gro
36. is establishing call to Station 1 ICM 1 Call request from Station 1 ICM 1 has been removed from Master 2 IMS Master Call from Master 2 IMS Master to Station 1 ICM 1 has been established The first log indicates that the Master has established the call to the Station by dialling to the station and this call is established in the second log The third log indicates that once the call has been established the call request is removed from the queue The last log indicates that the call from the Master to the Station has been established e When the call between the Master and the Station is complete the following logs are generated Master 2 IMS Master is ending its call to Station 1 ICM 1 Call from Master 2 IMS Master to Station 1 ICM 1 has been ended e When a Master Station makes a page call to a Page Zone defined in the Configuration then the following logs are generated Master 2 IMS Master dialled to call Page Zone 1 All Page Master 2 IMS Master is establishing call to Page Zone 1 All Page Call from Master 2 IMS Master to Page Zone 1 All Page has been established e When a Master Station has decided to end its call to a Page Zone defined in the Configuration then the following logs are generated Master 2 IMS Master is ending its call to Page Zone 1 All Page Call from Master 2 IMS Master to Page Zone 1 All Page has been ended
37. key causes the first four or fewer items to be displayed After writing the data to the display the string lt First Item gt is displayed on line 1 for a 1 second period After the 1 second period has expired the line is refreshed with the original information This is to inform the user that the first line or item has been reached y You can use the Y key to speed up the parsing of a list of items such as a Fault list by scrolling a screen at a time towards the end of the list rather than a line at a time This key behaves as follows e If the cursor is on a line other than the last information line of the display then select the Y key to move the cursor to the last information line of the display The content of the display does not change e Ifthe cursor is on the last physical line of the display and there are additional items towards the end of the list then selecting the Y key causes the next six items towards the end of the list to be displayed The cursor is then positioned on the last information line e If the cursor is on the last information line of the display and there are no additional items towards the end of the list then selecting the Y key causes the string lt Last Item gt to be displayed on the last information line for a 1 second period the list does not wrap After the 1 second period has expired the line is refreshed with the original information This is to inform the user that the
38. ost For T a list of them and they will all appear with a checkbox which is unticked by default beside them Tick the host ports that you want the station to report its status to For Sequential registers Station Status Register Blocks DAL Address Length Leng Call Status D Enable Status a description of the other entries please refer to Section 3 24 1 12 Host Port Status Registers Apply Changes Show Host Port Registers Cancel 3 7 2 4 Compound Station Properties Permissions The Permissions tab allows you to specify which master xl stations can control the c ompoun d station The pull Identification Tones Call Settings Members ALA Status Registers Permissions j 1 f unction E down menu for Functions displays the possible control irii functions Function Cal Station Call Station Control Station Audio Level Alarm Control Station Call Requests Unit Control Delete Control Station Prograrn Monitor Station Clicking on the Add button brings up a pop up menu that lists all the master stations in the system You make your selections from this list IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 83 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 7 3 Talkback Station The TBE 310 Talkback Amplifier Expander outputs are configured as a special type of station The TBE 310 offers a flexible solution for driving speakers with talkback capability The TBE
39. s operation when accessed remotely through a Telnet client 1 1 3 Boot Mode The boot mode is entered by holding down the Boot Mode button which is at the back of the DXL box while powering up the DXL In this mode you will be able to make selections on the physical DXL box such as e choosing which applications to run on the DXL e clearing IP addresses e clearing memory e running memory tests IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 1 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 2 The MicroComm DXL Administrator This section describes the features of the MicroComm DXL Administrator shell In this section you will learn how to define open close save rename display and delete projects You will also learn how to set various preferences for the DXL Administrator 2 1 Administrator System Requirements 2 1 1 Minimum System CPU Intel Pentium or higher Operating System Microsoft Vista Windows 7 8 Windows XP or compatible RAM 256 Mbytes or more depending on OS Hard Drive 128 Mbytes free Video 1024 x 768 or higher resolution Pointing device Mouse or other pointing device 2 1 2 Requirements for Online Operation Communications V 90 modem or RS232 serial port or Ethernet network interface 2 1 3 Optional Feature Requirements Microphone required for recording Messages 2 2 Installing the MicroComm DXL Administrator MicroComm DXL Administrator Setup q Ioj x The DXL Administrator is installed with a Windows insta
40. system Time Date the screen that is being displayed A separation line delineates the thernet IP Mask lt title area from the data area The data area of the screen is where the DCE Add Remove IMS Add Remove values associated with the screen are displayed and edited Scrolling is performed in the data area only the title always stays on the first line of the screen and never scrolls off Data Area Title Area 6 2 1 2 Cursors and Visual Cues Four customized characters are provided to mark the cursor position at the left hand position Page 242 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL O This is the default cursor that alternates with the character at the leftmost position on the line usually for a heading or title that cannot be changed 4 This is the default cursor that alternates with the character that is being edited at a point in time A This cursor is substituted in place of the 11 cursor when positioned on the first line of the LCD and additional items towards the top of a list are available for display y This cursor is substituted in place of th00 cursor when positioned on the last line of the LCD and additional items towards the bottom of a list are available for display During value editing the default cursor alternates with the field that is selected for modification Generally speaking you can edit any line on the DXL screen that has a colon on 1t by pressing the k
41. 12 31 2099 at 23 59 Page 122 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 22 Scheduled Operations Scheduled Operations are used to set up a list of times when certain operations are to occur The list of operations that can be controlled re shown on the right ace ar are shown on the right Control Station Group udio Level Alarm Control Station Program Control Station Group Program program the times when ALAs are turned on or when programming is Control Page Zone Program With a DXL configuration a Scheduled Operation can be used to made available Either a group of stations or individual stations can be controlled Scheduled Operations makes use of Schedules to specify the times when an operation is to occur 3 22 1 Scheduled Operations Dialog Box You can add a new scheduled operation to the configuration by clicking on the Add button or to change an existing scheduled operation click on the schedule that you want to edit and then click on the Properties button Either of these two operations will bring up a Scheduled Operations Properties dialog box with two tabs Identification and Operation 3 22 1 1 Scheduled Operations Properties Identification The Identification tab has text box entries for pr RATE x ID Number Name and an optional Info text Identification Operation box Number fi Name JALAon Cells 4101 124 Info El 3 22 1 2 Scheduled Operations Properties Operati
42. 310 has eight constant voltage output channels that can be used to drive paging loudspeaker circuits Each channel s output power is rated at 5 watts at 25 volts Several channels on the TBE 310 can be connected in parallel to form a single output with higher output power 1 e connecting three outputs together would provide a 13 3 x 5 watt output Any group of sequential channels on a single TBE can be connected in parallel When outputs are connected in parallel appropriate settings must be made in the Configuration specifying which outputs are to be connected Each loudspeaker connected to a Talkback Amplifier Expander circuit must be equipped with an appropriate 25 volt loudspeaker matching transformer Loudspeaker matching transformer taps must be set so that the total audio power load on each circuit does not exceed the rated output The 1U 19 rack mount enclosure connects to a DXL exchange via a USB cable The back view of the TBE 310 is Shown below 110 Vac Ternaiial Terminal Socket Block Block 2 TBE 310 D z z z 3 4 54 r667 ps on T P e CLO ag A Pirar PORLA e 0 6 0000000 00 0 0 0000000000 0 Audio Power USB Type B 2 USB Type A Switch Port Ports Rear View of TBE 310 Up to 4 TBE 310s can be connected to each DXL exchange however the total number of TBE 310s and DCEs that can be connected to an exchange is limited to 4 3 7 3 1 Configuring a TBE 310 using the Administrator The following example use
43. 4 0b6 tox ie cs The next page displays the Destination Folder where the 21x DXL Administrator folder will be located A default 575 s foder to instal MiaroComm DXL Administrator in location will be displayed You can use the Browse button to navigate to a new location My Computer i q 312 Floppy A amp Local Disk C 3 084204Data 3 084570Data 084571Data 3 Adobe Stock C ADOBEAPP S ATI ad Burn Documents and Settings 5 Inetpub C MATLAB701 program ries os Y Make New Folder o cm O E eO HEEE E E HE E Page 4 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software The Browse feature will display a tree structure of your folders select the location for the MicroComm DXL Administrator Click the OK button once you have made your choice and you will return to the Destination Folder Once you have decided where you want the program to be located click the Next gt button The next page of the setup asks you to select a Start Menu Folder The default name of the folder will be MicroComm DXL but you can change the name of this folder if you wish Once you have made this selection click on the Install button The program will now be installed on your PC The last page of the setup provides you with an option to display Release Notes Once you have made these selections click Finish to complete the installation and close MicroComm DXL Administrator Setup window
44. 5 2 5 6 Stay At End Of Logs When Streaming Select Stay at End Of Logs When Streaming to ensure that new logs that appear at the bottom of the screen most recent logs scroll up the screen as newer logs are received Hence this option ensures that the cursor is left at the last log most recent log that is downloaded indicating the end of the current log downloads If the cursor is left on the last log then as new logs are coming in and moving upwards this option will ensure that the cursor is left on the last log that is downloaded and hence it remains highlighted A note to remember here is the fact that some logs that stream in may have a lesser date time than the most recent log This could be due to an error in the logs In this case although the cursor still remains on the last row you may not be able to see the logs that are of interest to you with the correct date time until you scroll upwards From the figure below as new logs are streaming in they are moving upwards however the cursor remains on the most recently downloaded log last log downloaded lol xi SE DXL Log Yiewer connected to 1 exchange Download Logs File Edit Search Filter Transfer Format Pu Automatically Download Logs As Needed we Message fInternal Shells fInternal Shells fInternal Intercom Tasks CLK w Automatically Stream Current Logs v Stay At End Of Logs When Streaming fInternal Intercom Tasks CLK January 20 200
45. 7 3 4 2 Talkback Station Properties i x Switches Permissions Outputs Selectors The Switches tab can be used to Add switch es to the Identification Switches Tones CallSettings Levels ALA Fites talkback station A talkback station has no predefined Cs switches Clicking the Add button brings up a window with a tree structure of the hardware configuration The Shen tree structure can be expanded until it displays switch inputs which can be wired to an external switch to perform the desired function 3 7 3 4 3 Talkback Station Properties Tones The Tones tab has entries for defining Start End and E p eriodic Reminder tones when d call is being made to E za EIE T Filters the talkback station Similarly when the talkback station ES ETEEN is being monitored a start stop and periodic reminder Start 1 StatTone y Start Noe y tone can be sent to the station Tones are created using ois End None El Reminder None y Reminder None y the Tones entry in the Configure box of the DXL Configuration Editor If the station has a call request 7 ametAcknontedo Tone None y switch a call request acknowledge tone can be sent back to the station when a call request is queued at a master station Page 88 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software 3 7 3 4 4 Talkback Station Properties Call Settings The Call Settings tab has entr
46. A Properties x Permissions Outputs Selectors Identification Switches Tones Call Settings Levels ALA Filters ALA Detectors Action ieee Queue Call Request HE ever teal C Attempt Connection Level 2 None v Master None y Level 3 None Call Request Priority Level 4 None f 1 I 1 I Page 89 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 3 4 7 Talkback Station Properties Filter The Filter tab can be used to include an audio filter for x Permissions Outputs Selectors Identification Switches Tones CallSettings Levels ALA Filters audio transmitted to the station The input and output Senay acme nate Input Filter Output Filter both the incoming audio from the station and the output filters can be one of five different types highpass lowpass bandstop bandpass advanced If none is ons OO M selected no filter is used Bandwidth 0 Y Hctaye Corner 1200 y Hz Type None T Mone Lowpass Highpass Order po y Bandpazz Bandstop Advanced The filter parameters can be set using the pull down x Permissions Outputs Selectors menus Audio filters maay be useful in EEJ ecting Identification Switches Tones CallSettings Levels ALA Filters background noise or compensating for different room AN Input Filter Output Filter A Type None bd Bandwidth 0 w ictave Comer fo
47. A solid colour box beside a type means that all messages of that type belonging to the selected class or one of its subclasses will be displayed in the colour that you choose e A multicolored box means that the conditions for having a solid colour have not been met If you are in Selected log class only mode clicking on a tick will affect the inclusion of messages for the selected class only Also note that e A solid colour box beside a class means that all messages of any type belonging to that class will be displayed e A solid colour box beside a type means that all messages of that type belonging to the selected class or one of its subclasses will be displayed e A multicolored box means that the conditions for having solid colour have not been met Note that All is not is not really a class but the route of all classes you will never see All as a class name in the Class column Note that no changes will be made until you click on the OK button to accept the changes and return to the Log Viewer window You can hit Cancel in order to retain the previous values and nullify any changes made in the current window IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 231 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Load Option xi Select a filter to load Select Load to load a previously saved colour scheme This brings up the Select Color Scheme window Click on the name of the filter to load any saved colour schemes Click on Load to load
48. Administrator window open so that you can choose to open a new project if you wish 2 4 1 4 Save Project As Any project you define in the Administrator is saved 2x as soon as you create the project However if you A OX Prec eE Grey Institution dxl Data want to make a copy of the open project then you can click on Save Project As This option will take you to the Save Project As window Choose the directory in which you want to save the project and specify the new name of the project in the File name entry To make a copy of the project that you are working on you will have to specify either a different name or a different location or both Note that the project will femme off SO Sowsstpe Droa ecn w e Ye not be saved until you click the Save button Page 8 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL If the project name and location you specified are the same as the name and location xi of the current project that you are trying to save a warning message will appear A di ni er Click on the Cancel button to exit the Save Project As window In this case the project will not be saved 2 4 1 5 Move or Rename Project This option lets you rename the open project 21x Selecting this option will take you to the Move or Savein C DXL Projects Os Grey Institution_1 dxl Data TrainingProject dx Data VOIPExample dx Data Grey Institution_1 dxl TrainingProject dxl VOIPEx
49. Cancel _ Properties Help The Control Panel window will now a Network Connections display the Direct connection named DXL Osx 3 P seh Folders C Serial LAN or High Speed Internet Local Area Connection LAN or High Speed Inter Connected Firewalled VIA Rhine II Fast Ethern Wizard Page 286 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software Appendix B MicroComm DXL B1 Setting up a Modem Connection from your PC to a DXL DCC This Appendix gives instructions to the user on how to use Windows XP operating system to configure a modem on your PC so that your PC can communicate with a MicroComm DXL System Note that these steps are only required for manual connections the DXL Administrator will automatically setup modem connections when the user uses the Communications Connect menu B 1 1 Using the New Connection Wizard The first step in configuring the modem in Dl x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay your PC so that it can transfer information G2 5 9 seah Foes 9 X19 Ee Addr ontrol Pane 7 EJ Go between your PC and a DXL DCC is to HEEE da open the Control Panel window followed y Oleana nons SPRA 1 Add or Remove Programs Install or remove pr by double clicking the N etwork 43 Administrative Tools Configure administr taj Adobe Gamma Connections icon This will open the _ 2doveversoncue 1118 Autodesk Plot Style Manager Network Connections window Bi
50. Coke in black and therefore all the log classes and types appear with a black box Ns Meno i e BB Warnings ntem 1 1 1 J Maintenance MN information You can select a class or a subclass by clicking on its name You can io peace Debug change the colour of a log class and or type by clicking on the current EE System Startup aie Unknown colour and selecting a colour from the Color window that appears You can resize the window if needed Cancel IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 229 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL To select a colour click on any colour in Basic colours You can aii also define unique customized colours by clicking on Define Ene En Custom Colors in the Color window The expanded dialog lets C E you select any colour that you want either numerically or by picking from the HSV controls You can add the colour that you go want to the Custom colors area by selecting a colour and then oh clicking on Add to Custom Colors o T Hue fao Red 1 Sat E Green m Define Custom Colors gt gt Lum igo Blue fist OK Cancel Add Add to Custom Colors N Add to Custom Colors N sh If you want to change the colour of a message for a class and mirror these same changes for its subclasses then select Selected Log Classes and all its subclasses In this case any changes in the colour of a class will affect all the messages of that class and all its sub classes If all log type messages i
51. Command registers Note that using Command registers is the only way in which a Host can send a command to a device in the DXL system that is not associated to a Master Page 142 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 24 1 10 1 Register Descriptions To ensure that both the DXL and the external host receive every message sent by each other they must coordinate the message transfers e A Handshake register and careful sequencing are ES Identification Connection Protocol Messages Monitor Masters Registers Status Registers used to ensure that the sending party does not Status Message Mode Register Blocks DXL Address PLC Address Entries Length Peer to peer overwrite any message before the receiving party Handshake 4000100 1 C Polled reads it These registers are used differently e xel JE ee d di th de that 4 d H di Son id B O m Sequel register epending on the mode that is used Hence this ia jooo Eat lt Pee register will be discussed separately with each Alam Queue 4000111 Js ft Ack d Qu 5 fio mode in the next section EB Disabled Gu 5 F fio Apply Changes e The external host writes into the Command register when it wants to send a command to the DXL e The Status register holds status and response _Show Host Port Registers messages that are being sent from the DXL to the external host e The Alarm Queue register is updated
52. Exchange 01 C Application Files app _Disconnect _Retresh_ Exchange 2 Exchange 02 Project Configurations Configurations on Exchange s Exchange 3 Exchange 03 uncheck C 0 002 000d 0 002 001 Exchange 1 0 0 002 001k gt Copy gt O 0 002 002a test gt P E Size Configurations TET on Exchange s Checksum area becomes 31 27196518 empty Cancel Import Export Show Exchanges Note that when you are connected to the exchange s on the system the Connect button toggles to a Disconnect button 4 2 7 Show Exchanges The Show Exchanges button is used to display the exchanges that a particular configuration is located on Note that the program will only display the exchanges that the computer can connect to To view the exchanges on which a configuration is located click on the name of the configuration in the Configurations on Exchange s area and then click on the Show Exchanges button You will see the exchanges on which your selected configuration is located in the exchange s containing area When you click on the Show Exchanges button this button toggles to a Hide Exchanges button If you want to remove the display that shows the exchanges that a configuration is located on then click on the Hide Exchanges button Doing this will remove the exchange s containing display In our example notice how the program lists only Exchange 01 and not Exchange 2 or Exchange 3 for the Configu
53. Filter menu Hold the pointer over filter name and then select a particular option All the options are listed below IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 211 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Certain options appear repeatedly for each type of filter and hence these common options are discussed once in order to avoid repetition They are Show All Option Select Show All to temporarily disable a filter without changing its settings When a filter is bypassed its Show All item will be checked Selecting the Show All option when it is already checked will re enable the filter with its previous setting Save As Option Click on Save As from the Filter s submenu to save the current filter x settings for later reuse Type a name for this filter setting into New Filter New Filter Name Name The Existing Filters list displays the filter configurations that have Host Removed already been saved Select Cancel to cancel the operation Existing Filters Note that Class amp Type Filters are saved in a common location that is independent of the active project This allows the same Class amp Type Filters to be reused on multiple projects All other filters are saved as a part of the active project Load Option Cancel Select Class And Type Filter x Select a filter to load Click on Load from the Filter s submenu in order to load a previously saved filter setup This brings up the Select Filter dialog Click on the na
54. Flashing Light 1 and TV Control while the other two are used with the page zone Exercise Yard All four must be added to this Page Output Flashing Light 1 204 TW Control Delete 205 Flashing Light 2 Relay Control 2 OK Cancel 3 13 1 5 Paging Output Properties Filter The Filter tab allows us to add a frequency shaping xi Identification Call Settings Levels Selectors Filter characteristic to the audio output channel A filter is not Frequency Response dB vs Hz normally required and the default is none Filters may be B z T useful if there is noise or room acoustics are poor Bandwidth boo J Octave 3 Comer 2400 H2 Order y 250 500 1 000 2 000 3 14 Page Zones Page zones are groups of loudspeakers connected to speaker lines stations master stations and other page zones that can be connected in a single paging announcement Paging output and status output relays can also be activated when a page zone is selected When the Configure entry is set to Paging Zones in the DXL Configuration Editor you can Add Delete or examine the Properties of a Page Zone 3 14 1 Page Zone Properties Dialog Box A Page Zone Properties dialog box can have up to six tabs Identification Tones Call Settings Members Permissions and if your system has a Host Port a Status Registers tab IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 103 Administrator Software 3 14 1 1 Page Zone Properties Identification Selecting Page Zo
55. Function The scroll bar allows us to view the 14 possible functions that can be carried out from a telephone Master Function Pret a Call Master 0 Y Highest Priority Call Fage Zone i Call Station H Call Visiting Booth 3 Control Master Manned Disabled Control Page one Prograrn Control Station Audio Level Alarm E Control Station Call Requests 4 Control Station Group Audio Level Alarm 3 Control Station Group Call Request Disabled Control Station Group Program E Control Station Program A Control Visiting Booth a 1 PAWESEETAOE IY Monitor Station The dialling prefix shown in the Prefix areas gives the DXL the ability to determine the desired operation Function to be carried out Prefixes for each of these functions can be changed from the default values shown For example if the user sets the Call Master Prefix to then every time the user begins a call from a TSM that starts with the DXL will be aware that a master is being called The prefix entered is up to you however only the twelve characters that are available on a telephone set will be allowed Enter the prefix by clicking inside the box and typing out a character or number Different functions can have the same prefixes In this case the DXL will search by priority for the first device with a matching prefix Priority is defined as the top of the list having the highest priority with the priority decreasing as you scroll downwards If a set
56. Housing 1 Super 0O21 Unit 4 Control 0O 22 NW Tower 0O23 Unit B Control O 30 Housing 2 Super Os Unit C Control N E ia o Y Sequential registers Master Status Register Blocks DXL Address Length Connection Status 40500 2 Manned Unmanned 40502 fi Apply Changes The default is to have the Sequential Registers box ticked so that the system automatically assigns a sequential address to the Manned Unmanned option Show Host Port Registers However if you uncheck this option then you will have to enter an address for the Manned Unmanned option Each Master has a single optional register that indicates its manned unmanned status If a Master is manned then this register is set to a non zero value If it is unmanned then this register is set to zero Select Apply Changes to update the changes to the system Note that this procedure will have to be carried out for each Master Station that you are adding Note that this setting can also be seen in the Master Properties under the Status Registers Tab window which is viewed by selecting the Masters entry in Configure IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 147 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Device Kind Station When you select Station in the Device Kind you will have a to put a tick mark next to each Station that you want to select Identification Connection Protocol Messages Monitor Masters Registers Status
57. ICM 4 has been established e When the Master has decided ends its call to the Station then the following logs are generated Master 1 Touchscreen Master is ending its call to Station 4 ICM 4 Call from Master 1 Touchscreen Master to Station 4 ICM 4 has been ended e Ifa fault occurs in the wiring which may be an open circuit or a short circuit then the following logs are generated Station 3 ICM 3 has I switches faulted Fault from Station 3 ICM 3 has been sent to Master 1 Touchscreen Master The first log indicates that a line has an open circuit or a short circuit fault on it The second log indicates that a message has been sent to the Master Station thus informing the Master of this fault IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 197 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL e If this fault has been cleared then the following logs are generated Station 3 ICM 3 has 0 switches faulted Fault from Station 3 ICM 3 has been cancelled by Master 1 Touchscreen Master The first log indicates that the line has been fixed and hence the fault has been cleared The second log indicates that the Master has cleared the fault on the Station e When a line is faulted a trouble alarm is generated which can then be sent to a particular Master Station that is specified in the Configuration The following logs are generated when this trouble alarm and fault is being reported to a Master Station
58. LICENSE THE SOFTWARE TO YOU ONLY ON THE CONDITION THAT YOU ACCEPT ALL OF THE TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT YOU ACCEPT AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT BY CLICKING THE BUTTON LABELED I ACCEPT THAT IS DISPLAYED BELOW IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS LICENSE CLICK THE BUTTON LABELED CANCEL PROMPTLY RETURN THE UNUSED SOFTWARE AND ALL ACCOMPANYING MATERIALS IN THIS PACKAGE_ALONG WITH PROOF OF PAYMENT hd If you accept the terms of the agreement dick 1 Agree to continue You must accept the agreement to install MicroComm DXL Administrator MicroGomm DXL Administrator Setup 1 4 0b6 O sms ia _ cms SS MicroComm DXL Administrator Setup Oj x Choose Components Choose which features of MicroComm DXL Administrator you want to install The next page of the setup allows you to select certain optional features you can use to start up the MicroComm DXL Administrator once it is installed The three possible start up options include an Associate Extension a Desktop faulccktettoconmue a i Sial andundhadk the components you donitwant to Shortcut and a Quick Launch Shortcut The Associate 7 Extension and Desktop Shortcut are initially checked as ELES DAA Poston yaun mause default selections however clicking on the appropriate ar di checkbox can change them Click on the Next gt button to proceed with the installation Space required 20 3MB MicroGomm DAL Administrator Setup 1
59. P Battery Low 1 220 Windows F Logof Sound 037 Play Cancel Page 116 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL To listen to either a Configuration Sounds message or a Shared Sounds message click on the Sound Name and then click Play Once you have selected the sound that you want click on the OK button to add the message sound to the Sound entry Click on Cancel to cancel the operation and exit the window 3 19 1 2 Message Properties Settings The Settings tab has only one entry which is an Output x Level slider that can change the output level from 16 dB Presion Setna to 16 dB in 1 dB steps Output Level O Cancel IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 117 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 20 Signals Signals are either messages or tones that are played automatically at predetermined times Examples of signals could be a morning wake up call start or end of a class meal times and time signals Selecting Signals in the Configuration entry of the DXL Configuration Editor will display in the List pane all the signals that have been defined in the configuration 3 20 1 Signals Dialog Boxes You can add a new signal to the configuration click on the Add button or to change an existing signal click on the signal that you want to edit and then click on the Properties button Either of these two operations will bring up a Signal Properties dialog box with three tabs Identification S
60. Page 78 MicroComm DXL Station 2008 Cell A101 Properties xi Permissions Outputs Selectors Identification Switches Tones Call Settings Levels ALA Filters Initial Volume Program Group 200 Tunerlnputs z 16dB o 16dB Call Priority Station 2401 Games Room A Properties x Permissions Outputs Selectors Identification Switches Tones Call Settings Levels ALA Filters Speaker Microphone 16dB o 16dB Station 2008 Cell A101 Properties x Permissions Outputs Selectors Identification Switches Tones Cal Settings Levels ALA Filters ALA Detectors Action O gt AL AL evel Queue Call Request ee cada C Attempt Connection Level 2 2 Level 2 v Master 10 CentralControl Level 3 None hd Call Request Priority Level 4 None v IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL The second option is to directly Attempt Connection with a Master without issuing a call request the moment the ALA is triggered You will have to choose the Master that you want to attempt the connection with from the Master drop down menu The same option is also available with a Station Template and therefore this section is only discussed briefly with the Station Templates section in Configure Note that you cannot define an ALA for a Compound Station or for a Compound Station Template 3 7 1 7 Station Properties Filters
61. Registers Status Message Mode Peer to peer Polled Device Kind RAEN Each Station has a single optional Call Status register Cell 4101 O 2009 Cell 4102 2010 Cell A103 Station Status Register Blocks 12011 Cell A104 DXL Address Length O2012 CellA105 Call Status 690950 pa O 2013 Cell 4106 CJ 2014 Cell A107 pol J 2015 Cell A108 CJ 2016 Cell 4109 O 2017 Cell 4110 O 2018 Cell 4111 y UA V Sequential registers which indicates the Station s call request and connection state Each bit in the register indicates a different setting Please refer to the DXL Host Interface Specification Manual in order to distinguish what each bit stands for Enable Status The default is to have the Sequential Registers box ticked a so that the system automatically assigns a sequential address to the Enable Status option Show Host Port Registers Cancel However if you uncheck this option you will have to enter an address for the Enable Status option which is a single optional register that indicates the enable disable state of the Station Select Apply Changes to update the changes to the system Note that you will have to repeat this procedure for each Station that you are adding Note that this setting can also be seen in the Station Properties under the Status Registers Tab window which 1s viewed by selecting the Stations section in Configure
62. Select Exchanges window and then click on the OK button When you do this you will see that the configurations on exchange s area do not change This is because Exchange Ol is the only exchange that the computer can connect to and hence excluding Exchange 03 has no effect on the Configurations that are displayed in the Configurations on Exchange s area Select Exchanges x Check the exchange z to connect to Exchange 1 Exchange 01 Exchange 2 Exchange 02 DO Exchange 3 Exchange 03 De Cancel Exchange 3 1s excluded E gt Configurations on Exchange s area 1s unchanged Page 180 File Manager l Configuration Files cfg C Application Files app Project Configurations O 0 002 000d 0 002 001 O 0 002 001 k O 0 002 002a test Import Export gt Copy gt Delete Show Exchanges x x IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Now in our example say you do not want to view Exchange 01 Simply uncheck the box next to it in the Select Exchanges window and click on OK You will see that the moment you do this the Configurations on Exchange s area becomes empty This is because all the configurations that were previously displayed in this area all belonged to Exchange 01 which was the only exchange that the computer could connect to Check the exchange s to connect to Configuration Files cfg Exchange 1
63. Sese this dialog on search search 5 2 3 3 Find Previous You can repeat the same search in the opposite direction by selecting Find Previous on the Search menu If the search is successful then the appropriate log is highlighted If it is not successful then a message will inform you that the search string was not found If you have not entered a search string prior to selecting Find Previous then the Find Log Message Text window will open so that you can enter the string to be searched for You can cancel the search by selecting Cancel 5 2 3 4 Go To Date and Time You can jump to a log that occurred on a particular date and time by selecting Go To Time Date in the Search menu This brings up the Go To Date and Time window You can select the date using the calendar that appears in the Date drop down menu The standard calendar control lets you scroll through the months by using the arrow buttons To change the year click on the year and use the scroll to change to the required year You can also enter the date by clicking on each entry in Date and typing it in manually You can select the time by scrolling through the times using the scroll button to the right of the Time entry or by clicking on any entry in Time and typing it in manually Select the component of time 1 e hour minutes seconds AM PM and then use the scroll button to change the selected component or manually type in the new value The up and down arrow key
64. SpecialHandling H AdminBuilding The first step in configuring a PZE is to identify and name each of the speaker lines that will be used Different Page Zones can use different combinations of speaker lines and we must be able to identify which speaker line relays are to be activated for the different Page Zones Setting the Configure entry in the DXL Configuration Editor to Speaker Lines allows us to Add Delete or select Properties of each speaker line The Properties entry allows us to view and edit a speaker line The Speaker Line Properties dialog box appears when you click the Add button You need to identify the speaker line with an ID Number Name and the PZE Port that it is connected to Once you have specified the speaker lines the DXL Configuration Editor List Pane will display the speaker lines in this picture only the speaker lines for PZE 1 are displayed u DXL Configuration Editor Configuration Of xj File Edit Configure Speaker Lines Lock a Mew Hardware E Greylnistitution del GamesFooms pk _HousingBullding PAE 1 Speak Speake E ams nk H mE uildingl IESE 145 lo Group 15 ae Output 2 GamezAoom 5pk3 Housing uildingl PE 1 Speaker Group 15 peaker Output 3 GamesFoom5 pk 4 fHousingBuilding PE 1 Speaker Group 1 Speaker Output 4 Exercise yards pk fHousingBuilding PE 1 Speaker Group 15peaker Output 5 Exercise yards pik fHousingBuilding RE 1 Speaker Group 1 Speaker Output 6 Exencse yar
65. Station and Page Zone can also have status registers These registers are used to report the current status of a Master Station or Zone to the host For example in the case of a Station two status registers are used to inform the host if the Station 1s in call and if it is enabled Also when you select the Register Based Messages option two additional tabs appear on the Host Port Properties dialog box these tabs are titled Registers and Status Registers and they are covered in the last section of the Host Port description 3 24 1 3 1 ASCII Messages Selecting an Ethernet connection in the Connection tab xi and then ASCII Messages in the Protocol tab TCP is the rilicaton Connection Protocol Messages Monitor Master only IP Protocol available ASCII Messages IP Protocol Ee m y C Register Based Messages Normal Register Addr Ext Register Address Digits 5 Digits 15 E PUE Protocol Modbus TCP Maximum 165535 Reaster Address Format Jormal 4n n offset PLC Network Address 4 e g address at 2000 42000 Node 10 Extended 6bn B bank n offset e g bank 1 at 1000 677000 Cancel Page 138 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 24 1 4 Host Port ASCII Messages Messages The Messages tab lets you control the messages that are x Identification Connection Protocol Messages Monitor Masters sent from the DXL syst
66. Trouble alarm from Exchange 1 Main Exchange has been sent to Master 1 Touchscreen Master Fault from Station 3 ICM 3 has been sent to Master 1 Touchscreen Master The first log indicates that Station 3 which is located on Exchange 1 has a fault associated with it Hence Exchange 1 has sent a trouble alarm to Master 1 The second log indicates that the status of the fault has also been sent from Station 3 to Master 1 e When this fault is cleared the following log messages are generated Fault from Station 3 ICM 3 has been cancelled by Master 1 Touchscreen Master Trouble alarm from Exchange 1 Main Exchange has been cancelled by Master 1 Touchscreen Master The first log indicates that the fault has been cleared and therefore it has been cleared by Master 1 The second log indicates that since the fault has been cleared Master 1 has also cleared the trouble alarm e When an intercom Station sends a call request to a Master Station then the following log is generated Call request from Station 1 ICM 1 has been sent to Master 2 IMS Master This log indicates that the Station has sent a call request to the Master and this call request is now queued Page 198 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL e When the Master answers the call request the following logs are generated Master 2 IMS Master dialed to call Station 1 ICM 1 Master 2 IMS Master
67. address or phone number that you specify Once you have connected to this exchange you will be able ae to download the configurations that belong to this exchange Seria Communications Link Connect Using Remember that you cannot use the Manual Entry option with the DXL Communications cable between two computers Log Viewer carei _ IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 169 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Ethernet If you want to connect via an Ethernet connection then you will have to type the IP address of ES Exchange at 10 0 0 1 the exchange in the IP Address entry In this case the PC will try to connect to the exchange that has the IP address that you have entered If you have connected to the exchanges manually via an Ethernet connection then the Communication Status window will only display the IP address of the exchange that you are linked to This window will only appear after you click on the Connect button Modem If you want to connect via a Modem connection then you will have to EES A choose the modem that you want to use from the Connect Using drop 83t IP Address es or Phone Number s From down menu You will also have to enter the phone number of the 1045 exchange that you want to connect to in the Phone Number entry o Configuration Lon qual ato D Communications Link Connect Via Connect Using Standard 56000 bps Modern y Phone Num
68. all the modules that it is connected to Click on Leave if you want to close the DXL Log Viewer window but you want the computer to remain connected to the exchange s on the DXL Do this only if you are planning to connect to the same exchanges over the same link from the other modules as well However if you click on the Leave button the program will not prompt you with a message the next time that you try to close this window This is because you have already told the PC to leave the connection intact However if you click on Cancel instead of Leave then the program will prompt you with a message the next time that you try to shut down this window Click on Cancel to cancel the current operation Therefore remember that the program only prompts you with a message if you are trying to shut down the window from which you had set up the original connection Page 174 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 4 2 File Manager From the File Manager window you can manage activate copy distribute and delete configuration files and application files You can also use this window to import and export configuration application files upload configurations applications to exchanges and download configurations applications from exchanges There is an important distinguishing factor between the configuration files cfg option and the application files app option In the configuration files cfg option the Project Conf
69. an ID xi Identification Call Settings Levels Filter Number Name Info Type and specify the port the music source is connected to Any ports have been assigned Number previously will not be selectable Name Urit Tuner op al Type MCC Line In Port y Exchange Box Card Pott Housing Building 1 y Dec y 2 1MS MCC Previous Next Cancel 3 16 1 2 Music Source Properties Call Settings Each music source that is available in an Exchange is xl ification Call Setti transmitted as two separate audio signals one at a Low Mentiicaion Cal Setin Levels Fiter Volume and a second at a High Volume level You can oe olen adjust the volume level of the two signals separately in 1 dB steps by using the slider Previous Next Cancel Page 110 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software 3 16 1 3 Music Source Properties Levels Once selected the High Volume and Low Volume levels should remain fixed In the Levels tab you can move the Input slider to compensate for either quiet or loud audio sources and you can adjust this level it in 1dB steps from 16dB to 16dB 3 16 1 4 Music Source Properties Filter With the Filter tab you can specify the settings for additional filtering of the incoming audio IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 MicroComm DXL Music Source 20 UnitATuner1 Properties Music Source 20 UnitATuner1 Properties banawigtti Page 111 Administrator So
70. are available Example A Master Station with two monitors and one camera makes a call to a visiting booth that has two member stations Each station in the visiting booth has one camera and one monitor When the master calls the visiting booth the first monitor at the master will be connected to the camera on the first station The second monitor at the master will be connected to the camera on the second station The camera at the master will be connected to the monitor on the first station and the monitor on the second station simultaneously When a master station calls a visiting booth or a compound station where a monitor has NOT been assigned to each of the constituent stations i e none of the stations have monitors associated with them then connections between intercom station cameras and master station monitors will be made in a round robin fashion Example a master station with monitors numbered M100 M101 M102 M103 assigned in that order calls a three member compound station made up of Stations 200 300 and 400 assigned in that order Station 200 has cameras numbered C201 and C202 Station 300 has cameras C301 and C302 and Station 400 has cameras C401 and C402 The connections between cameras and monitors are made in order as M100 gt C201 M101 gt C301 M102 gt C401 M103 gt C202 No further connections are possible as all the master s monitors have been connected 4 When a Master Station makes a call to a visi
71. at the Station Visiting Booth disable Switch is activated when a booth recorder is turned on at Booth a visiting booth recorder on Booth recorder off vine Booth Switch is deactivated when the recorder is turned off at the visiting booth IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 159 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 26 1 4 Video Switches Properties Serial Connection If you select a serial port connection you will have to use xi A the drop down menus to choose the Exchange and either Presion Connection Commands Serial Port 1 or Serial Port 2 In addition you need to E specify the following parameters An asynchronous serial transmitted word or packet consists of a start bit 7 or 8 c El BEE 10 Support Services data bits an optional parity bit followed by 1 or 2 stop SerialPort 2 Beud Rate 15200 z bits Data Bits E Parity None z o Baud Rate Stop Bits 1 v Flow Control None z Choose the baud rate that you want to use from the Baud Rate drop down menu This sets the number of bit transfers per second e Data Bits Choose the number of data bits 7 or 8 that you want to use from the Data Bits drop down menu This determines the number of data bits that are transmitted in each word e Parity The parity bit is used for error checking in serial communications You can choose even parity odd parity or no parity from the Parity drop down menu Selecting None means that you are n
72. be a Compound Station Template None Type Compound Station Cancel 3 7 2 2 Compound Station Properties Members The Members tab lists all the stations that are to be ES Identification Tones Call Settings Members ALA Status Registers Permissions included in this compound station A maximum of 4 stations can be included in a compound station Member Stations 2001 Housing Entry To add a station to this list click on the Add button 2002 HousinglExi This brings up the Select Stations dialog box that lists all the stations in the exchange that have the compound station check box checked Select the station to be added to the compound station and then click on OK You will not be able to click on the Add button after you have added four stations to the Member Stations area To delete a Station from this list or area simply select the station to the deleted from the Member Stations area and then click on the Delete button Page 82 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 7 2 3 Compound Station Properties Status Registers Note that the Status Registers tab will not appear if you AAA zx Identification Tones Call Settings Members ALA Status Registers Permissions have not defined any host ports in the system Register Based Host Ports Status Message Mode Peer to pee If you have already defined host ports then you will see eee f ai
73. by using the up a and down v arrow keys to scroll between the digits Then use the key to return to the beginning of the line Once this is done you will have to go to the last line which will display DONE CONTINUE and select the gt key to continue with the loading Note that if you do not enter an IP address or you enter an invalid IP address then the program will go to the start of the DXL Boot window and will then return to the Enter IP Addresses window and wait for you to enter an IP address If you enter the correct IP address then the Application will continue to load and the system will display the DCC Setup window Enter IP Addresses BOCs Of wikom OOO BOO COO Bae 255 255 255 000 Correct IP Entered IP Mask gt Y Clear IP Addresses gt Mode gt auto detect gt gt Clear ALL DO Memo y less Continue to load 9 00 AM Feb 11 2005 Tame Date Select Application DONE OREA ES DONE Note that this description only applies to standard Applications If you want to load the Default Application then you will not be taken to the Enter IP Addresses screen and therefore will not been prompted to enter an IP address Instead the Default Application will be loaded right away 7 1 1 2 The Clear ALL Option Select this option if you want to clear the ENTIRE unit Configuration This will include all the Configurations Applications and IP addresses on the DXL
74. control of 5 su a C Selected log class and all its subclasses KE a Es Selected log class only Info fInternal Intercom Tasks CLK January 20 2005 09 28 27 44 AM This exchange is acting as the clock master Log Class Color FLog Type Color al BB Eros Ei Host BB warnings Register Protocol E Information fInternal Shells January 20 2005 09 28 47 94 AM Shell on socket 61 UN Text Protocol finished G E Internal Debug Anternal Shells January 20 2005 09 28 47 94 AM Shell on socket 63 BB Assertions Ml Other nshan fInternal Intercom Tasks CLK January 20 2005 09 31 27 44 4M This exchange ts acting a y mi EN Unknown as the clock master lle Transfer M Flash G E Intercom Tasks E ccry _ _ _ E a o fInternal Intercom Tasks CLK 09 34 27 44 4M This exchange is acting gt CEPT as the clock master CLK 3 COMM E CONFIG fInternal Intercom Tasks CLK 09 37 27 38 AM This exchange is acting as the clock master i Cancel two_ex Ex 84 lt from IP gt If you are in Selected log class and all its subclasses mode clicking on a colour will affect the inclusion of messages for both the selected class and all its subclasses but not its parent ancestor classes Also note that e A solid colour box beside a class means that all messages of any type belonging to that class or one of its subclasses will be displayed in the colour that you choose e
75. defined select a station or page output from this list and then select one of the two options Don t connect to this device or Adjust Paging Volume If you select Don t connect to this device then the station or page output that 1s selected will be disconnected when a page is made to a page zone that contains this station or page output If you select Adjust Paging Volume then the volume of the audio output of the station or page output gets reduced when a page 1s made to a page zone that contains this station or page output If you want to simultaneously change the audio output of many stations select these stations first and then make the paging adjustments Page 52 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 5 1 3 Master Properties Permissions The Permissions tab lists the stations page zones HSCS SS xl Identification Switches Tones Call Settings Levels Filters Control monitors etc that this master station can access To see e DE PRO R a list of the classes of devices that a master station can Function MIA ERG access use the Function pull down menu Call Other Waster Call This Master Control Other Master Manned Control This Master Manned Call Station Control Station Audio Level Alarm Control Station Call Requests Control Station Program Monitor Station Control Station Group Audio Level Alarm Control Station Group Call Request Control Station Group Prog
76. do not change e Ifthe cursor is on the first line of the display and there are additional items towards the top of the list then select a to scroll the entire contents of the display down by one line such that the first line displays the new item Hence the last line of the display is dropped or disappears from the screen and the cursor remains on line one e If the cursor is on the first line of the display and the first line is displaying the first item on the list the string lt First Item gt is displayed on that line for a 1 second period the list does not wrap After the 1 second period has expired the line is refreshed with the original information This is to inform you that you have reached the first line or item e If you want to edit an item e g setting the clock select the a key to display the next valid value for the selected field If the selected field already contains the last valid value it is replaced by the first valid value for the field the list wraps If the key is held down for more than 1 second the field will auto increment at a 0 5 second rate until the key is released Cursor blinking is suppressed throughout the auto increment period to improve the readability of the display Note that these behaviours are consistent for both numeric and textual fields e g When adjusting the clock s tens of minutes field if you repeatedly press the a key then this will produce the sequence O a
77. downwards by an increment or decrement of one day Down Log selection Ctrl C makes a copy of a log or a set of logs Ctrl A selects all the logs logs become highlighted Ctrl F find a log message F3 find the next log from the current point with the text string that you have already defined Ctrl F3 find the previous log from the current point with the text string that you have already defined disable all the active filters and display all the logs in the Log Viewer Page 204 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 5 2 The Main Menus The Log Viewer window has six menus that you can select from File Edit Search Filter Transfer and Format These menus are discussed 5 2 1 File Menu 5 2 1 1 Export zix It is possible to save the logs from the DXL Save in E Desktop amp ck EE Log Viewer window Select Export to A open up the Export Logs window Select the se y Recent location of where the logs are to be saved in PONEN 4 My Computer Save in and type the name of the file in File Es name The file can be saved in a variety of EMO different formats that you can choose from gt the Save as type drop down menu You can A save the file in the CSV format if you want er to import it onto an Excel worksheet later ett i omputer on You can save the file in a Styled Web ao Page format if you want to preserve your e colour and font settings NENAS Fil
78. files to download the log messages that are displayed in the Log Viewer window If Use active configuration if needed one is missing is ticked and the original Configuration file is missing then the program automatically uses the active Configuration that is available on the system when it is downloading the logs You should say how this will only result in correct log interpretation 1 e lookups of device numbers names and other info in the configuration while formatting the logs if the active configuration and the missing one are sufficiently similar IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 239 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Note that you will not be able to make any changes until you click the OK button to accept the changes and return to the Log Viewer window Click Cancel to retain the previous values and nullify any changes made in the Preferences window 5 2 1 2 Preferences Diagnostics This option is currently not operational Note that no changes will be made until you click on the OK button to accept the changes and return to the Log Viewer window Click on Cancel to retain the previous values and nullify any changes made in the current window Page 240 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 6 MicroComm DXL Local User Interface 6 1 Introduction This document describes the operation of the MicroComm DXL s Local User Interface LUI The interface 1s comprised of an 11 button keypad a 64 pixel x 128 pixel back
79. for various DCC status Outputs purposes Each line in this screen represents the state of one of the four Status Outputs and is comprised of two fields The first field consists of the number that designates which Status Output it is for example Status Output 1 and the second field indicates the state of the chosen Status Output Note that these states are displayed as OFF when the Status Outputs are not being used and this is the default display A list of states that could be displayed for an LED that is connected to a Status Output is shown below IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 263 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Table The Status Outputs Option AL On LEDremamson SS AA oro LED remains off l 2 3 4 5 Fast On for 1 4 of a second amp off for 1 4 of second at equal intervals Flash On for 1 2 of a second and off for Y2 of a second at equal intervals 5 Wink Ss On for 1 8 of a second and off for 7 8 of a second 6 Blink On for 7 8 of a second and off for 1 8 of a second 6 6 1 7 The SCC1 Outputs Option IDCC__SCC1 Outputs SCC refers to the Station Control Card Since both the SCC1 Outputs and the FDH 2 AEE SCC2 Outputs have identical properties they are discussed here together These OFF outputs have no meaning when it comes to the 300 series and 400 series cards off However for the 401 series card these lines can be used to drive switches audio Off c
80. handset is on the hook an associated switch is said to be on hook and when the handset is taken off the hook switch then it is said to be off hook e Microphone Mute switch this switch is used to mute a conversation when it is pressed This type of switch is usually used in VOX applications where the operator may be transmitting a message over the paging speakers but he suddenly wants to have a private conversation with someone without having his private conversation distributed over the speakers The operator can press the microphone mute button to stop the transmission of audio e Music Select switch the button that is associated with this switch is usually used to begin or end the music that is played at a station to skip past sound tracks and to set the volume of the music to either high or low e PTT switch the button that is associated with this switch is used as the push to talk button at the master station Hence the person that is speaking at the master has to press the PTT button and keep it pressed while speaking in order for the audio to be transmitted from the master e Page switch when pressed the Page Switch will activate a specified page zone IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 71 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Panic Alarm switch a panic alarm switch is a special switch that can generate an alarm that is queued at a designated master Tamper Alarm switch a tamper alarm is a special type of alarm that is
81. higher than the priority of the existing call which is 50 Hence the call between Masterl and Station is disconnected and a new call is set up between Master2 and Stationl This is illustrated in the picture below Masterl P 50 Station 1 P 20 Call priority max 90 60 90 Master Call priority 90 P 30 PageZonel P 90 Now say Master3 P 30 wants to make a page to PageZonel P 90 and say that Station is included in PageZonel and is currently in a call with Master2 First the system will calculate the priority of the new call between Master3 and PageZonel which is max 30 90 90 But since Station with a call priority of 60 is currently in a call with Master2 the system will also compare the priority of the new page call which is 90 to IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 31 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL the priority of the call between Master2 and Stationl This would be max 90 60 90 Hence Master3 would be able to interrupt Station and make a page to PageZonel Note that if the priority of Station had been greater than the priority of the interrupting call then Master3 would not have been able to make a page to Page Zonel as the device in the zone Station1 was busy Also note that if you cannot connect to every device in a page zone then you cannot make a page to that zone until the device is free 3 2 2 11 Initial Volume This volume setting is used to increase or decreas
82. however be changed The Remote Front Panel can be selected by clicking on the Diagnostics icon displayed above in the MicroComm DXL Administrator window and then selecting View and then Remote Front Panel 6 2 Display Description 6 2 1 Introduction This section will describe the main buttons and keyboard keys that you will use as well as a description of what you will expect to see on the actual DXL box and the remote terminal 6 2 1 1 Keypad Display Organization The user interface is organized in a simple hierarchical menu structure limited to three main levels or menus Si Ls a Select any of the three dedicated top level menu keys l e amp to jump directly to one of three top oo KA level menus From this point the menus are traversed via the key to display the selected sub menu and the key to return to the previous higher level in the same menu Note that if you are currently viewing or editing values in a screen that is under one of the three main menu options eg The SETUP menu and you want to go directly to another menu by pressing that menu key eg the FAULT menu then when you return to the previous menu by selecting the SETUP menu the program will automatically take you to the active screen that you had exited in that menu All display screens are divided into two parts the title area and the DCC Setup data area The title area is a single line of information that identifies OS NANT
83. in both the DXL and the host which is most typically a PLC Page 148 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL If you select the Show Host Port Registers button in the Peer to peer mode then the Host Port Registers window will appear with two tabs at the bottom of the window DXL Registers and PLC Registers This window displays address length function device kind number and name of the registers for both the DXL and the PLC SS Host Port 1 Modbus TCP IP Host Registers 10 x Host Port 1 Modbus TCP IP Host Registers mais Tue Length Register Function Device Kind Number Device Name __ cenaa Te Tina Register Function Device Kind Number Device Name 0 40001 40005 5 aa Master Touchscreen Master 690900 690904 Status Hast Port Modbus TCP IP Host 0 40100 40100 1 Handshake Host Port Modbus TCP IP Host 690905 690914 Alarm Queue Host Port Modbus TCP IP Host 0 40101 40105 5 Command Host Port 1 Modbus TCP IP Host 690915 690924 Ack d Queue Host Port 690925 690934 Disabled Queue Hast Port Modbus TCP IP Host Modbus TCP IP Host gt i 7 1 1 1 DXL Registers PLC Registers DXL Registers PLC Registers If you select the Show Host Port Registries button in the Polled mode the Host Port Registers window will appear with only one tab at the bottom of the window DXL Registers This window will display the address length function device kind number and name of the registers for the DXL
84. is selected then the DXL cannot send another message until an acknowledgement has been received or the system has timed out whichever is first You can set the Timeout Period from 3 seconds to 30 seconds from the Timeout sec drop down menu 3 24 1 5 Host Port ASCII Messages Monitor The Monitor tab lets you control the connection monitor E timers between the host and the DXL You can monitor Identification Connection Protocol Messages Monitor Masters M Connection Monitor the connection for faults by checking the Monitor F Moran Connection For Fake Connection for Faults box and specifying a timeout ad st si Report Faults To Master period for the connection in the Timeout sec drop down i menu The DXL system will detect a fault on this connection if it has not received a message from the external host within this period The default value for this timeout period is 10 seconds When you select this option the DXL will send messages to the host at least twice in each timeout period This allows the host to monitor the connection as well You can choose which Master Station to report these faults to by clicking on the name of a Master Station in the Report Faults To Master drop down menu 3 24 1 6 Host Port ASCII Messages Masters The Masters tab lets you associate some or all of the Master Stations with the host port The command messages that the host sends to a Master are written into the c
85. item lets you reset the column and status bar panel layout order and i x DXL pki width R font and main window po sition 9 Doyou wish to reset column and status bar panel layout order and width font and main window position dimensions back to their default values dimensions back to their default values A confirmation message 1s displayed when you select this item You can click on Reset to reset the default values or click on Cancel to cancel the operation 5 2 6 6 Show Scrollbar Select Show Scrollbar to toggle the scrollbar on the Log Viewer window to On or Off The Show Scrollbar menu item is checked when the scrollbar is displayed and this is illustrated in the figure below The scrollbar can also be toggled on or off by clicking the grey scrollbar EH Toggle Scrollbar in the Log Viewer window If the scrollbar is on and the Auto Download mode is on then the Log Viewer will attempt to download all the logs that it can SE DXL Log Yiewer connected to 1 exchange E a Oj xj File Edit Search Filter Transfer Format eT rre fInternal Interct January 20 2005 09 55 27 31 AM This exchange is acting as the clock Font master Font Size b WE Debug fInternal Interct January 20 2005 09 55 27 31 AM Sent periodic broadcast request to determine clock master Colors gt NU SUCCESS Info fInternal Interct January 20 2005 09 58 27 31 AM This exchange is acting as the clock 5 master Column setting
86. last line or item has been reached IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 247 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 6 2 1 6 Keypad Group 3 nea gt amp 4 The key performs the two context sensitive functions described below e Select the key to return the display to the next highest level in the menu hierarchy unless the user 1s in the process of editing a programmable value If you are already at the top level then the display is not changed e If you select the key while editing a value then this ends the editing process and returns the cursor to the left hand position on the display without saving any changes Q CA o The key performs the three context sensitive functions described below e Select the key to display the selected menu item on one of the three top level screens that display menu selections e g If you press the key when the cursor 1s on Set Time Date under Setup then this brings up a screen that displays the current time and date e While you are editing an item you can select the key to complete the editing process by saving the modified value and returning the cursor to the left hand position of the display e When the DXL is displaying a list of faults select the key to acknowledge the fault at the cursor position If you do this from the Unacknowledged Faults screen which displays only unacknowledged faults then the newly acknowledged fault is immediately removed
87. made to a Station from a Master In this example Device 1 would be the Station and Device 2 would be the Master Note that 1t is not always necessary that two devices are involved in triggering an alarm There may be only one device involved such as in the case of an alarm that is triggered by turning on a call recorder at a Station In this case Device 1 would be the Station and there would be no entry for Device 2 It is important to remember that the DXL is only responsible for activating or deactivating the video switch through the Status Output However the DXL operator 1s not responsible for the action that the switch takes after 1t has been activated or deactivated as this 1s entirely up to those responsible for programming the video switch The following table displays the various combinations of alarms On Event Off event Device Device 2 Explanation Switch 1s activated when a Station makes a call request Answer l to a Master Call request Station Master o l l Acknowledge Switch is deactivated when the call request is acknowledged by the Master Switch is activated when a Station makes a call request End l to a Master Station Master o l l l Cancel Switch is deactivated when the call is terminated or cancelled Switch is activated when a call is made from a Master to Call End Station Master a Station Switch is deactivated when the Master ends the call Switch is activated when the Master begins monitoring a Station Moni
88. mean that the subclasses belonging to that B Host 7 Wamings z erpe infomation class will also be used You will have to turn on or off each message ead ieee Eo class and subclass individually along with their related message Types E dd 7 Other Configuration MARA i o 7 Fauls ee _ Turning message Types on and off for a Class of messages i e Host H E System Activity will only affect that particular Class without affecting its subclasses i System Startup Similarly turning message Types on and off for a subclass of messages Zee i e Register Protocol will only affect that particular subclass Hence changes only apply to the selected class or subclass If you are in Selected log class and all its subclasses mode clicking on a tick will affect the inclusion of messages for both the selected class and all its subclasses but not its parent ancestor classes Also note that e A black tick beside a class means that all messages of any type belonging to that class or one of its subclasses will be displayed e A black tick beside a type means that all messages of that type belonging to the selected class or one of its subclasses will be displayed e The absence of a tick beside a class means that no messages of any type belonging to that class or one of its subclasses will be displayed e The absence of a tick beside a type means that no messages of that type belonging to the selected class or one of its subc
89. name of the Host Port from the Host Port drop down menu This menu displays all the Host Ports that are currently associated with the DXL 3 23 1 4 System Properties Logging ane re siena Tes all renal xi events which include intercom activities TSM Dialing Master Operations Clack Logging General call requests etc A description of Logs Saved Log Messages Use this button to select which log messages and how they are managed and saved is are saved by the system outlined in the DXL Log Viewer section Use this button to select which of this manual HA I pit eg ea system resets All other saved log messages will be stored in volatile memory and lost when an The Logging tab shown below lets you exchange is reset automatically save Log messages for future reference These messages can be saved either in volatile or non volatile memory on the DXL Cancel Click on the Saved Log Messages button if you want to save the Logs in volatile memory These logs will be lost if the exchange is reset or there is a power failure You can select the logs that you want to save from the IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 133 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Save Log Messages window that appears Please refer to the DXL Log Viewer section of this manual for a description of the options in this window and for help on how to use these options Click on the Log Message Storage button if you want to save Logs in iol x non
90. not already been downloaded Alllogs e Select Today s logs to download the logs for the present day Los C Curent hour s logs e Select Current hour s logs to download logs for the current hour Bange of hours e Select Range of hours to set a range of time within which you want to download the logs Enter the date and time to begin the logs in From and tick Until to set the end date and time for the logs If you leave the Until entry unticked then all the logs after the time entered in From will be downloaded You can select the date by using the calendar that appears in the date drop down menu The standard calendar control lets you scroll through the months using the arrow buttons To change the year click on the year and use the scroll to change to the required year You can also enter the date by clicking on each entry in date and January 2005 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fr S 3 bb F 10 47 12 149 74 typing it in manually 17 18 19 Hb 21 24 25 26 27 28 You can select the time by scrolling through the times using the scroll button on the 31 lt Today 20 01 2005 Page 222 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL right of the time entry or by clicking on the hour entry in time and typing it in manually To change between AM and PM click on it and scroll or type it in again Click on Cancel or press the Esc key to cancel the download if you don t want to retrieve any logs The
91. of devices has been disabled then these devices are omitted from this priority search The length of the digits in the prefix area is fixed by the entry in Prefix Digits This entry cannot be individually set for each function so you will have to decide on the number of prefix digits and this number will be the same for all the function prefixes For example if you decide that the Prefix Digit is 2 then each function prefix must have two characters You can insert a leading zero if the function prefix is only a single digit You can also disable certain functions by leaving a prefix entry for a particular function empty This causes the empty cell to be filled with the word Disabled You can also click in the cell and choose Disabled from the drop down menu Each function that is listed in the Function area is listed in the table below Note that the O and 1 options referred to in the table are the parameter fields for the control function Page 126 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 MicroComm DXL Call Master Call Page Zone Allows a TSM to make a call Enter the required Prefix and then the Master Station ID 3 Call Station i to a Station with preceding zeroes if required Enter the required Prefix and then the visiting booth ID with preceding zeroes if required All TSM k 11 4 Call Visiting Booth ida Sl to make a ca to a visiting booth Control Master Manned Control Page Zone Program Control Station Aud
92. on port 50009 bound and Now most recent log accepting connections on socket 6 X Debug fInternal shells January 20 2005 09 10 40 31 AM Shell on socket 29 started e Specify 20 01 2005 3 10 27 AM Info fInternal Intercom Tasks CLK January 20 2005 09 13 27 50 AM This exchange is acting as the clock master Debug fInternal Intercom Tasks CLK January 20 2005 09 13 27 50 AM Sent periodic broadcast request to determine clock master NU_SUCCESS Match Selection N OK Cancel 0 1b4 two_ex Ex 84 lt from IP gt AAA Time Filters are particularly useful in conjunction with searches They limit the range of the search to those log entries that pass the filter criteria Generally the most useful Time Filter is the Relative E T to Now L T setting This 1s used to display only those logs from the last day or last hour This greatly speeds up searches and makes the scrollbar more useful for scanning and locating logs A time filter with a specific start and end time is particularly useful if you are studying events from a particular period of time for example last Monday from 6 00am to noon IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 221 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 5 2 5 Transfer Transfer The transfer menu commands are used to control how and when the log viewer comme 4 Select Exchanges will get log entries from the connected exchanges Download Logs Automatically Download Logs 45 Needed Automatically Str
93. on the Add button to add a new video monitor Note that you cannot define a Video Monitor if you do not have a Video Switch defined with the Camera Monitor Commands option This Camera Monitor Commands option is selected in the Commands tab of the Video Switches section in Configure of the DXL Configuration Editor If you have not defined this type of Video Switch then the program will give you an error message shown below when you try to save your Video Monitor parameters DXL Administrator l x Please select a video switch in the Identification tab You may have to create your video switches first if Y there are none available Choose the video switch that you want to associate with this video monitor from the deo Switch 1 fideo 1 Video Switch drop down menu Note that you can associate the same video switch with more than one video monitor Also note that you will not see any video switches in this menu 1f they have not been previously defined Once you have defined the video switch that you want to xl use with this video monitor you will have to enter the ie video monitor that you want to use by entering the Number T number into the Output Monitor entry Nme SS h aaa Note that this value will have to fall in the same range as Video Switch the numbers that you had entered for the Max Monitor Output for this video switch in the Camera Monitor onitor Output hn Comman
94. same format i e the message sent from the DXL to the host will be preceded by a Done command The Respond To All Host Commands box is checked by default This is the recommended option which means that the DXL will respond to all commands sent by a host The response can be a positive confirmation Done or a negative confirmation Sntx Busy or Fail If this box is left unchecked then only the negative confirmation messages will be sent from the DXL back to the host Status Messages can be sent in two different forms e Response Message Format or e Status Message Format If the Use Response Method Format is unchecked the Respond To All Host Commands box is checked and Use Status Message Format is checked in the case of a positive response i e Done the DXL will respond to the host by echoing the command and not preceded it by a Done command In the case of a negative response it will still respond with a negative confirmation IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 139 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL In order to prevent the DXL from overwriting messages the host must send an acknowledge message after processing both Status Messages and Response Messages sent by the DXL Hence the DXL can be configured to wait for an acknowledgement to each message that it has sent to the host Select the Wait For Acknowledge Messages checkbox if you want the host to send an acknowledgement to the DXL after it has received a message from the DXL If this option
95. status of the lines or inputs T indicates an idle state A indicates a switch A line voltage B indicates a switch B line voltage S indicates a short circuit fault connection and O indicates an open circuit fault connection As an example Switch A and Switch B will often appear on a microphone Station as follows Page 262 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 6 6 1 4 The SCC2 Audio Inputs Option This option works identically to the SCC1 Audio Inputs option and is not covered RA here again Please see the section above in order to determine how this option works p2 6 6 1 5 The Status Inputs Option DCC Status Inputs The Status Inputs are four general purpose lines that can be employed for various aces a r meet purposes Each line on this screen represents the state of one of the four Status Status In 3 Ocet Inputs and is comprised of two fields The first field consists of the number that Sains DR Jeet designates which Status Input it is ex Status Input 1 and the second field indicates the state of the chosen Status Input Note that these states are displayed as Occt Open Circuit when the Status Inputs are not being used A list of the states is shown in the table below Table The Status Inputs Option S No 6 6 1 6 The Status Outputs Option The status outputs are four general purpose lines that can be employed
96. tabs will be present if a system has CCTV or Host Ports Page 48 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Paging Microphone Master Paging Microphones are only used to make aes Paging Feedback Outputs Identification Switches Call Settings Levels Filter Control announcements to page zones and can only transmit audio in one direction Stations cannot make call requests to these masters and Paging Microphones cannot establish calls with Masters or Stations These Masters are usually associated with a PTT switch that is pressed when the Master wants to transmit a page Again additional tabs will be present if a system has CCTV or Host Ports Master Group Master Groups are a special type of master they are not Identification Members Secondary Permissions i masters in the physical sense Instead a Master Group is an entity that has different masters as members of its group All masters that are members of a master group share the permission lists discussed later of all the masters in the group Additional tabs will be present if a system has CCTV or Host Ports IP Master The IP Master type is used by the IMS 6XX devices and Permissions Paging Feedback Dutputs a Identification Switches Tones CalSetings Control Secondary utilize Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP for all audio traffic The inter exchange Ethernet network is used for call connections between exchanges Such systems do not re
97. tce My Documents want to import the file into Then click on the Import button This brings up the Import Sound s From window Select the location of the file to be imported by using the icons or type the name of the file to be imported in the File name entry Click on Open to import the sound file s into the selected area or click on Cancel to cancel the operation My Documents 2 Shortcut to Current Versions G whiste wav em ooo Files of type Tones wav tone y Cancel A Record Select this option to record a sound type so that it can be used for playback This brings up the Record Sound window Most often this option is used to record a Message sound which can then be played back when required Note that it is necessary to have a sound card microphone and other devices for recording purposes You will receive a message once the sound has finished recording You can click Cancel at any time to cancel the operation and close the Record Sound window If you are recording a configuration sound and it exceeds the time total time limit for recorded sounds you will receive an error message x Name Length Limit 108 6 sec i Recording will now stop as it has reached the length limit Position INN Lenath 0 00 sec 0 00 sec Play Save Cancel Enter a name for the file into the Name entry and then click on xj Save to save this recorded sound o Mame Length Limit 113 8 sec
98. term and the long term mode you need to set the Power Estimate Time for both the Short Estimate Time and the Long Estimate Time Sensitivity If the advanced ALA algorithm is not Identification Filter Detector selected in System Properties the ALA Detector Properties Identification tab sensitiv y requires a Sensitivity parameter to be set When estimating the power of quiet Power Estimate Time signals the DXL may produce a power Shot 100 ms estimate that is too small to be used A internally To correct this you can Threshold IZ increase the sensitivity from the Duration 250 ms Sensitivity drop down menu so that the LTPE is small but not zero Sensitivity should also be set gt 1 when using Relative mode in quiet environments that are producing many alarms or for detecting noises in very quiet environments Please refer to the ALA section in Diagnostics to view the power estimates for a given channel If the power estimates are very low then you will know that you need to increase the sensitivity of the detector Power Estimate Time The Power Estimate Time is the time period over which the system averages the power of the signal There are two selections that you can make Short and Long e Short The Short Time Power Estimate averages the power over a short period of Power Estimate Time time Using the drop down menu you can set the Short Power Estimate Time in the range of 20 ms to 50
99. that includes both hardware and operational characteristics of the system Each project has a name and will normally be located in the default folder DXL Projects The user can select another folder 1f he wishes Page 6 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 New Project Open Project and Exit are the only choices that you can make without an open project Selecting File will reveal a set of options Once you have opened a project the other items Close Project Save Project As Move or Rename Project and Delete Project will be available Administrator Software MicroComm DXL MicroComm DXL Administrator Grey Institution cbd File Edit Communications Help New Project Open Project Close Project Save Project As Move or Rename Project Delete Project 1 C Documents and Settings KeithSMy Documents DXL Projects Grey Institution dxl 2 C Documents and Settings KeithS My Documents DXL Projects VOiPExample dx 3 C Documents and Settings KeithSMy Documents DXL Projects TrainingProject dx 4 C Documents and Settings KeithS My Documents DXLTrainingProject TrainingProject dxl Exit 2 4 1 1 Click on New Project if you want to create a new project The New DXL Project dialog box will appear New Project xi Project Name l Create Project In CAD ocuments and Settings KeithS My DocumentsiDXL Projects Browse Coreei The Create Project In entry is set to the default DXL Projects
100. that is specific to the user Every DCC or DCE has space available for two Station Control Cards SCC1 and SCC2 The type of stations that will be connected to the unit will determine the type of SCC cards that you will have to select 3 3 1 Exchange Properties Window 3 3 1 1 Exchanges Identification Click on the Add Exchange button This brings up the xi Exchange Properties window which has two tabs feen setnes Identification and Settings The Identification tab has Number I entries for ID Number Exchange Name Info IP Name Support Services Address and Phone Number Initially the default Wof number appears in the Number text box or the next IP Address fi 0 0 0 1 Phone Number number in sequence if the user had previously added an exchange You can change this number to a value that suites your design A consideration in selecting numbers is that when all the exchanges are displayed in the system they are initially displayed in increasing ID numerical order Previous Next Cancel Type the name of the exchange into the Name entry The name is 15 xi ae Contains one DCC and one DCE l o A used in displays logs and diagnostics and should provide a descriptive Located in equipment room of theSupport Sevices Buidind identification of the exchange 1 e Housing Unit 1 The Info text box is optional and is used to add any useful information that will help to describe the exchange a
101. the colour scheme or click on Cancel to cancel the operation This option is disabled if there are no saved filter settings that you can load Cancel _ Save As Option Select Save As in order to save the most recent colour scheme for later xi reuse Type a name for the colour schemes that you want to save in New New Filter Name Internal options Existing Filters the project when the user clicks on the Save button The Existing Filter CLK and Shets Filter Name These colour schemes are saved with the application and not area displays the colour schemes that have already been saved Click on Cancel to cancel the operation N Cancel Delete Option Select Delete to delete an existing colour scheme This brings up the Delete Color Scheme window Click on the name of the filter that you want to delete and then click on Delete to delete any saved colour schemes The program will display a confirmation message Are you absolutely sure you wish to permanently delete the selected filter So you can click on Delete to delete the colour scheme or click on Cancel to cancel the operation This option is also disabled 1f there are no saved filter settings that you can delete Delete Color Scheme l x Select one or more filters to delete DXL Administrator J x AN Are you absolutely sure you wish to permanently delete the selected filter i Cancel Delete Cancel R Page 232 I
102. the drop down list in the dialog will automatically select the first available port on that DCC If the port is not found then the first available port in the system will be selected instead Furthermore the next device that 1s created will automatically select the next available port unless you have selected a different location in the hardware tree view Note for VOIP stations ports are created automatically as needed IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 29 Administrator Software 3 2 2 8 Tones Tones are used in the DXL system to inform operators and users on the status of calls There are three basic tones that are used with most devices None Normal and Alternate Select None if you don t want to hear a tone The sound that you will hear for a Normal or Alternate tone will depend on how you have configured these tones in the Tones section of Configure Tones are used at various times during a call Start End and Reminder To hear a tone at the beginning of a call choose Start To hear a tone at the end of a call when the call is finished choose End To hear a tone as a periodic reminder while a call is in progress choose Reminder Master 11 Central Control 1 Properties Secondary Permissions Identification Switches mEall Announce End None Reminder None Call Request Acknowledge Tone None v Tones Call Settings Levels Filters Control MicroComm DXL x
103. the status bar at the bottom of the Log Viewer window when you are on the last line log of the Log Viewer window However this message will disappear if this option is not selected On a busy system logs may be coming in so fast that there is no chance to scroll off the last row and aborting doesn t help either because another log comes in as soon as the previous one is aborted In this case it would be useful for you to turn off the stream button as this will disable streaming altogether and will give you to change the filter so as to decrease the frequency of logs being streamed IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 225 Administrator Software Download Logs Automatically Download Logs As Needed v Automatically Stream Current Logs Stay At End OF Logs When Streaming Page 226 MicroComm DXL px Log Yiewer connected to 1 exchange File Edit Search Filter Transfer Format O ec e IE X Debug Internal Shells Info o 49 23 00 AM 09 49 23 00 AM 09 49 27 38 4M Shell on socket 80 finished Shell on socket 78 finished This exchange is acting as the clock a 20 2005 January 20 2005 fInternal Intercom Tasks CLK January 20 2005 Debug Internal Intercom Tasks CLK January 20 2005 09 49 27 38 Sent periodic broac t request to INU_SUCCESS This exchange is acting as the clock master Sent periodic broadcast request to determine clock master NU_SUCCESS This exchange is acting as the clock master
104. them This indicates that there is an error om with the file and hence you will not be Delete allowed to activate this file gt Size freee Checksum 2712247035 Import Export Page 176 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL If you are already connected to the DA x exchanges on the DXL when the File OO Ta Refresh Select Exchanges Manager window opens then you will be eee eestor oe able to see the Applications on aaa Desa Exchange s area This area displays all the hes Dox 05283 applications that are currently loaded on the resrztenan pete Boas exchanges that the PC is connected to To Size nasil view which exchange an application is on Checksum select the application and then click the Show Exchanges button The application that has a tick mark beside it is the only E application that is currently active on the fo Show Exchanges exchanges When you open the File Manager window all other DXL Administrator windows become disabled so that you can only click on items and buttons in the File Manager window In this case when you connect to exchanges from the File Manager window you can only view the contents of the Communication Status window You cannot resize this window or click on the window 4 2 3 Export You can export configuration files and its associated sound files and application files if you want to e mail them to another
105. these actions will cause the Alarm Properties dialog box to open To add an Alarm click on the Add button in the Alarms tab The Alarm Properties dialog box appears OK Cancel From the Status Output drop down menu select the Status Output x that is to be associated with this video switch Status Output a AOOO The On Event is the occurrence of a specific event that triggers the Bhevent CalReet H contact closure of the status output switch Choose the event that you want to use to trigger the alarm from the On Event drop down menu Dff Event Answer Acknowledge E A list of the possible events in the On Event drop down menu is Station 2001 Housing 1 Enty shown below Master Any a On Event Call Request Cancel Tal Ee a Call Monitor Master Call Request Master Call Visiting Booth Call Visiting Booth Enable Alarm ALA Alarm Call Recorder Un Booth Recorder On The Off Event is the occurrence of a specific event that opens the status output contact Choose the event that you want to use to turn off the alarm from the Off Event drop down menu The menu items that appear in the Off Event drop down menu depend on the On Event that you have chosen When you press the Add button you will see the last two titles in the Alarm Properties window as being Station and Master This applies if the On Event is entered as a Call the default setting Depending on the IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 15
106. these parameters helps with hardware debugging and troubleshooting This has been described in the table below 23 C 26 C 23 C C G 24 SP INNIN Table The Temperatures Option DXL Parameter Status of Parameter Action to be Taken 1 Voltage V Good None pL eS o hin O gt Cerk why volage is sonieh Za Fan Speed Slow None Medium Check fan speed Fast Check fan speed Not spinning Check why fan is not spinning degrees Celsius as expected 6 6 1 10 The Audio Trunk Option A call connection between exchanges in a DXL system uses a digital audio trunk Audio Trunk Local Works 1 Loop Works 1 which is usually configured in a ring topology that includes all the exchanges in Se a the system Press the key to select this option This will take you to the Audio Trunk screen This screen displays the name and number of the audio trunk along with whether it is referring to the Local parameter or the Loop parameter Loop stands for the main audio trunk or Master name that encompasses various exchanges Local stands for the line that is coming into the DCC from the Exchange that is before it the DCC in the audio trunk 6 6 1 11 The Firmware Store Option a o Application Files Select this option by pressing the gt key This brings up the Application Files 0B6800140 02B1 HEX GZ i OB6500210Y02B30 BIN G window This window displays the firmware that iS curenty running on
107. want to give a the configuration in the Configuration Name entry then click on the OK button An empty DXL Configuration Editor window will open with the MES name that you assigned to the configuration in the title bar The characters A 9 lt gt cannot be used in the xi configuration name and you will get an error message if you have A E E used one of these characters after clicking the OK button Opening an Existing Configuration If you have already created a configuration for the project that you have open j then a Configurations window will pop up with the name of the configuration s Configuration _1 0 displayed You will also see three buttons at the bottom of this window o Configuration_3 Configuration_4 Since you can define many configurations for the same project click on New to define a new configuration for the active project To open an existing configuration select the name of the configuration that you want to open and click on Open or double click the configuration name If you do not want to open a new or existing configuration then click on the Cancel button New Cancel When opening an older configuration the program will prompt you 1f it needs to upgrade the configuration to match the Administrator DXL Administrator i x A You are opening a configuration with a version 1 3 7 that is older than those supported by the current version of the application 1 4 2 to 1
108. 0 ms short fioo me e Long The Long Time Power Estimate averages the power over a longer period of time You can use the drop down menu to set set the Long Power Estimate Time in the range of 1 sec to 20 sec Threshold The Threshold is a value that must be exceeded before the system starts timing the duration Duration This is the time the signal must exceed the threshold before an alarm is generated IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 155 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 26 Video Switches A video switch uses the configuration information to program how an external CCTV switch 1s controlled Video switches are controlled by the DXL system either through one of the serial ports on a DCC or through status outputs on a DCC or DCE The DXL supports both a Serial Connection Method of operation and an Alarm Contacts Method of operation The Alarm Contacts Method of operation uses physical Status Output contacts on the DXL to control external video switching equipment The Serial Connection Method of operation sends commands through the serial port to the video switch The commands can trigger alarms open or close virtual contacts or cause the switch to connect cameras to monitors You can use either one of these two methods can be used to control a video switch 3 26 1 Video Switches Properties Dialog Box You can define a Video Switch by selecting Video Switches in the Configure box of the DXL Configuration
109. 1 Y Supervise Port 2 first port is usually used as a Call Request switch and a the first switch on the second port is usually used as a None Hook Switch Some station switches have terminating resistors and can be supervised to check for open or short circuit faults on the audio lines The check boxes beside Supervise Port 1 and Supervise Port 2 turn this capability on or off Note that if you have an unsupervised port then you will only be able to define one switch for that port except for IP Stations which support 4 pre defined switches with no supervision Page 74 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL The pull down menu on the Report Faults To drop down menu lists all the IMS IP or host monitored Master Stations in the system The master station that received the reported fault requires a display or host Select the master station that will be monitoring hardware faults from this list All the faults that are detected on the supervised switches will be forwarded to the master that you define here If the master station has not yet been defined you will have to return to this entry later Note that 1f you do not define a master to report the faults to then the faults will still appear on the DXL but they will not be reported to any of the master stations 3 1 2 1 Using a pre defined switch If you want to use a pre defined switch or you want to EZ TTT xl change the properties of an existing swit
110. 1 a 2 a 3 a 4 a 5 a 0 When adjusting the clock s two character format field if you repeatedly press the a key then this will produce the sequence AM PM 4 ML 4 AM IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 245 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL v This key performs the two context sensitive functions described below You can select the v key to parse a list of items such as a Fault list This key behaves as follows e Ifthe cursor is on a line other than the last line of the display and there are additional items below the current line then select the v key to move the cursor down one line The contents of the current display window do not change e Ifthe cursor is on the last line of the display and there additional items on the list then select the v key to scroll the entire contents of the display up by one line such that the last line displays the new item Hence the previous first line is dropped and the cursor remains on the last line e Ifthe cursor is on the last item of the list the string lt Last Item gt is displayed on that line for a 1 second period the list does not wrap After the 1 second period has expired the line is refreshed with the original information This is to inform the user that the last line or item has been reached e To edit an item e g setting the clock select the v key to display the previous valid value for the selected field If the selected field contains the
111. 2 60 Eng Lab Debugger 6400 1392 168 0 102 192168 0 103 D0121FFFFFCE TMMre 5 1 1 192 168 0211 60 Eng Lab Standalone Testing 3000 1392 168 0 103 j 192168 01M 00121FFFFFES ICEr ale 192 168 0211 Eng Lab Debugger 9999 192 168 0 101 192 168 0106 00121FFFFFES ICE 5 0 0 192 166 0203 60 e 9996 132 168 0 106 192168 0 104 00121FFFFFCEB ICEr 5 1 1 192168 0 212 60 9998 192 168 0 104 offline 00121FFFFFCE ICE 192 168 0 203 60 9995 132 168 0 107 192 168 0105 00121FFFFFDO ICEr 5 1 1 192168 0 212 90 ENG 368281 0 02 Eng Lab Standalone 9997 132 168 0 105 Update Selected Based on Template Device Upgrade Firmware on Selected Devices Hint To select multiple devices hold down the CTRL or SHIFT key To delete a device simply click on the row and hit the Delete key This removes the device from the VOIP Device Manager s listing and any data files in the configurations Data Voip directory and can be used to cleanup old or repurposed devices 4 6 2 Fixed Device Value Columns The fixed columns with blue text are always read only and are not editable 4 6 2 1 Status column The first column is the status column and shows various icons to indicate offline red and template status Page 192 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 4 6 2 2 Scanned IP This columns shows the currently known IP address for a node after a scan is completed otherwise it shows offline for those that are not found on a scan 4 6 2 3 Mac Address Shows t
112. 27 314M This exchange is acting as the lt lt Configuration clock master i Pal Faults X Debug fInternal Intercom Tasks CLK January 20 09 55 27 31 4M Sent periodic broadcast request E z to determine clock master E o Installation NU_SUCCESS E System Activity Info AIinternal Intercom Tasks CLK January 20 09 58 27 31 AM This exchange is acting as the H E System Startup clock master Debug Internal Intercam Tasks CLK January 20 2005 127 31 Sent periodic broadcast request to determine clock master KR Cancel Se lo 1b4 two_ex Ex 84 lt from IP gt End of logs Page 230 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL In order to keep the changes made in a subclass independent of changes made in a class and vice versa select the Selected Log Class only option So changing the colour of a class or a subclass and making changes to its properties will only affect the particular class or subclass that these changes are being made to Similarly changing the colours for each option in the Show Log Type display for a class or a subclass will only affect that particular class or subclass If the options in Log Type Colour are set to different colours then the class or the subclass that this applies to will appear as a multicolored box Hence changes only apply to the selected class or subclass SS DxL Log Viewer connected to 1 exchange A Oj x Fie Edit Search Filter Transfer Format io x Status and
113. 3033 Games Room C Properties i x Identification Switches Tones Cal Settings po ALA Filters Permissions Outputs Selectors Number Function 22222 Add Delet E e x Function Station Call Status Indicator y Dutput Settings Port H ousing Building 2 DCC 2 IMS MCC Status Output 4 Output Change Dutput Type NO Contact Cancel Station 2008 Cell A101 Properties x Identification Switches Tones Call Settings Levels ALA Fites Permissions Outputs Selectors Selector Kind Zone Select Outputs y 207 RelayControl Cancel IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 80 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL The list on the selectors tab will display the selectors of the currently selected kind that are associated with the talkback station and only selectors of that kind can be added to the station Selector Kind Speaker Line Groups 3 7 1 11 Station Properties Status Registers Note that the Status Registers tab will not appear if you xl gt gt Identification Switches Tones Call Settings Levels CCTV ALA have not defined any Host Ports in the system Se Be eo e a Status Message Mode Peer to peer C Polled Register Based Hast Ports If you have already defined Host Ports then you will see a list of them and they will all appear with a checkbox which is unticked by default beside them Tick the Host Ports that you want the Station to report it
114. 4 2 Continuing to work with it could lead to unpredictable results You should update the configuration to work with this application What do you want to do Continue Update It is recommended that you always choose to update the configuration and then perform a Save as with a new name for backup purposes If you do not want to update for example if you cannot update the site s DXL firmware to match the new version then you should quit and use the required earlier version of the MicroComm DXL Administrator to edit that configuration DXL Configuration Editor Following either of the two operations described above the DXL Configuration Editor window appears with the name of the configuration on the top title line You can begin to edit parameters in this window only 1f the configuration is Unlocked Note that the Lock Unlock button toggles each time it is pressed For a new project the window opens in the Unlocked state but with an existing project it will open in the Locked state IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 15 Administrator Software e If a DXL Configuration Editor window appears with a locked padlock a MicroComm DXL icon beside the Lock Unlock buttont the configuration is locked from editing and you will not be allowed to edit this configuration until it is unlocked e Jfa DXL Configuration Editor appears with an unlocked padlock a icon beside the Lock Unlock button the configuration can
115. 5 January 20 2005 January 20 2005 January 20 2005 09 49 23 D0 AM 09 49 23 D0 AM 09 49 27 38 AM 09 49 27 38 4M Shell on socket 80 finished Shell on socket 78 finished This exchange is acting as the clock master Sent periodic broadcast request to determine clock master NU_SUCCESS This exchange is acting as the clock master Sent periodic broadcast request to determine clock master NU_SUCCESS This exchange is acting as the clock master Sent periodic broadcast request to determine clock master NU_SUCCESS This exchange is acting as the clock master fInternal Intercom Tasks CLK January 20 2005 09 52 27 31 AM fInternal Intercom Tasks CLK January 20 2005 09 52 27 31 AM fInternal Intercom Tasks CLK January 20 2005 09 55 27 31 AM fInternal Intercom Tasks CLK January 20 2005 09 55 27 31 AM fInternal Intercom Tasks CLK January 20 2005 09 58 27 31 AM Debug Internal Intercom Tasks CLK nroadcast request to 0 1b4 two_ex Ex 84 lt from IP gt End of logs If this option is left unticked then even though the new logs that are streaming in are moving upwards the highlighted log will remain at the point where the user last clicked on the Log Viewer Screen Note that you cannot select this option if you do not select the Automatically Stream Current Logs option in the Transfer menu Note that when you have this option turned on you will always see the message End of Logs in
116. 55 SY Stel Properties On a 135 Dil SOS POV S state watatcrssananners one deoses uaa ds tena datceeds el uote cto aons yeudat nade weed oe lactis aussdu asus veudan seed e yestie E nase yestuactacteseaduonee 136 324 HostrorDialos BOK asics ts li e A E 136 3 24 1 1 Host Port Properties Td emt Cann A AA NS a ee ae 136 3 24 12 Ost POr COME CUA ds 137 3 24 1 3 Host Bor Protocol aa A AA O AA 137 a nk AN MESES RON U O A A II r A 138 3 24 1 4 Host Port ASCH Messages WMIeSsaces 0 as 139 3 24 1 5 Host Port ASCI Messages MOMO A San 140 3 24 1 6 Host Pore ASCH Messages Mas a Sea dvadiacteapeadgntancandgpalendans 140 3 24 1 7 Host Port Register Based Messages Protocol oooooooooonnnccncncnnnnnnnnnononononononnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnos 141 3 24 1 8 Host Port Register Based Messages MeSsages cccscccccccccccccssneeeessssseseeececccceeessssaeeeeasssseseeeeeeess 142 3 24 1 9 Host Port Register Based Messages Mont 142 3241 10 Host Port Register Based Messages RESISTERS us ii ii A isa 142 Page v IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL IZAN NOM Re sister DeESCr PHOS sessed erates ahr aus need a ad inet 143 3 24 1 11 Host Port Register Based Messages Masters cccsssssssssseeeececccccccceecceeeeesssseeeeeeeeeceeseesssaeeggesssses 145 3 24 1 12 Host Port Register Based Messages Status Registers ccccccccccccccccccceeessssseeeeeececcceeeeesuaeeeee
117. 7 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL type of event that is selected this may not always be the title for the two entries The choices that you make for these two entries are displayed under Device 1 and Device 2 in the Alarms tab window Example when the On event is Call and the Off Event is End then x the two drop down menus are titled as Station and Master In this ee Status Output Eee a TF tale a case the status output contact closes when a call is made from a Master to the Station and opens when the call ends On Event Call y However when the On Event is Master Call and the Off Event is Dff Event End El End then the titles for the two drop down menus change to Master Station 1 Station 1 O and Master In this case the status output contact closed when a call is o EE A A fs Bd lI ri is made to a Master from second Master The designation for the devices DF w Cancel depends on the type of On Event that you choose Click on the OK button in the Alarm Properties window when you have selected all the parameters and return to the Video Switch Properties Alarm tab The display window of the Alarm tab will show the values that you have chosen In the Alarms tab display area Device 1 and Device 2 refer to the two devices that may be involved in triggering an alarm The choice of devices is made in the last two entries of the Alarm Properties window For example a call alarm is triggered when a call is
118. AN or High Speed Inter Connected Firewalled VIA Rhine II Fast Ethern Wizard amp New Connection Wizard Page 287 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL New Connection Wizard opens with a page entitled Welcome to the New Connection Wizard After reading the information about what the Wizard does you can click on Next gt button The next page of the Wizard the Network Connection tino Type asks you what type of connection you want to set up mad Select the Connect to the internet followed by clicking on Connect to the Intemet the Next gt button Connect to the Intemet so you can browse the Web and read email Connect to the network at my workplace Connect to a business network using dial up or VPN so you can work from home a field office or another location Set up an advanced connection Connect directly to another computer using your serial parallel or infrared port or set up this computer so that other computers can connect to it The next page of the Wizard is Getting Ready Select the Miiaauica Getting Ready Set up connection manually option then click on Next gt ao is preparing to set up your Intemet connection button How do you want to connect to the Intemet Choose from a list of Internet service providers ISPs Set up my connection manually For a dial up connection you will need your account name password and a phone rumberfor your SP F F
119. Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 4 3 REMOTE T TONE ONE RRO RARE Rte iaa 187 4 4 RENO INGO ODL NA A Ni 188 4 5 LB A E E AA 188 4 5 1 Using the DXL Administrator ALA Diagnostics Function ccccccccnncnccnnnnonnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononononnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 188 Adsl Detalled ALA Analysis Or lo iia dci 188 4 6 VOTE Device MANS EA A IA A aia 192 4 6 1 DMA MO o a o 192 4 6 2 Fred Device Value COMAS A AA A AS 192 OZ AUS CO II AAA ata 192 As a Ae A A TA 193 A A II NS 193 ep IS A Po RE o a ann cenens deta ueeutendans 193 AOL PO WA E Eo AA 193 AO Doman A e o 193 A R A ds 193 4 6 3 UserEdltable Device Value Colums AA ASS A AS AS ASS AS A uleesiaea ins 193 Ol N nr NAAA as 193 Ao DESNU 0 2 A nn PROC OC evr Ce tr ee 193 7A opie US O ras 193 O WENGE CG a E nosh wets neta camera ete wie tas ea nceinetean N 193 4 6 4 AA E ee ais no O A Ae arte terrae tee sero a a Ter Tey tire Tear 194 4 6 5 A 194 4 6 6 Select Template Dic a e ais States 194 4 6 7 Goto Template Webs TS e T E E A olerenaeeiad 194 4 6 8 Update Selected Based on Template Device ant 194 4 6 9 Update Firmware On Selected Devices id 194 BT IMS GIOT INWA re UP erage Serv CF sd E 195 4 7 1 DEE 1i cae E ee E E EAT REAR Ee AEA Co come one eRe AEA TE TA NE Crete er en ae eee ree eee eee 195 5S ifthe VicroComim DAXL Log VIE WEE A a casas AA A AA EA AA 197 5 1 TTL TOG I VON A O cesT lee dems ce edhe 197 5 1 1 Oem ote Los Vio Wer sc tio trola 200 5 1 2 COMMECUING to the EXCHANGES aen
120. All as a class name in the Class column The Unknown type of class is only applicable to All This is because if the type is unknown then so is the class hence you can t control it on a per class basis Note that no changes will be made until you click on the OK button to accept the changes and return to the Log Viewer window Click on Cancel to retain the previous values and nullify any changes made in the current window 5 2 4 3 Exchange Filter You can filter the logs to display entries from only a particular Exchange or set of Exchanges Once this selection has been made it can be saved for reuse and loaded when required A tick mark appears next to Exchange Filter in the Filter menu if this filter has been turned on Hold the pointer over Exchange Filter and then select a particular option Most of the common options have been discussed in the previous section The Modify option 1s described below Modify Option Select Modify to view or change the filter settings This brings up 10 x the Exchange Filter window which lists all the exchanges in the AET AEA current Project To display the message log entries for an Exchange or 50 lHousng Suing 2 Cleat a group of Exchanges place a tick mark beside all the Exchanges whose log messages you want displayed Then click the OK button to display the log messages from the selected Exchange s The log entries that are from the unselected Exchange s wil
121. BE as Station 2401 Games Room A Properties x Permissions Outputs Selectors three separate stations namely Games Room A Identification Switches Tones CallSettings Levels ALA Fites Exercise Yard A and Entrance A Setting the Number 2407 Configure entry in the DXL Configuration Editor to casts Stations allows us to Add Delete or select _ a Properties for each station When you click the Add button the Station Properties dialog box appears E Nore z Type Talkback Station y Compound Member You need to identify the station with an ID Number and noes A HousingBuilding1 y E y fi y 3 y Name and using the pull down menu assign Talkback Station as the Type of station Cancel Type Talkback Station Speaker Station Handset Station The entries for First Port and Last Port tell the configuration which ports Handset Speaker Station Compodad Station are connected together in parallel for this station In this picture 3 ports are LEO Station Generic Station Talkback Station connected in parallel Page 86 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL The station Exercise Yard A settings are shown on the AE right The ports 4 to 7 of the TBE are connected in parallel to give an audio output of 20 watts Exercise Yard Template None Talkback Station ll y HousingBuiingt z free z a oi a The stati
122. C cards SCC 400 SCC 401 and SCC 300 cards Talkback Stations connect to the DXL system using a TBE on a USB connection similar to a DCE IP Stations use VOIP over Ethernet and require a VOIP PCI card in every DCC A half duplex Intercom Station uses an audio speaker as both the station loudspeaker and the station microphone Such stations have one or two switches the first switch is normally used to generate a call request signal while the optional second switch is usually used to act as a rotary switch for program distribution The DXL supports 3 types of speaker stations 300 series with only a speaker and possibly a transformer at the intercom station Generic Stations 400 series intercom stations with a microphone amplifier at the station Speaker Stations and 401 series intercom stations LED Stations which have a microphone amplifier and a LED that provides a visible feedback signal to the station The speaker stations available for use with the SCC 400 cards include Harding Instrument s ICM 420 ICM 430 ICS 4x0 and 45 ohm speakers that have been augmented with an ICB 400 intercom board The SCC 401 cards support ICM 421 ICM 431 and ICS 4x1 stations The SCC 300 can be used with ICM 320 ICM 330 and ICM 3x0 stations as well existing generic 45 ohm speakers are compatible with the SCC 300 A Handset Station is a full duplex station wired to 2 adjacent channels on an SCC 400 card A call request is generated when a button next to th
123. DEDAL BEAR ENa DIN A system along with all the files that are associated with it This window is for oB6800251 02B30 BIN G OB66800310 01B35 BIN GzZ display only and cannot be edited OBfA200410 01B9 BIM GZ IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 265 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 6 6 1 12 The Error Counters Option Press the key to select this option which brings up the DCC Error Counters screen This screen has two options displayed Audio DSP and ALA DSP You can select either option by placing the cursor at the start of each line and pressing the key When selected both options display a DCC DSP Errors screen which displays various errors in the system Please contact Harding Instruments in order to decipher these errors DCC DSP Errors Watchdogs SPI Errors DCC Error Counters FPGA Errors Audio DSP A D Errors ALA DSP Sw Overrun iSw Reports DCC DSP Errors McBSP Errors Cycle Overruns slips 6 6 2 The DCE 1 Status Option The options that exist under the DCE Status Option are similar to the options DCE 1 status under the DCC status Option so please refer to the DCC Status Options in the coche Dairy acter o f a SCC1l Audio Inputs previous section for a description of these options The DCE options are listed lscc2 Audio Inputs below Status Inputs status Outputs 1 MCC Audio Inputs SCC1 Outputs 2 SCCI Audio Inputs 3 SCC2 Audio Inputs DCE T Status Screen Status Inputs scrol
124. Display message V Beep J Use active configuration if needed one is missing Restore Defaults i Cancel Transfer Option You can select different options in the drop down menu in Transfer to set the preferences for how the logs are to be downloaded from the DXL Exchanges Transfer Full manual Full manual an Full automatic Restore last Select Full manual to disable the three options in the Transfer menu which are Automatically Download Logs As Needed Automatically Stream Current Logs and Stay At End of Logs When Streaming These 3 options are discussed further with the discussion of the Transfer menu section Select Full automatic to enable all the 3 options Select Restore last to restore the saved settings that were used when the Log Viewer was last closed IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 237 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Scrollbar Option Scrollbar lets you show or hide the scrollbar on the main Log Viewer window Scrollbar Show i Show Hide Restore last Select Show to display the scrollbar on startup Select Hide to hide the scrollbar from view on startup Select Restore last to restore the setting that was in use when the log Viewer was last shut down All the settings in the Scrollbar drop down menu affect the Show Scrollbar option in the Format Menu Format Settings Put a tick mark in the Restore last column format settings and which columns to display checkbo
125. E Today 20 01 2005 DXL Administrator x i No log messages have been generated on 19 01 2005 If there are no logs that match the date that you specified then the program will display the message depicted on the right If there are no logs at the time that you specified then the last log with an earlier time will be selected and displayed Hit OK to carry out the search or Cancel to cancel the operation 5 2 4 Filter Menu You can filter the log messages so that only messages that match all the filter criterion are displayed When the display is currently being filtered by using PEA Shift Ctrl 4 any of the filter types then a Filter status message is displayed in the status bar located near the top of the DXL Log Viewer window This is done in order to inform the user that the messages in the Log Viewer window are Class amp Type Filter Exchange Filter Message Text Filter currently being filtered The Filters that are currently in use will have a tick Time Filter mark beside them in the Filter menu More than one filter can be applied to log messages at the same time There are four types of filters Class amp Type Filter Exchange Filter Message Text Filter and Time Filter Once you have made the filter selections then the various setups can be saved for reuse and loaded when required If all the logs are not displayed and some are currently filtered then a tick mark appears next to the filter name in the
126. E a el Denaanoieiass 267 6 6 4 THE DCE S MS OPIO Deea aa aro 267 6 6 5 The DCE Ae Stats OpiOis iastesac aaa Mada ad el oia 267 6 6 6 The Contogratioa OPIO dead a E T T Seharccdaresbedudacincudadsineat A A 267 OF Ahe Taull MENU a aa EEA E NN 268 6 7 1 The Unackhowledeed Pags OPINA iaa 268 6 7 2 The DEC Faults OPIO radio a N decile ad dias 270 6 7 3 The DCE T Fauls OPIO Nease a E ioiaids 270 6 7 4 THe DCE 2 Foui pi aena a E E a A a a eaters oN Al 6 7 5 The DCE 3 ats Opioits sisatarsass a ciate iM d ad I elu ia ZI 6 7 6 The DCE F Fauls ODIOM aa Setar neces eae da naried A eau cananicad A TE E AA 271 OO DIQUE SECOS A SAA AAA AAA nT ee ee ee 271 HR SAUS ALCA SA A AA Is 272 6 9 1 O o e ies antes tere 212 Oo ll The R CO aia 212 OILZ Th lnstall dC iodo 212 OS Ene Tr Tad eO aa aA E A AETA AAE 212 OIO inal Oene IP AAT CSSCS IS EA SA AN TET O A E 273 T MOO E AAA A IN 275 Fil The BOSE ODIOS VV OW 2 it aa aie Date A aaa te tates Auta te icant N Atala Mien 273 TAA TATOO CG 110 n PEE ET EA NEREP EE EE EE sou erat EEE a N E EE E E E A E EE earn A ER 213 TAs The Cler IPAddiesses OPUS 276 TLES The Clear ALL OPIO a ae 276 Peles Theo Memory Tests Oplo tc A I EE O So in 211 LELA The Select Applicaton OPIO tica AA At 278 Za Loata Run PLONE AA A IA AA AS 278 Tid RO 279 IN A cau EE E E E cos vutsucayveds cece tasuseseveneucwevvaedccevedecass ves E EE S 281 Al Setting up a Serial Port Connection from your PC to a DXL DCCoooccoccccnnonanan
127. Editor and clicking on the Add button This brings up a dialog box that initially has 3 tabs Identification Connection and Alarms In the Connection tab if you select Serial connection instead of the default setting of Alarm Contacts the Alarms tab will change to a Command tab 3 26 1 1 Video Switches Properties Identification The Identification tab has 3 box entries ID Number Name and Info 3 26 1 2 Video Switches Properties Alarm Contacts Connection The Connection tab allows you to select either an Alarm x o e C Contacts or a Serial connection to control the Video Identification Connection Alarms Switch i K eseeesecoseoosesoceoccoseoosesseoo Serial Cancel Alarm Contacts The Alarm Contacts Method of operation requires that each video switch be explicitly configured with a Status Output Hence the video switch 1s activated when the Status Output closes and is deactivated when the Status Output opens In order to use the Status Output as a video switch control you will need to define a Status Output as a CCTV Alarm Contact in the Status Outputs section of Configure For each video switch that supports the Alarm Contacts Method the DXL allows you to define one or more alarm triggers In defining the alarm control you will need to include the Status Output that is activated along with the events that cause the Status Output to open and close
128. Editor since the last time you saved your settings Click on Cancel if you do not want the DXL Administrator to shut down 2 4 2 Edit Menu The Edit menu of the MicroComm DXL Administrator has only one entry Preferences A few of the items that can be set in Preferences include setting the default location for the project directory defining how many recent projects are displayed in the File menu and specifying the total length of all the tones and messages 2 4 2 1 Preferences The Edit menu of the MicroComm DXL Administrator brings up a list of Edit choices Selecting Preferences brings up a window with five tabs General Configuration Logging Diagnostics and Connection File Edit Communications Help Preferences Ctrl P 2 4 2 1 1 Preferences General The General tab allows you to select a location to SZ xl F K G save DXL project files On start up of the DXL eneral Corfguation Logging Diagnostics Connection Administrator a default project directory is used to store your projects this directory can be changed using the Browse feature The default directory displayed DXL Projects appears in the Default Project Directory text box Click the Browse button if you want to navigate to another location to specify a different default directory If you put a tickmark next to Display recent projects on the file menu the location of the most recently used projects will appear on the File me
129. Firmware Upgrade Server This tool aids the user in upgrading their IMS 640 VOIP Masters The IMS 640 Firmware Upgrade Server utility can be started by selecting IMS 640 Firmware Upgrade Server in the MicroComm DXL Diagnostics and Maintenance window View menu This tool requires a direct Ethernet connection to the subnet in use by the IMS 640 VOIP Masters and cannot be used over a router modem or serial link 4 7 1 Usage To upgrade your IMS 640 master ensure your PC is connected to the same network as the IMS 640 master and then start the TFTP upgrade server by selecting IMS 640 Firmware Upgrade Server from the View menu in the DXL Administrator s Diagnostic module You will be prompted with a standard file dialog to locate the upgrade files Navigate to the desired IMS 640 firmware upgrade directory included in the DXL Administrator Firmware directory or downloaded from our FTP site and select the find me file within that directory to start the upgrade server You may dismiss the notification dialog saying the server has been started by clicking the OK button the upgrade server will run until you quit the DXL Administrator After the server is started you may now upgrade any IMS 640 masters on the same network as your PC For each IMS 640 master you must initiate the upgrade via the IMS 640 s menus as detailed in the IMS 640 Master Station Firmware Upgrade Procedure obtained from technical support IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Pa
130. If the sensitivity is lower than this it will always trigger You want a combination of sensitivity and duration that will trigger on the hump of the graph Setting the settings equivalent to the yellow box will trigger on a medium sensitivity value but with these settings it has to be triggered for a long time Estimating from the graph this looks like a sensitivity of 40 db for 400 ms The settings for the green box needs to be a louder sound but doesn t have to be held as long From the graph this is estimated to be about 30 db for 200 ms The settings for the cyan box will trigger only on a really loud sound but it doesn t have to be there long That setting is about 25 db for 100 ms IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 189 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Detailed ALA Status Station 3 ICM 3 Sample Period me History seconds F TF Show Min Max Power Estimates in E n Time sec Alarms Duration m Time sec Different rooms and different buildings sound different Settings more like the yellow to green settings tend to work better and be easier to adjust for but 1t depends on the conditions of the area To fine tune settings set up the Detailed ALA Status Window go in a room and make a noise you want to detect Look at the graph and pick some sensitivity and duration settings from the graph using some of the above estimations Then make some noises you don t want to trigger on Talk loudly ki
131. If you leave this option unchecked and the TSM is associated with a Host Port then the TSM will not ring as the Host Port is sending it messages regarding the call requests and so the Host Port will have to find another way of alerting the TSM to these messages This single setting applies to Master Station Intercom Station and ALA call requests You can select the Automatically connect TSM Master with assigned Host Port when the handset goes off hook and call requests are queued option This option allows the DXL to automatically establish a connection with its assigned Host Port when the handset is lifted off hook and call requests are queued Alternatively if this option is not selected then the TSM will not automatically make this connection and will require that the host make the connection Select the option under Call Recording if you want to let the TSM automatically activate a call recorder when a Monitor connection is being made The process for monitoring a Station with a TSM has been described in the table above S No 14 If you select the Disable permissions check option then the system will disable permissions that have been set for Masters Master Groups etc The general purpose of this option is to perform testing on the system when it is initially installed For testing purposes the permissions may be disabled in order to ensure that all the Masters Master Groups etc in the system can call each other If this option is
132. Initial Volume and Call Priority are discussed in section 3 2 2 Program Group is used for stations that are allowed to listen to music Each program group will consist of several audio sources often at two different audio levels 3 7 1 5 Station Properties Levels The Levels tab can be used to increase or decrease the sound levels transmitted or received by the station These settings cannot be changed while the system 1s running and are used to balance the sound levels in a facility to compensate for different room acoustics The AGC check box will turn on the automatic gain control which will try and adjust all incoming sounds to have the same sound levels 3 7 1 6 Station Properties ALA You can set up to four different levels for the ALA depending on the types of alarm that you need You can set a different or the same ALA for each Level of the ALA from the drop down menu that is available with each Level When an ALA is triggered you can configure the system to do one of two things in the Action area The first option is to Queue Call Request which means that the system will queue a call request to a master the moment an ALA is triggered You will have to choose the master that you want to send a call request to from the Master drop down menu If you decide to queue a call request to a master when an ALA is triggered you can also set the priority of this call request by using the Call Request Priority slider
133. L Configuration Editor uses station templates in order to quickly and easily configure many similar Stations These are virtual devices with almost the same set of properties as real intercom Stations The principal difference is that they do not have a hardware port address You can define any station s based on a station template which is defined in the Station Template section of Configure Hence if a Station Template is defined as a Speaker Station then all the Stations based on this template will also be Speaker Stations You can quickly and easily configure many stations that have the same properties Station Templates are discussed in the Section 3 6 and it is highly recommended that you use them Defining Switches A station is usually associated with one or more switches Each switch will have an associated button usually located on the front panel of the station and it performs a specific function A station that has no switches cannot issue a call request and hence cannot make a call request The different types of switches are e Call Request switch when you press the button that is associated with this switch the station will issue a call request to a Master Station e Call Request Cancel switch when depressed this switch will cancel a previously queued call e Call End when depressed will end a call at a designated station e Hook Switch this switch is usually used with a Station that has a handset device When the
134. L do Paging Output Properties Leyes a 102 SIS id Pacing Output Properties Selector ata ad 102 3 13 1 5 Pacis Output Properes Fie aiaa a el ed ales 103 a e IS CELIS A nn y yy E AEE A OAN A EEA AOE 103 Sikk Pas Zone Properties Dialog BOX cds 103 3 14 1 1 Pase Zone Properties Iden CalOm o ida 104 3 14 1 2 Pase Zone Properties Tones aaa 104 3 14 1 3 Page Zone Properties Call Se tlin iS 104 14 164 Pase Zone Properties Members st E a A a Gioseioiawhde nootaeeank 105 3 14 1 5 Pace Zone Properties REMOS al id 105 SA4AG Pace Zone Properties Stats Re SISter A A lene a 106 Jel CS A O ica cwoa ated R E ease sanenads 107 Salas all Recorder Dial BO ida 107 3 15 1 1 Call Recorder Properties dentHca ON andas 107 3 15 1 2 Call Recorder Properties Call SEUS id 107 3 15 1 3 Call Recorder Properties Levels ce 108 313914 Call Recorders Properes CCTV Mont ine ine Rees 109 3 15 1 5 Call Recorders Properties PIE a A A A E A 109 Page iv IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL IALO MUSD ON COS ATREA A A A AA AI iee 110 LOL Misie sources Properties Dialo DI ia 110 3 16 1 1 Music SOURCE eroperties 1dentticaci n aia rar a A a a 110 3 16 1 2 Miuste Source Properties Call Settings ssenarinin A di 110 3 16 1 3 Music Source Properties Le aa 111 loka Music Source Properties HU in 111 Dele O aaa 112 SATA Prosan Group Dialos BOX as 112 3 17 1 1 Program Gtoup Properties Id entlicaiO elcid a eee E A 112
135. M desktop or panel mount Intercom Master Stations IMS Touch CEPT Porn EA CERT Rat None El Screen Master Stations TMM and or Telephone Set Master TSM Modem v Modem fv Stations or VoIP Intercom Master Stations If you select a PCI Card mecfzms y mcefzims y entry of XLon a Lonworks card you can use IMS master stations MEC Options MCC Options TMM master stations and or TSM master stations If you select a PCI Card entry of VOIP a voice over internet protocol card you can use VoIP masters and stations TMM master stations and or TSM master stations A VoIP system uses the Ethernet network as the digital audio trunk If you select VOIP then the CEPT Port entry will be dimmed and cannot be selected If the PCI Card selection is set to XLon the pull down menu on CEPT Port allows you to select the type of digital audio trunk None Copper or Fiber If the DCC has a modem then the Modem checkbox should be selected Page 36 J Supervised Status Input 1 Y Supervised Status Input 2 J Supervised Status Input 3 Y Supervised Status Input 4 SE 400 Series y Bi Dap 400 Series y Cancel J Supervised Status Input 1 Y Supervised Status Input 2 Y Supervised Status Input 3 J Supervised Status Input 4 SCC 1 400 Series y SCC 2 400 Series y Cancel IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL The entries for MCC SCC 1 and
136. M DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 26 1 5 Video Switches Properties Serial Commands When you choose the Serial connection method in the E Ohana x Connection tab the Commands tab appears a a E gt reco x In this tab you need to define the type of video switch that Video Switch Kind jae you are using from the Video Switch Kind drop down iia menu The present choices are Pelco Vicon Ultrak or Max Alarm 3999 Bosch Camera Monitor Commands Max Monitor Output 3999 You are also given two choices depending on the action that you want the video switch to take when an alarm is triggered The choices are the Alarm Commands option and the Camera Monitor Commands option You can select both these options at the same time If you check the Alarm Commands option a fourth tab entitled Alarms will appear 3 26 1 6 Video Switches Properties Serial Alarm This option informs a video switch that an event has occurred It identifies the type of event that occurs and sends through the serial port an Alarm Number to a video switch The Alarm Number is a unique identifier and corresponds to the occurrence of a specific event You need to define a unique Alarm Number for each different event that you want to trigger an alarm The Alarm Number is defined in the Alarms tab which appears on the Video Switches Properties dialog box when you select the Alarm Commands option The Max A
137. M DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 5 2 6 4 Column Settings Click on Format and then Column Settings to change the columns that appear on the Log Viewer window For each item of information listed under the Data heading you can choose to display that column in a dedicated column in the Log Viewer window or on the status bar The status bar will show the values for the currently selected log entry Remember that if you have selected multiple logs then one of your end points will still be the current row that you have selected even if it cannot be differentiated from any other selected row If you want the data to be displayed on the main Log Viewer window then tick the corresponding box under the Column heading If you want the data to be displayed on the Status Bar of the Log Viewer window then tick the corresponding box under the Status Bar heading The checkboxes under the Status Bar column heading are only available if the checkboxes under the Column heading are not checked In this case the data for a log will be displayed in the status bar when a log is selected instead of displaying it in a column in the Log Viewer window Column Format Settings a x Icon A Name Data Column Status Bar Format ceo 3 Type v Class m LMU a Vv LONA AA Configuration D v Block Number I Iv Date Iv Long Time Iw AM PM ms Soe ime Exchange E v Both Number Restore Defaults Cancel Roth You can a
138. M Telephone Master CE on hook MN shut down due to high temperature failure AL on hook and ringing IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 261 A ON onto O AO KC HT _ RG Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 6 6 1 3 The SCC1 Audio Inputs Option SCC refers to the Station Control Card Since both SCC1 and SCC2 have DEL SCC1 Status identical properties they are discussed here together Each SCC card has a pair of lines that can be used by the switches A and B and the audio lines in the case of a 400 series card However in the case of a 300 series card the switches have their own lines Each line on this screen represents the status of individual intercom Stations Each line is composed of four fields The first field is the hardware intercom number Since each SCC can support sixteen Stations it implies that the Station numbers run from 01 through 16 The second field is the Station ID number that is assigned in the Configuration If a Station has not been assigned with an ID number or there is no Configuration loaded then the string is displayed The third field is the text string or name assigned to the Station If the Station has not been assigned in the Configuration but has been loaded then the string is displayed If the Station is identified in the Configuration but has not had a text string assigned then blank characters are displayed The fourth field displays the
139. Match whole word only box If this is left unchecked then the search will also show all the logs that contain a part of the search string within their text body Tick the Match Case option if the text string or word that you are looking for is required to be case sensitive In the figure below the Log Viewer window has displayed all logs containing the word Shell Gl Message Text Filter xj ES DXL Log Yiewer connected to 1 exchange Ol x Fie Edit Search Filter Transfer Format Show Logs Containing 0 Filters EM ye Shell as Dap PURSES Ca PERTAIN ESENS ME Debug fInternal Shells January 21 2005 08 23 20 81 4M Shell on socket 65 started Shell on socket 67 started January 21 2005 08 39 46 564M Shell on socket 53 A trs Match case Regular expression PERL 5 style Internal Shells January 21 2005 Anternal Shells Exclude matching logs started ME Debug fInternal Shells January 21 2005 08 39 46 56A4M Shell on socket 54 Cancel started As 0 1b4 two_ex Ex 1 Colin J LOZ To look for a text string using a regular expression tick Regular expression Perl 5 style and enter the text string in the appropriate format Please refer to the Search menu for more information about using regular expressions IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 217 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Tick Exclude matching logs if you want to hide rather than show all the log entries that mat
140. MicroComm DXL Administrator Software amp Local User Interface V1 5 0a January 2014 Printed in Canada 2006 2014 Harding Instruments Co Ltd Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Table of Contents Cable 0 Contes ad SS oda Saas E A E A E E 1 Fable or PIsures IA A IS RAI RAE cana xl Ms WOVE VAC Wy os eces ca ceec oases TE A E AES succor saceussecceuesedeeussedesuya casa vecsauudeusedseceuerdeacstcccesoevecsuns 1 1 1 TITS COC ies NARA AAA A A A BRS Si cia 1 1 1 1 Administrator SoftWare saaana A A A aaa 1 1 1 2 Boca Wi WES all Uo 2c neers dc 1 1 1 3 POO UV LOG A A A ueecuateninecnaees 1 2 The Micro Comm DXL Administrator e sseossesssosssosssosssosseesssosseosseesseesseesseosseosseossecosecosesosecosesososssesososssesssesssesssessseso 3 2 1 PIGTAILS OIOF SVSUCIITAREQIAT CIN ENTS Sine aie ao hc stots Did tin an ac ea sinc hs Sate ote a oad 3 2 1 1 Minion SS A A E A a 3 AL2 Requirementstor Online O peras A An 3 2153 Optional Feature Regue Mie IG a od 3 22 ANSTANING Me WECFO COMEDIA A RINES IT AAA SAA AA AAA da 3 2 3 A EPP Reno 6 2 4 MicroComm DXL Administrator Main MEUS ds seca teecagnl a Wie iia tes hein Mea Genesee eas 6 2 4 1 A on i AE A E postr E DI E a a 6 AE NE E eaa a O O J DAM Open PEO dd 8 DANS CLOSE ELO Sua id daa ada 8 DEA Ns Save Pro E E A O o o A A eamneaaeaGite 8 DANS MOVE OF Rename PLOJCCL ais e E A a a 9 DONO As A A einai easiaes 9 ZA ES MANDAR A A A AD AS EAT ES AL DAS E EAS ah eeac
141. O 100 2 7 The RightTrack RT10 is supported in later DXL versions as an Ethernet connected Modbus DIO To use it simply select the Ethernet communication and fill in the devices IP Address and IP Port Note that the Output Type is fixed to f Ethernet RightTrack AT 10 Sink type outputs but you can add RT10 expander modules to increase the I O ase cee TERETE count as needed For a complete discussion on using the RT10 with DXL contact ee ort technical support Expanders ft 16 1 0 Communications ry The Modify button is available to allow some changes to a DIO that has been added W Default Input Supervision Cancel Page 40 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 3 2 5 Adding Modifying a PZE The PZE 110 Page Zone Expander offers a flexible means for adding page zones to a DXL system The unit allows for 3 separate page inputs with each input connected to 6 individually selectable relay controlled outputs Each input has a selectable controlled relay controlled by the DXL that can be used to key an amplifier In addition the PZE has 16 status inputs The following pop up will appear when you click Add PZE or PZE Properties x Modify a selected PZE If the status inputs have terminating resistors cnc you should check the Default Input Supervision entry Matt Up to 12 PZE 110s can be connected to each DXL exchange The Cancel a document IM PZE 110 1 0 gives
142. SCC 2 are selected using pull down menus The MCC selections can be set to e None if no master stations are required for the DCC e IMS if two IMS or TMM master stations are required e IMS TSM if one IMS or TMM master station and one TMS master station is required e TMS if two telephone set master stations are required The MCC Options can also be setup to enable disable the port supervision of the MCC status inputs Note that if you set the PCI Card to VOIP and have an MCC that allows the connection of a IMS or TMM master station and you attempt to configure an IMS master the software will prevent you from doing this and will give you a warning message In this case you must specify a TMM master station The SCCs can be selected to support the 300 series 400 series or 401 series intercom stations The dialog boxes below show the pull down selections for the five selectable entries DCC Properties x DCC Properties x DCC Properties x PCC Option PCC Option Y ALA Enhanced PCI Card Lon y CEPT Port Modem Y MCC 21M5 v MCC Options V Supervised Status Input 1 JV Supervised Status Input 2 JV Supervised Status Input 3 Y Supervised Status Input 4 SCC 1 400 Series y SCC 2 400 Series y Cancel DCC Properties x MPEC Options Y ALA Enhanced PCI Card Lon y CEPT Port Fiber y Modem W MCC 2 1M5 MCC Options V Supervised Status I
143. Sita ea sac ual enccpea tina bisa ea suc alanauua teins eines 21 32 3 Unlock Conmsuration Lock COnmOUnatiOM dido id da 22 A rereer cere eee 23 palo Ram A ee PR E a A Ce TE 23 3 2 Eran Conn eura ON lt a AA leaned eee AS A 27 Sa Order of Adding Design Components to the Configuration ooooooooonncncnnnnnnnnnnnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnss 27 Taa Common Device Enrics CAOS A 28 A ANUME E oa O 28 IN a a N N 29 P Ma a E E Soe POEM OCS TeTTA TTS TOT 29 D2 A A A tees te sdteerad Rust ead 29 A TBO O N 29 LO CA A A A A A A rege sudewtesuieastotatcents 29 E O E OS AA A O 29 A NN A aasisies a sasion A weiss Menta ap cia a ianan eau niceaie A saeen sank awe enenaeesidaumeeemen anes 30 dz La do Cal IREQUESE PO ios 30 Saz IO Cambios apar o tados 31 AA isa AAA A E no o E tartare ate eter thr ter ere 32 32 2 12 POSTA a a a a ide 32 3 2 2 13 FICE S PO A gn cae eis eee anata nao ea 32 3 2 2 14 AA A A a aa A O N 33 AN lo IV IGT ONO 9 PROL RIO CO 7 O e e E o EP EEE O EE 33 LO AMA BUZZ rV OVI A T A AAA 33 3 AGING EC NONO CS ega E E EEE E OTER 34 3 3 1 Exchange Properties W Id Wai id iaa 34 So bl Bxchanges den dos 34 iZ TASCMAaN SES Se NE E A 35 3302 Addins a DCC DEB DIO TBE or PZB 6 ar EX Change na il ii iaa 36 A O AS AAA e PO E E on o o A O A 36 DD Addins A DO A AAA A SE 38 iz Mod mea DECIDE is 40 Se Addms Modiymo a Di dais 40 zi Adding Modi iyne a RAB sasia a E a la en 41 32020 Addis ModE yin a LB By
144. Special Handling 2006 Unit Alnner Exit ICM 430 211 001 None Speaker Station Housing 1 DI Administration 2007 Unit TY Room ICM 430 211 001 None Speaker Station Housing 1 DI 2008 Cell 4101 ICM 430 411 101 1 Cell 4101 Speaker Station Housing 1 D 2009 Cell 4102 ICM 430 411 101 1 Cell 4101 Speaker Station Housing 1D 2010 Cell A103 ICM 430 411 101 1 Cell 4101 Speaker Station Housing 1 DI 2011 Cell A104 ICM 430 411 101 1 Cell 4101 Speaker Station Housing 1 DI 2012 Cell 4105 ICM 430 411 101 1 Cell 4101 Speaker Station Housing 1 DI 2013 Cell 4106 ICM 430 411 101 1 Cell 4101 Speaker Station Housing 14D 2014 Cell 4107 ICM 430 411 101 1 Cell 4101 Speaker Station Housing 1D 2015 Cell 4108 ICM 430 411 101 1 Cell 4101 Speaker Station Housing 1 DI 2016 Cell 4109 ICM 430 411 101 1 Cell 4101 Speaker Station Housing 1 DI 2017 Cell 4110 ICM 430 411 101 1 Cell 4101 Speaker Station Housing 1 DI 2018 Cell 4111 ICM 430 411 101 1 Cell 4101 Speaker Station Housing 14D 2019 Cell 4112 ICM 430 411 101 1 Cell 4101 Speaker Station Housing 1 DI 2020 Cell 4113 ICM 430 411 101 1 Cell 4101 Speaker Station Housing 1 DI 2021 Cell 4114 ICM 430 411 101 1 Cell 4101 Speaker Station Housing 1 DI 2022 Cell 4115 ICM 430 411 101 1 Cell 4101 Speaker Station Housing 1D 2023 Cell 4116 ICM 430 411 101 1 Cell 4101 Speaker Station Housing 14D 2024 Cell 4117 ICM 430 411 101 1 Cell 4101 Speaker Station Housin
145. Stations in the system From this list select the Stations that are to be members of the Station Group and click on the OK lal x Stations button Click on Cancel to leave the Select Stations window 2001 Housing 1 Entry 2002 Housing 1 Exit 2003 Unit 4 Duter Entry 2004 Unit 4 Outer Exit 2005 Unit amp Inner Entry 2006 Unit Inner Exit 2007 Unit TY Room 2101 Housing 1 AdminEntry 2102 Housing 1 AdminE xit 2103 Unit ExerciseEntry 2104 Unit Exercise Yard nn Mas Tomar Enters 7 i Cancel 3 8 1 3 Station Group Properties Permissions The Function pull down presents a list of operations that EAS Sts hii ss xl can be carried out on a group of stations Identification Members Permissions Add Delete Control Station Group Audio Level Alarm Control Station Group Call Request Control Station Group Program Monitor Station Group From this list select the function you want then select the Add button to bring up a Select Masters dialog box with a list of all the master stations in the system Select the master stations that are allowed to control this function then click on the OK button lofx Masters Central Control Central Control 1 Central Control 2 Central Control Supr Maintenance Office Housing 1 Supr NW Tower Unit B Control Housing 2 Supr Unit C Control Page 94 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software 3 9 Visiting Booths MicroComm DXL A visi
146. The Filter tab can be used to include an audio filter for x 1 y 1 gt Permissions Outputs Selectors both the incoming audio from the station and the outp ut Identification Switches Tones Call Settings Levels ALA Filters audio transmitted to the station The input and output A A i e Fil gt Fil filters can be one of five different types highpass eens Cee 200 3 400 lowpass bandstop bandpass advanced If None is ons i 7 EA m 0 pr selected no filter 1s used B PEEN fo El a erat os Al A A A 7 Corner 1200 Hz l Ts at Order ee x 250 500 1 000 2 000 Cancel The filter parameters can be set using the pull down menus Audio filters may be useful in rejecting background noise or compensating for different room acoustics 3 7 1 8 Station Properties Permissions The Permissions tab is used to specify which master xl sta tions are allowe d to call mo nit or or contr ol thi S Identification Switches Tones Call Settings Levels ALA Filters gt gt Permissions Outputs Selectors station The pull down menu for Function displays the nin MMMM various functions that can be performed CentralControl Unit Control IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 79 MicroComm DXL 3 7 1 9 Station Properties Outputs The Outputs tab allows you to activate an output when the station is in various operating states When the Add button is clicked a tree of the system hardw
147. XL Address PLC Address Entries Lenath LEN Status Message Mode Peer to peer Polled Show Host Port Registers Y Sequential registers Equal queue sizes Apply Changes Host Port 1 Door Control Properties Identification Connection Protocol Messages Monitor Masters Registers Status Registers Register Blocks DXL Address PLC Address Entries Length Handshake omo N pa Command 40200 B Status e90900 5 Alarm Queue jesog10 fs 4 h2 Ack d Queue saos3d f5 fo Disabled Queue fssosso fs afo C Polled Status Message Mode Peer to peer Show Host Port Registers Port Registers shown as they will update right after you click on Apply Changes Page 144 Sequential registers Equal queue sizes Apply Changes xi x IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Conflicting and Erroneous Addresses Note that if the number of digits in the offset part of the address that is entered is not equal to the number of digits that is defined in Digits in the Protocol tab then the program will automatically insert additional zeroes before the offset in order to make the number of digits in the offset equal to the number selected in Digits which is defined in the Protocol Tab If you specify an address block that is greater than the Maximum entry in the Protocol Tab then the program displays an error message H
148. Yes if you want to use up to 5 digit ID numbers for dialling to stations Click on No if you want to continue to use the default value of 4 digits for ID numbers Click on Cancel to return to the Station Properties window In the figure below notice the message that is received after entering 99999 for the ID number and then clicking on the OK button Station 99999 Housing 1 Entry Properties x Identification Switches Tones Call Settings Levels Filters Permissions Outputs Number 39999 Name Housing 1 Entry Info ICM 430 221 001 E Template None Type Speaker Station Compound Member Z xi Exchange Box Card Port s Se PEER 5 z system currently allows only 4 digits x dialing from a to a station A station is being Housing 1 y occ y 400 Series SCC 1 y fi y 2 created with a number of 99999 which requires 5 digits to dial to Would you like to use 5 digits for dialing to stations from now on Cancel Page 28 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Note that you can change the number of ID digits required to dial a master page zone station station group or visiting booth in the System section of Configure which will be discussed in Section 3 2 21 3 2 2 2 Name A name is assigned to each device in the DXL system Name can be up to 20 characters with no restriction on the type of characters and it should be descriptive so that it is readily identifiable Typ
149. a fixed template that has already Number AMES been defined in the Station Templates section of Name Cera Configure The station will be the same type as the Into template and the Type entry will be dimmed and you will not be allowed to select this option Template 21 Cell 4101 y Compound Member Set Template to None if the station 1S not based on a Exchange Box Card Port i ildi Y Y j Y Y pre defined template Use the drop down menu in Type Housing Buicing loco Mco ss SCC 1 o to select the type of station and finally choose the station port required Cancel 3 7 1 2 Station Properties Switches Up to two switches can be multiplexed over an audio line The 300 and 400 series intercom speaker stations can be ordered with no switches one switch or two switches Without a switch the station cannot generate a call request The two switches on a Speaker Station are usually used for generating call requests and for rotating through the available music channels The possible use for switches include the following e Call Request e Call Request Cancel e Call End e Hook Switch e Microphone Mute Switchl e Music Select e PTT Switch e Page e Panic Alarm e Tamper Alarm e Tamper Alarm Cancel e Unused e Volume Step IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 73 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL The Switches tab opens with the switches set to Unused xi These switches are predefined switches and cannot be Ide
150. a more complete description of the PZE 3 3 2 6 Adding Modifying a TBE A TBE 3XX can be added to an exchange when the Configure entry of the TBE Properties DXL Configuration Editor is set to Hardware The following pop up will appear when you click Add TBE or Modify a selected TBE Output voltage asy l You can add up to four DCEs and or TBEs to one exchange 3 3 3 Editing Exchange Entries Once you have entered all the parameters associated with the various exchanges you can select the exchanges option in the Configure entry of the DXL Configuration Editor window All the exchanges in the system will appear in the List pane Select one of the exchanges by clicking on it and then select the Properties button This will cause the Exchange Properties window to open for that particular exchange You can now edit the entries in this window Since we have not yet specified master stations or an audio trunk it will be necessary to return to the exchanges and complete the entries in the Settings tab DXL Configuration Editor Configuration O xj File Edit Configure Exchanges Lack a View Audio Trunk CE CC T IP Address Supporta ervices TA Housing Building 2 SpecialH andling ADO AdminB uilding Properties IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 41 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 3 4 Adding New Entries 8 Deleting Changing the properties of Existing Entries You will notice that all the sections in Co
151. address of the call recorder in the RTP IP Address box and the port number in the RTP port In either of the above cases you will ultimately end up with the DXL system sending an RTP audio stream with uncompressed 8 Ksamples sec u Law audio PCMU payload to your recording device which must handle any storage or playback of the audio 3 15 1 3 Call Recorder Properties Levels The Levels tab sets the speaker output level to the call eaurecoraer 9999 Properties E recorder You can adjust the output level in 1 dB steps from igeniication Cat Settings Levels CETV Monitors Fiter 16 dB to 16 dB This setting is made during the initial setup and it is used to compensate for sensitivity differences in the call recorders Previous Next Cancel Page 108 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 15 1 4 Call Recorders Properties CCTV Monitors The CCTV Monitors tab is used to connect a monitor to a E specified camera or sequence through a group of cameras ification CalSetings Levels CETV Monitors Fiter When the audio channel is opened to the line level output specified as a call recorder a signal will be sent to the Sequence Number Neme End Commend___ Defeuk Camera 1 1 M101 Show Default Camera 2 0102 video switch to connect the video cameras to the predefined monitors Add Delete 3 15 1 5 Call Recorders Properties Filter An audio filter can modif
152. age 279 Administrator Software Appendix A A1 Setting up a Serial Port Connection from your PC to a DXL DCC MicroComm DXL This Appendix gives instructions to the user on how to use Windows XP operating system to configure a serial port on your PC so that your PC can communicate with a MicroComm DXL System using a null modem cable Note that direct serial connections are no longer supported with Vista Windows 7 due to a lack of support in the operating system A 1 1 Using the New Connection Wizard The first step in configuring the serial port of your PC so that it can transfer information between your PC and a DXL DCC is to open the Control Panel window followed by double clicking the Network Connections icon This will open the Network Connections window The Network Connections window displays all the current Connections on your PC The next step in creating a serial connection is to use open the New Connection Wizard by using the File menu or double clicking the New Connection Wizard icon IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 10 xi File Edit View Favorites Tools Help a O Bak r EQ x P P Search Folders y Y x m ME Add Hardware Add or Remove Programs 43 Administrative Tools adobe Gamma 2 Adobe Version Cue il Autodesk Plot Style Manager Ril Autodesk Plotter Manager EA Automatic Updates 9 Date and Time SA Display Folder Options Fonts 2Game Controllers Y Internet Opti
153. ameter Value which is show in the table below Disable visiting booth Enable visiting booth without a timer Enable visiting booth for the entered number of minutes Enable the visiting booth for the Configuration visitation time Configuration visitation time has a 30 minute default value but can be changed in the Configuration Enter the required Prefix and then the Station ID with preceding zeroes if required IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Fixed Length Dialling Select the Fixed Length option to set a the fixed number of digits that need to be dialled when the TSM calls a station a master a page zone a station group or a visiting booth The number of digits varies from 1 to 5 digits and these digits can be selected using the drop down menu that appears with Station Master Page Zone Station Group and Visiting Booth System x TSM Dialing Master Operations Clock Logging General Dialing Format Function Prefixes Fixed Length Variable Length Prefix Digits fi z l Y Function fret a Fixed Length Id Digits ci Te Call Master 0 Table TSM Dral MEDL Station f4 y i UA Call Page Zone Timeout ms 500 f Call Station Master 2 si Call Visiting Booth 9 Page Zone 2 a J Dial Masters by Name Control Master Manned Disabled 4 Station Group 2 v i Control Page Zone Program 7 mSeparation Key l l Visiting Booth 2 Gy p Cont
154. ample dx Rename Project To window Even though all the projects and their associated files will appear in this window the program will only allow you to rename the current project that is open Type the new name of the renamed project into the File Name area Click the Save button to save the project under the new name Click on the Cancel button to exit the Move or Rename Project To window in which case the project will not be saved with this new name File name ae vr Save as type DXL Project Files dd 2 4 1 6 Delete Project This option lets you delete the open project The program will display a confirmation message Click on Delete in order to delete the project or click on Cancel in order to cancel the operation DXL Administrator x Are you absolutely sure you wish to permanently delete the entire DXL project C Documents and Settings KeithS My Documents DXL Projects Grey Institution dxl together with its data directory C Documents and Settings KeithS My Documents DXL Projects Grey Institution dxl Data 2 4 1 7 File Manager This invokes the File Manager after prompting to save your changes For more information refer to the MicroComm DXL Diagnostics and Maintenance section later in this manual 2 4 1 8 List of Recent Projects The File menu also contains a list of the most recently EMBAR opened projects This area will display from one to ten New Project project names The choice
155. amplifier and transmits audio to the four speaker lines in the Exercise Yard The mute control for amplifier 1 uses the Key relay associated with Speaker Group 1 In addition two other status output relays are to be operated when this page zone is selected The master station Unit Control has permission to make pages to this page zone 3 Page zone named Entrance uses audio amplifier 2 and transmits audio to the two speaker lines in the Entrance area The mute control for audio amplifier 2 uses the Key relay associated with Speaker Group 3 The master station Unit Control has permission to make pages to this page zone 4 Page zone named Unit Page sends audio to all the PZE speaker lines associated with the above three page zones as well as stations Cell 101 through Cell 125 and Cell 201 through Cell 225 The operators at master stations Unit Control and HousingI Super have permission to make pages to this page zone IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 97 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 10 1 Defining the Speaker Lines Once a PZE has been added to an Exchange the tree view xi of the hardware configuration will display the PZE entries Weston in an exchange Number 211 E Greylnstitution dl Name GamesRoomSpk1 H Housing Building 2 O N E HousingBuilding H DEL Exchange Group Port i DLE 1 HousingBuildingl y Ej Speaker Group 1 ho x al DCE 2 fe DCE 3 l PZE 1 H PZE 2 E Supports ervices H
156. andard v Reminder Tone Volume f TA A SD O OSO UEC E O OSOS 16dB jo Cancel The call request priority is used to determine the queue position of a device that makes a call to a master The top of the queue lists the highest priority device and the bottom of the queue lists the lowest priority device For example if Station has a priority of 20 Station 3 has a priority of 30 and Station 2 has a priority of 25 and all these devices call Master 1 then the devices will be queued at Master 1 as follows I Station 3 top of the queue I Station 2 I Station 1 bottom of the queue Where I stands for an intercom station call request Page 30 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 2 2 10 Call Priority The Call Priority option is used to determine if a new call should interrupt an existing call or page zone call A call requires an audio connection between two end devices and the DXL normally calculates the call priority as the maximum value of the call priorities assigned to the two end devices A call will be interrupted if a higher priority device makes a call to either one of the end devices Note that it is not possible to interrupt masters to initiate a call to the master while they are in an existing call Initially all priorities are set to the default value of 50 priority setting are in the range of 0 to 100 In most cases the priority is defined as the maximum of the priority of t
157. are is displayed The tree nodes can be expanded until the desired output port is displayed If an output is already used it will be dimmed if not it will be selectable The function of the output can be selected from the Function drop down menu Function Station Call Request Status Indicator Station Call Request Status Indicator Station Call Status Indicator Station Call or Call Request Status Indicator lt lt Station Status Indicator There are two tabs associated with the Properties display of an output The Setting tab allows the output to be set to blink flash fast flash wink or on The selected pattern will be used to drive the selected output port when the station is in the state s identified by the function This applies to all of the functions except the Station Status Indicator The Station Status indication function is predefined to flash the output in the call request state and to turn the output on in the call state 3 7 1 10 Station Properties Selectors When the station output is used in a page zone of a speaker line group or a relay controlled by a zone selected status output the Selectors tab is used to specify these Speaker Line Groups and the Zone Select Outputs These selectors may be activated when a page is made to the station The Selector Kind pull down menu offers the following choices Selector Kind Speaker Line Groups bl Speaker Line Groups Station
158. are not to be saved and you want to retain the previous values then you can nullify the changes that you A have made by hitting the button 6 3 1 2 Editing from a Remote Terminal Editing at a remote terminal is similar to editing at the DCC s front panel First you must place the cursor on the line containing the value to be modified Then press the gt key to begin the editing process Then use the 4 amp T keys to select the desired value for the field that you are modifying and use the gt and lt keys to move from field to field Not all digits are valid in all cases For example the digits 0 through 5 are valid when entering the tens of minutes field of the system time while the digits 6 through 9 are not If already on the last editable field the cursor will remain in the same position In a fashion similar to editing on the DCC s front panel you have to press the Enter key to store the modified value and return the cursor to the leftmost position on the screen Page 250 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL An example terminal based editing session is provided below with a red blinking box that is used to indicate the position of the cursor As an example the time is being changed from 2 32 PM to 12 38 AM e First position the cursor on the line that you want to modify In this f System Time Date example the system time is to be updated so the cursor i
159. are saved with the project and therefore it requires that a project is loaded before these filters can be configured Cancel XI If there are no saved Color Schemes and you click on the Select button then you i There are no saved Color Schemes will get a message saying There are no saved Color Schemes Abort Notification Option If you carry out an operation such as a search operation and want to be informed of whether the operation is aborted or not then the Abort Notification display is used If Display Message is ticked then you will see a dialog box that i Scrollbar update aborted Note The scrollbar will remain hidden will inform you if a message 1S aborted This message also appears if you abort an action by hitting the red STOP button If Beep is ticked then you will hear a beep sound indicating that a particular operation was aborted This sound also plays if you aborted the action by hitting the red STOP button These options are particularly helpful if the Log Viewer is carrying out simultaneous operations such as downloading logs during a search So in this case if you click the STOP button then the download will be aborted but the search will continue Hence depending on the message that you receive you will be aware of the operation that was aborted Message Configuration Option The logs in the database are generated using Configuration files The Log Viewer uses these Configuration
160. as if those screens had been invoked via the keypad e g pressing the key on the System Time Date screen should move the screen up one level to the Setup menu IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 271 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 6 9 Status Indicators 6 9 1 Introduction The front panel of the DCC and the DCE includes the three status indicators Run Fault and Install The function of each indicator 1s described below 6 9 1 1 The Run Indicator This indicator 1s Green in colour and is illuminated to indicate that the DCCs DCEs and DSP s are powered and running properly 6 9 1 2 The Install Indicator When a DCE is connected on the network but has not been assigned to a logical device in the Configuration i e it has not been installed then its front panel Eu indicator will begin to display an orange colour in order to provide notice to the user Similarly the indicator on the front panel of the DCC will begin to blink 1f there are DCEs defined in the Configuration for which a physical assignment has not yet been made It should be noted that the indicator on the DCC may be blinking without the indicator blinking on any of the DCE devices and conversely one or more indicators may be blinking on DCE devices without the DCC ca indicator blinking The Install indicator is Orange in colour and blinks on the DCC when one or more LonWorks USB or Ethernet connected devices such as DCEs are queued for installatio
161. as read the current message from the registers and that it is now ready for the DXL to write the next message IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 143 Administrator Software Polled Mode In the Polled mode the output registers are located on the DXL system and the external host must periodically read these registers or poll them in order to determine if there is a new message from the DXL In the polled mode the external host is made to read the handshake register in order to check for a new status message from the DXL Hence whenever the DXL has a status message to send to the host it will update the handshake register with a non zero value Therefore if a non zero value is returned when the host reads the handshake register it implies that a status message from the DXL is waiting to be read by the host Sequential Registers and Equal Queue Sizes Options The Sequential registers and Equal queue sizes check boxes are ticked by default Hence when an address is entered into Handshake then the default for the system is to sequentially add registers for the Command entry In a similar manner once an address is entered into Status the system will addresses automatically generate sequential for Alarm Queue Ack d Queue Disabled Queue You can uniformly change the number of Entries by using the scroll next to Alarm Queue the other two registers will change automatically If the Equal queue sizes box is unchecked then the q
162. asses all signals that occur Tee a outside this continuous range Bandwidth 1 y Octave From the figure on the right the filter passes all frequencies that occur below 500 Hz and above 1000 Hz and attenuates the frequencies that occur between 500 Hz and 1000 Hz Center 700 y Hz Order 4 As you increase the bandwidth of the band stop filter the range of frequencies that the filter is attenuating will increase Cancel IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 153 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL e Advanced filter You can use this type of filter if the standard filters do not provide sufficient filtering Please contact Technical Support at Harding Instruments if you wish to use this type of filter ALA Detector 1 ALA Properties xj Identification Filter Detector e No filter If you select None this means that you have not set a filter In this case you do not need to enter the bandwidth the _ Frequency Response dB vs Hz corner frequency or the order of the filter 250 500 1 000 2 000 3 25 1 3 ALA Detectors Properties Detector ALA detectors use the outputs from filters to generate alarms if the signals passed through the filters exceed certain a preset threshold This threshold depends on the frequency amplitude and duration If in the General tab of the System Properties window you selected the advanced ALA algorithm the parameters you will be required to set include Mode Power Estimate T
163. ation dialog box use the pull down menu to Ax select a speed of 57600 bps and use the check boxes to turn off all the Hardware Features Once these setting are made click OK to return to the General tab of the DXI Serial Properties dialog box You will now return to the Connect DXL Modem dialog box and you can close the dialog box at this time IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Connect DXL Modem ax User name lb Password To change the saved password click here IV Save this user name and password for the following users C Me only Anyone who uses this computer Dial ff _da Cocer Properties Hep Page 291 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL The Control Panel window will now Arias AR File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help Ay display the Dial up connection named Gs 3 seh i rodes o X 19 E DXL Modem Standard 56000 bps Mod Disconnected Firewalled LAN or High Speed Internet k Local Area Connection VIA Rhine II Fast Ethern Wizard 5 new Connection Wizard Page 292 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Appendix C Acknowledgements The DXL Firmware uses a software package entitled Time Routines developed by Michael Ringgaard As per his instructions we include the following notice The use of the routines in the Firmware package falls under condition 2 Time routines Copyright C 2002 Michael Ringgaard All rights res
164. ator Software MicroComm DXL 3 3 4 2 Add Button In most cases when you first define a configuration you will not have any stations defined In this case the list pane will be empty To add a new Station click on the Add button This brings up the Station Properties window where you can define the properties of your station Note we have scaled the size of the DXL Configuration Editor window DXL Configuration Editor Configuration 1 Oj x File Edit Configure Stations y Lock a View Hardware Number Name Info Template Type Por Grey Institutuin dl Support Services Housing 1 Housing 2 Special Handling Administration Station 4111 Properties x Identification Switches Tones Call Settings Levels Filters Permissions Outputs Number 111 Name Info ey Template None Type Speaker Station e Compound Member Exchange Box Card Port s Administration y occ y 400 Series SCC 1 y i y Cancel 3 3 4 3 Delete Button If you want to delete an existing station just click on the station xi and then click on the Delete button You can also click on the station and then click the Delete button on your keyboard Are you sure you wish to delete the selected Station Mig E J Irrespective of the method you use the program will ask you for confirmation before
165. ator User Manual F1 Selecting DXL Administrator User Manual F1 will bring up a PDF copy of the Administrator Software amp Local User Interface manual 2 4 4 2 Contact Information Clicking on this option brings up an information box giving the address and phone numbers for Harding Instruments Exit by clicking the OK button 2 4 4 3 About Clicking on About brings up an information window that displays the is xi current operating version of the MicroComm DXL Administrator along with copyright information and the name of the application This window is for Axl display purposes only Click on Version Info to obtain more details 1f required Exit this wndow by clicking on the OK button MicroCormm DXL Administrator Wersion 1 4 0 beta 6 AC50208 Copyright 2003 2011 Harding Instrument Co Ltd MicroComm DXL intercom system configuration logging and diagnostic application Version Info IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 13 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 The MicroComm DXL Configuration Editor Once you have opened a project the next step is to either open a new configuration or open an existing configuration Click on the Configuration button on MicroComm DXL Administrator window to open a new or existing configuration Opening a New Configuration If you have not defined a configuration for this project then a New xi Configuration dialog box will pop up Type the name that you
166. base and have a date greater than the date and time entered will be deleted This option will not affect logs that will actually be downloaded in the subsequent time period The process of picking the starting date and time as well as exporting logs before deletion is identical to the previous section and is not covered here again However it must be noted that ALL logs succeeding this date and time are deleted irrespective of the current Filter settings Also note that these logs are deleted permanently and it will not be possible to download them again from the Exchange hardware You will receive a confirmation message before x the logs are deleted Click on delete to Delete the aN Noe GRECO RG Caer A selected logs Or click on Cancel in order to cancel Warning The deletion is permanent Even if the logs are still on the exchange hardware you will not be able to redownload them the operation Delete i Page 208 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 5 2 3 Search Menu You can search through the logs for specific text in the message field Searches may initiate log transfers from the exchange s if the Log Viewer is online 5 2 3 1 Find To search for some text in the content of a message select Find in ES the Search menu This displays a standard find text dialog which is a Find what station resizable window You must enter the text string to search for in the Find what entry and
167. be edited If you click on the Unlock button and can t unlock the padlock the configuration has already been activated and cannot be modified further You will only be able to view the configuration settings You can use the Save as file entry to make an editable copy The DXL Configuration Editor window has 3 panes that display information as the system is built The pane on the left side is referred to as the Tree pane the pane on the upper right side 1s referred to as the List pane while the lower right pane it may not be present in all cases is referred to as the Function pane Initially the name of the project in this example the Grey Institution dxl is the only item that is displayed in the Tree pane However once you have defined exchanges these exchanges will also appear in the Tree pane Support Services Housing Unit 1 etc DXL Configuration Editor Configuration_4 File Edit Configure Hardware View Containment s E Grey Institution dsl Support Services Housing Unit 1 Housing Unit 2 Special Handling Administration Tree List Pane Function Unassigned Add Exchange Function Pane The DXL Configuration Editor window has two menu entries File and Edit which are discussed in detail in the next few sections Page 16 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 1 MicroComm DXL Configuration Editor Menus
168. ber 780 462 71 00 core _ Serial The serial connection works in exactly the same way as described for E the Configuration option Get IP Address es or Phone Number s From 7 Manual Entry Configuration Configuguration_1 0 Communications Link Connect Via Connect Using Communications cable between two computers y carei _ 4 1 2 1 3 Connection Problems There can be cases when the computer is able to retrieve the IP address phone 2 Exchange 100 5 upport Services at 10 0 0 1 number but is unable to set up a connection with the DXL box This could be Exchanae 200 Housing Building 1 at 10 0 0 2 Exchange 300 Housing Building 2 at 10 0 0 3 because the DXL box has been switched off or your computer cannot access itdueto e a some other reasons In this case the Communication Status window appears and displays the exchanges that you have chosen to connect to in grey dimmed Another connection problem could be that the exchange is already connected to another computer that is also using the administrator software In either case a retry box will pop up and count the number of seconds specified in the Refresh communication status every seconds before attempting to reconnect You can Page 170 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL choose to close the retry box and not connect to the exchange at all or click the reconnect now b
169. ble The function of the output can be selected from the Function drop down menu Function Station Call Request Status Indicator Station Call Request Status Indicator Station Call Status Indicator station Call or Call Request Status Indicator Station Status Indicator There are two tabs associated with the Properties x display of an output The Setting tab allows the output ermita Indicat to be set to blink flash fast flash wink or on The Output settings selected pattern will be used to drive the selected Port output port when the station is in the state s identified srs uldna 2 DCC 2 IMS MCC Status Output 4 0upu pesca by the function This applies to all of the functions Output Type NO Contact except the Station Status Indicator The Station Status indication function is predefined to flash the output in the call request state and to turn the output on in the call state Pattern aa Cancel IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 91 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 7 3 4 10 Talkback Station Properties Selectors When the TBE talkback output is used to drive the audio x gt Identification Switches Tones Call Settings Levels ALA Fites input of a speaker line group or a relay controlled by a 1 zone selected status output the Selectors tab is used to specify these Speaker Line Groups and the Zone o HERTZ a Select Outputs These selectors may be activated when Number Name
170. c source s from this and click OK This will add the selected music source s to the Member Music Sources area of the Members tab Once a music source has been added it will no longer be displayed in the Select Music Sources To delete a music source from this area click on the music source and then click the Delete button IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 113 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 18 Tones Tones are sound clips used to notify users that an event is about to occur or is in progress Selecting Tones in the Configuration entry of the DXL Configuration Editor will display in the list pane all the tones that have been defined in the configuration 3 18 1 Tones Dialog Box You can add a new tone to the configuration click on the Add button or to change an existing tone click on the tone that you want to edit and then click on the Properties button Either of these two operations will bring up a Tones Properties dialog box with two tabs Identification and Settings 3 18 1 1 Tone Properties Identification The Identification tab has entries for an ID Number a BEGGS SSS x tone Name and Info text box Click on the Select ies Setinas button to add a sound to the Sound entry This will bring Number fl up the Select Tone Sound window shown below Name StartTane SOSOSC S lolx wep l Configuration Sounds Shared Sounds an a zm Select Configuration Sounds Stored 1 2 sec Max 120 0 sec 850H2 250
171. call is made from a Master to a Station and not for any other type of event You have to choose the camera and monitors that you want to associate with each Master and each Station in the CCTV tab that appears in the Masters section and the Stations section of Configure respectively When a call is established with a particular device the system automatically connects the camera and the monitor at the two devices Note that cameras and monitors cannot be associated with compound stations or visiting booths but are rather associated with their constituent intercom stations For a discussion of the rules that assign cameras to monitors and vice versa please refer to the discussion of the CCTV tab in the Masters section of Configure Section 3 5 1 5 Page 162 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Note that you cannot define CCTV values for a Station or a Master if you have not defined a video switch with the Camera Monitor Commands selection Also note that you cannot define video cameras and video monitors in the Video Cameras and Video Monitors section of Configure if you have not defined video switches with the Camera Monitor Commands selection You will have to enter preset values for the type of switch that you have defined The different values that you need to enter are explained underneath e You will have to enter a value for Max Output Monitor which is the maximum number of monitors that can be used with the typ
172. cation If you type in a Number that is longer than 2 digits AA Ss Mision xi Identification Members Permissions then a dialog box will pop up asking you to confirm whether a different length is really required Click Yes Number m to make the change Note that this change is reflected in Name Cells A101 4125 the System Properties TSM Dialling tab selection in Into ul Configure This dialog box shows up for Stations Masters Page Zones and Visiting Booths as well DXL Administrator i xj 0 The system currently allows only 2 digits for fixed length dialing from a TSM to a station group A station y group is being created with a number of 2002 which requires 4 digits to dial to Would you like to use 4 digits for dialing to station groups from now on 3 8 1 2 Station Group Properties Members The Member Stations area lists all the Stations that are MASAS EAEE ES Identification Members Permissions members of this Station Group To add a Station to the list click Add This brings up the Select Stations Member Stations window displayed on the next page 2008 Cell A101 2009 Cell 4102 2010 Cell 4103 p 2011 Cell 4104 To remove a Station from the list simply select the a pls Station and then click on the Delete button m 2015 Cell 4108 2016 Cell A109 xi Cancel IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 93 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL The Select Stations window lists all the
173. ch click on the Feon catRewest x switch that you want to use and click on the input settings Properties button This brings up Switch pu Proper ties win dow wi th two tabs This win dow l ets Housing Building 1 DCC 400 Series SCC 1 Station Port 7 Switch Input Switch 2 Contact Type you define the settings for each switch MNO Momentary Nomaly Open Switch Properties Input Select the function that you want this switch to perform from the Function drop down menu Eam Call Request Cancel ds Call Request Cancel Call E nd Hook Switch Microphone Mute Swatch Music Select PTT Switch Page Panic Alarm Tamper Alarm Tamper Alarm Cancel Unused Volume Step The program will automatically insert the location of the switch into the Port information box Set the Contact Type of the switch from the drop down menu The audio line Contact Type switches in standard DXI DXL stations are Momentary Normally Open switches the MNG Momentan nomas Dnen TT MALO Momentary Normally Oper default setting but with Generic stations or external switches other switch types are MNC Momentary Normally Closed LAO Latched Normally Open possible LNC Latched Normally Closed IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 75 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Switch Properties Settings In the Settings tab you will have to set the call request x priority of the switch and the Master that the call Function Cal Request O
174. ch the search string that you enter When this option is selected the Show Logs Containing entry will switch to a Hide Logs Containing entry Click OK to activate the message text filter or click Cancel to cancel the search In the figure below the logs have been filtered to exclude all logs that contain the word Listener and hence all logs that do not contain this word have been displayed SS DXL Log Viewer connected to 1 exchange Es iol xj File Edit Search Filter Transfer Format 2 Fiters M Ps gt B ZE Message Text Filter x Hide Logs Containing Listener Match whole word only Match case Regular expression PERL 5 style LK January 21 2005 08 01 21 69 4M This exchange is acting as the clack mas ster fInternalf Intercom Tasks CLK January 21 2005 08 01 21 69 4M Sent periodic broadcast request to determine clock master NU_SUCCESS fInternal Intercom Tasks CLK January 21 2005 08 04 21 694M This exchange is acting as the clock master fInternal Intercom Tasks CLK January 21 2005 08 04 21 69 4M Sent periodic broadcast request to determine clock master NU_SUCCESS fInternal Intercom Tasks CLK January 21 2005 08 07 21 63 4M This exchange is acting as the clock master Iv Exclude matching logs Cancel two_ex lex 1 Colin Start of logs f 5 2 4 5 Time Filter l l E Show All Shift Ctri A The logs can be filtered to display only messages at or within a
175. character is used to separate the Device ID from the parameter field for different Functions You can set this character to either a or a IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 129 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Variable Length Dialling For variable length dialling you still HT x have to enter the prefix but you can omit sina Master Operations Clock Logging Genera e a Dialing Format Function Prefixes the leading zeroes before the device ID 0 o up l Digits Ty E i Fixed Length Variable Length PS ad por ieee le 19 dial to PLANON Sap ly Fixed Length Id Digits 1 Variable Length a IN E dial the prefix followed by 34 1 e 34 ston A Ee Enable TSM Dialing Timeout fe T Page Zone aE Timeout ms sc 0 Call Station The Timeout sec lets you configure a eon m Call Visiting Booth se Pace Zone gt M Dial Masters by Name Control Master Manned Disabled timeout after which it is assumed that Staton aroue f2 E e Control Page Zone Program 7 7 DN Termination Key l the number that you have dialled is visting Boot f2 y le rs ee eee Control Station Call Requests 4 complete You can set this timeout by iain a see Control Station Group Audio Level Alarm 3 4 z Control Station Group Call Request Disabled typing a number into the box that 1S Man TSM 234 Control Station Group Program 5 located beside this option Note that this Unman TSM 73 al
176. cified page This transmission would be in addition to the scheduled automatically generated transmissions transmitted over zone Clicking on the ADD button brings up a window that lists all the master stations defined in the configuration From this list you can select the appropriate master station s B x Masters 10 Central Control 11 Central Control 1 12 Central Control 2 13 Central Control Supr 14 Maintenance Office 20 Housing 1 Supr 21 Unit Control 24 Nw Tower 25 Unit B Control 30 Housing 2 Supr 31 Unit C Control 22 NE Tawar El Cancel IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 MicroComm DXL Signal 1 Twelve noon Properties x Identification Call Settings Permissions Function Control Signal v Central Control Add Delete Cancel Page 119 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 21 Schedules Schedules are used to set up a list of times when certain events are to occur With the DXL configuration a schedule is used to program the times when either a tone or message is to be broadcast An example of such a scheduled event is a buzzer sound to indicate the start and end of a classroom period Selecting Schedules in the Configuration entry of the DXL Configuration Editor will display in the List pane all the schedules that have been defined in the configuration 3 21 1 Schedule Dialog Box You can add a new schedule to the configuration by clicking on the Add button or to chang
177. cits Si cate gaan od 41 3 3 3 Edito x chance Pates Mlnonls pic cuneenelaenblautAanansWiiinda heures viel dunchGe aU Meat tanrans alae 41 3 3 4 Adding New Entries amp Deleting Changing the properties of Existing Entries ccccccccccccscssssssssesesseseeeeeees 42 Sol Properes BULO ar e ass 42 O AO DUO a e a a 43 RAY Delete BUOM ias 43 ode Duplicate DUO aaa 43 O E A cacao setae aes E A N A 46 Page ii IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 4 1 Audio run Dialog BOK ates hea ie 46 JAEL A do Trunk Properties Identidad 46 JAEL Audo Trunk Properties Ex Chane ia A E a 47 Ded VIG A RR 48 3 5 1 General Ta 0 sr en A A A A 50 FIPE CONTO lasica O 50 3 5 1 2 Master Proper es Paging Feedback isoon a a a aR aS 52 liar Master Properties Pernis SOIS a AA a a a e ae 53 Le Master Properties Secondary annen aa a e OSADO LO 54 So Master Properties COT V a SA EIA 54 0156 Master Properties OUnputs ts A a 59 IZ Msand TMM Master Sanon a asi 60 332k TINS and TMM Master Properties SwitChes orn E armada deadiot ese taadtareeiseaes 60 32 22 IMS and TMM Master Properties Gall Secuin oS cedidos 60 33 3 TOM Waster Stato ore eo oe ooo oca 61 39L ESM Master Properties WISE 61 222 Ls Wi Master Properties E alll Seti GS a lo teca 61 3 5 4 Paging Microphone Waste trae cds sank dud tian cath a r Spates aes eastdennedaweal oitks 61 3 5 4 1 Paging Microphone Master Properties Switches ooooooo
178. ck the tables if in a dayroom turn on TV at full volume turn on the showers open and close doors flush the toilet etc If it would trigger on the settings you pick examine the graph to determine how to exclude these while triggering on your desired sound Is the false trigger a loud noise for a short time Then gravitate towards the yellow box settings and make the trigger duration longer and maybe the sensitivity lower so it still picks up the real alarm but is too long for the false alarm to trigger Is the false alarm a low noise but for a long time LE a toilet flush If so make the trigger point higher probably also forcing a lower duration The bottom half of this graph is only of use once you have set up your desired threshold in the configuration and uploaded and activated the configuration The blue line starts increasing once the received power is above the Page 190 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL threshold Once the blue line starts going up it has to reach the duration settings before the trigger The red line indicates when the alarm is triggered the sound is above the sensitivity threshold for at least the duration This example looks like the trigger level was set approximately at the yellow box settings it s about where the yellow settings are judging by how long the alarm was on NOTE For a more detailed overview about setting up and tuning your ALA settings refer to our DXL ALA Settin
179. cnonnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnononoccnnnnnnnnnanoccnnnnnnnnnns 281 A 1 1 sine the New Conneccion Wizad cado 281 ADDED O dd il ekueevecsetsee 287 Page ix IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Bl Setting up a Modem Connection from your PC to a DXL DCC wiccccccccssssccccccccceneesesseeeeeecaaeeeseeeeeeeeaaaeseeeeeeesaaaaeseseees 287 B 1 1 sine he New Conneccion Wi A ane Goa tid idles 287 Appendix C PCO WACO COTINCINGS serrie asra e SKEE E E AE EAEE EAS EN 293 Page x IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Table of Figures TABLES WIECHO STATES ta 260 TABLE THE INTERCOM MASTER STATION MCC AUDIO INPUTS OPTION coocccnncccnnnccnonccnnnoccnnncononocnnnaccnnarononccnanicnnnss 261 TABLE THE TOUCHSCREEN MASTER MODULE MCC AUDIO INPUTS OPTION cooccnoccnnccnnoconocononcnnnconaconuncnnnconaronancnnns 261 TABLE THE TELEPHONE SET MASTER STATION MCC AUDIO INPUTS OPTION 0 ccccceeccsccesccesccesscesccusccesceeees 261 TABLE HE STATUS INPUTS OPTION sis ci cio siseaceea A Sand Reese RR ee Re meee 263 TABLE lt EHE STATUS OUTPUTS OPTION Sosa dana aa oia 264 TABLE THE TEMPERATURES OPTION cccccccsecccesecccsscccsccescceeuesseuessusceeusccsesssseecseecsseuessesesseuecsssecsseesseueseuseceseuss 265 TABLES STATUS OF FAULTS A a a 269 TABLES FAULTS THAT APPLY ONLY TO DCCS ii a 270 TABLE FAULTS THAT APPLY TO DEESANDIOCES bs 270 Page xi IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator So
180. ct button has changed to a Disconnect button Refer to the Communication Links Setup and Status section above for information on connection problems 4 2 6 Select Exchanges The purpose of the Select Exchange option is to let you choose the exchange that the PC can connect to 1f there is more than one exchange in a configuration that the computer can connect to Therefore the Select Exchanges option will be dimmed not selectable if the computer only connects to one exchange such as in the case of a manual entry The Select Exchanges window displays the valid exchanges that the PC could connect to If an exchange appears in green this means that the computer is currently connected to this exchange If an exchange appears in black this means that the PC is periodically checking its connectivity with the exchange and as long as the exchange remains black it is possible for the computer to make a connection to the exchange If an exchange appears in grey this means that it is not possible for the computer to make a connection to that exchange This could be because the DXL boxes have been switched off or the I P address is not consistent with the IP address in the configuration or for some other reason The following examples are illustrated In our example we have decided to connect to all the exchanges with IP addresses or telephone numbers defined in configuration TESTI Now click on the Select Exchanges button You wil
181. cter Invalid ID number entered a Baa xl Be 2 x in First Numb er DXL Administrator x Number To Duplicate fi e 14 is not a valid Device ID number 1 Device numbers must be between 1 and 99999 First Number fial First Name sw Tower Entry Exchange Card Port First Port Administration x faz y 400 Series SCC 1 y 2 y Y Single Exchange Only Cancel Page 44 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL First Name Type the name of the duplicated stations into First Name By default the program always follows the name format of the station that you want to duplicate and increments any numbers that you may have assigned at the end of your Station Name If you do not have any numbers at the end of your station name then the program will automatically add numbers at the end of each duplicated station name and will increment these numbers in order Thus all the duplicated stations will have the same station name and will be differentiated by the station numbers that are assigned at the end of the name Port Card Box Pick the first port where you want to begin locating the duplicated stations Use the Port drop down menu to select the port Note that when the ports in the first box are assigned the program will automatically move to the ports on the next box and continue locating the duplicated station on the next box Select whether the port is located on the DCC or the DCE from the B
182. d properly will generate either a Sntx Fail Busy or Done response followed by the command that caused it The DXL transmits the ASCII string using the TCP protocol over an Ethernet link When using TCP the DCC operates as a server and the hosts will operate as clients Since TCP relies on the underlying IP protocol for addressing purposes each DCC and each host must have a unique IP address The IP address for each DCC is defined in the Configuration IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 137 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL On system start up the DCC s monitors the TCP port number for connections from the external host s In order to begin communications the host must initiate a TCP session to the IP address port number of the DCC When a session 1s opened the DCC determines the host s return IP address and port number Hence all future status messages will be sent through this address and port number and the DCC will also accept and execute commands sent from the host via this connection Register Based Messages For Register Based Messages the DXL and the external host exchange command and status information by reading and writing to blocks of registers However the DXL can also use a separate set of register for communication specifically with each Master Station This is done through command registers that can be configured separately for each Master In addition to these command registers each Master
183. d they are displayed according to their call request priority on the master s display Normally the call at the top of the call request queue is answered first The information box IMS TMM Settings is present in the Control tab for the IMS or TMM master The Passcode is a string of numbers up to 10 digits that allows an operator to enable this master station by typing in the passcode string If a passcode has been set then an operator can enable or disable the master station at the master station itself If the passcode entry has not been set and the master is disabled then the disabled master can only be enabled by another master station that has the permission to do this IMS Masters usually answer calls by pressing the ENTER button on their keyboard and end calls by pressing END However if you want to use the handset hookswitch as the switch that is used to answer and end calls then tick the Answer End Calls with Hookswitch checkbox In this case a call will be answered when you pick up the handset of the Master and will be ended when you replace the IMS handset on the hookswitch Note that this option is only available if you choose an IMS or a TMM Master Page 50 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL For a TSM master entries on the Control tab will include an area for TSM Settings information box When an operator is sitting at a master and attending to call requests etc the master is said to be in a mann
184. d and cannot be Period iseclifio yl selected Previous Next Cancel The Repeat Count sets the number of times that the same tone is repeated in one Repeat Count 200 sound clip The Repeat Count entry is editable and if you change this value to any number that is higher than a one the Delay ms entry becomes highlighted Use the Delay ms drop down menu to set a time delay between the tones This value can be set to from 0 1 seconds up to 2 seconds and is the interval between the repeating tones in the sound clip Delay ma Periodic Period ec The Periodic entry causes the sound clip or repeated sound clip if Repeat Count is 5 Periodic higher than 1 to be played periodically with a period that can be selected from the Period sec E Period sec drop down menu This value can be set from 1 to 30 seconds Note that the period must be greater than the length of the sound clip IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 115 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 19 Messages Messages and tones are similar in that they xi are interpreted by the DXL system as wav EdiinaSoundType Tone Message Configuration Sounds files Tones are usually short sound clips Shared Sounds Total Length 11 4 sec Max 20 0 sec edan tically f h thi enerated automatically for such things asa AlCiear 5 210 Al Clea 5 8 i y 8 Windows XP Battery Low 1 220 he Move ss Windows XP Battery Low 1 220 busy signal classro
185. deleting the Station s Click on Delete to delete the Station or click on Cancel to cancel the operation 3 3 4 4 Duplicate Button The Stations section in Configure is the only section that has the Duplicate button You may have to define hundreds of Stations which would be time consuming if you had to enter each Station separately The Duplicate button lets you easily make copies of a station of the same type instead of defining and adding each station separately To duplicate a station simply click on the station that you want to duplicate and then click on the Duplicate button This brings up the Duplicating Station window In the figure below we want to duplicate Station 5001 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 43 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL So we click on Station 5001 and then click on the Duplicate button which gives rise to the Duplicating Station window Number To Duplicate Enter the number of stations that you want to duplicate in Number to Duplicate entry The default for this is always 10 Enter the ID Number of the first duplicated Station in First Number box By default this number will always be the next available ID number Select the station that you want to duplicate and then 7 DXL Configuration Editor Configuration 1 ol x aa 2 click on the Duplicate button tonne S
186. dgs coccccccccoonnooooooooooncnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnos 89 Sioa Talkback Station Properties Levels ti A dd 89 los O Talkback Station Properties ALAS dd 89 IRAT alk back staliom Properties Pie AE A ai 90 3 7 3 4 8 Talkback Station Properties Permissions ccccccccsssssssssseseeecceeeeeeceeecasasssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesauaasaseeseeseeeess 90 3 2549 Talkback Station Properties i UlpUtS a 91 LO Talkback Station Properties Selectors i ea dadas 92 3 8 E GTO A O 93 3 8 1 Station Group Didon BO A A A A A A A a 93 JSL Station Groups Properties dE a a 93 30 2 Station Group Properties Members ui A e 93 3 8 1 3 Station Group Properties Permissions rt cr 94 3 9 WEST BOOTS 2k ites a ascetic erated E RE 95 3 9 1 Visions Booth Properties Dialos BOXES oie asics dant o a o a 95 3 9 1 1 Visiting Booth Properties IdentifiCati0N ooooonncccncnoncnncnononnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnaninnnnnos 95 59 0 2 Visi ne Booth Properties TONES e Ad 95 39 3 Misiune Booth Properties Cont Os 96 390 4 Visitino Booth Properties Permissions es A A A A E 96 AO A O 97 MOL Denim the Speaker Les a 98 2AF DP FLNE GIUD aose O eye eee Reet Tein a Ter 99 BAZ SIMULA aa dai 100 ESO ES PEOS PR Cee eo yg RR ROO 101 Sock Pagme Output Dialos Box a cs 101 3 13 1 1 Pacing Output Properties Idennincahoims moios 101 1312 Parme Output Properties Call Senos sanar oda 102 S
187. ds pk fHousingBuilding RE 1 Speaker Group 25peaker Output 1 Exercise yards pk4 fHousingBuilding PE 1 Speaker Group Speaker Output 2 Entrances pk 1 fHousingBuilding RE 1 Speaker Group 3 Speaker Output 1 Entrances pk fHousingBuilding PE 1 Speaker Group 35 peaker Output 2 Properties Page 98 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 11 Speaker Line Groups Once the speaker lines are configured the next step is to ES specify the PZE Speaker Line Groups used in the o configuration Selecting Speaker Line Groups in the Number AY Configure entry of the DXL Configuration Editor Name PZE1 Grout allows us to Add Speaker Line Groups to the mof configuration Speaker Line Groups will be associated Exchange Group with the line level audio from paging outputs or stations Housinguicint i GE EA with an SPA 120 The audio will be connected to the input of an audio amplifier and its output will in turn be connected to one or more speaker line groups Click Add to add a new speaker line group After you have defined one speaker line group the DXL Configuration Editor will also allow you to Delete an existing speaker line group or view or edit the Properties of a speaker line group In our example we require 3 speaker line groups a DXL Configuration Editor Configuration E aj xj Fie Edit Configure Speaker Line Groups Lock a View Hardware TA Dsl Nata te a W Greyl
188. ds section of the Video Switch Properties window Cancel If the number that you enter does not fall in this range then you will xj see an error message l i The monitor output value must be between 1 and 99 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 165 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 4 MicroComm DXL Diagnostics and Maintenance 4 1 Introduction The DXL Administrator Diagnostics button is used to invoke the MicroComm DXL Diagnostics and Maintenance window which includes access to several useful utilities including e File Manager e Remote Front Panel e Remote Reboot e ALA Status e VOIP Device Manager e IMS 640 Firmware Upgrade Server 4 1 1 Opening MicroComm DXL Diagnostics and Maintenance You can open the MicroComm DXL Diagnostics and Maintenance window by pa clicking on the Diagnostics button on the MicroComm DXL Administrator main Diagnostics window From there you can access the utilities using the File and View menus 4 1 2 Communication Links Setup and Status Several of the MicroComm DXL Diagnostics and Maintenance utilities as well as Logging require communications between your PC and a DXL system Some of the communication functions include transferring configuration files from your PC to the DXL system activating configurations download logging information and carrying out diagnostics procedures In order to carry out these operations you need to select the communication channels between the PC and the DXL syst
189. e Configuration yet on your PC In this case you will never see the logs from this exchange as the Exchange itself will not show up in the Show Exchange list Since this new Configuration may be the one that is currently active it is very important for you to be able to see the logs from this Exchange Hence you will have to put a tick mark in this checkbox if you want to be able to see all the logs from this new Exchange which is on the currently active Configuration If this option is left unchecked then the Log Viewer will only display logs from the Exchanges that have been checked in the Show Exchange list and will ignore the logs from any other Exchanges that are not in this list To apply the changes click on the OK button or click Cancel to cancel the changes that have been made 5 2 4 4 Message Text Filter The logs can be filtered to show only messages that contain certain words phrases or expressions Show All Shift Ctrl 4 Class amp Type Filter Exchange Filter y Message Text Filter a Show All Time Filter 7 Modify Shift Ctrl M Load Save As Delete Modify Option Select Modify to search for and display logs that contain some particular message content Selecting this option brings up the Message Text Filter window Type the text string or word that you want displayed in all the logs in Show Logs Containing If you want to find a particular phrase or word in a log then tick the
190. e Node for the DXL is fixed and depends on the Exchange the IP address implies that each Exchange cannot have more than one host port when the Omron UDP protocol is used 3 24 1 8 Host Port Register Based Messages Messages This tab is identical to the Messages tab that has been described in the ASCII Messages Messages section Please refer to this section for a description of this tab 3 24 1 9 Host Port Register Based Messages Monitor This tab is identical to the Monitor tab that has been described in the ASCII Messages Monitor section Please refer to this section for a description of this tab 3 24 1 10 Host Port Register Based Messages Registers For register based protocols you must configure a set of register blocks that are to be used for communication between the DXL and the host system This is performed using the Registers tab which is only visible when Register Based Messages is selected under the Protocol Tab The Registers tab lets you specify the start address and length of each block of registers that are required by the protocol DXL Address refers to virtual registers both normal and extended that reside on the DXL PLC Address refers to registers both normal and extended that reside on the PLC Using these registers the DXL can send Status messages and Response messages to the Host The Status registers are used to send either message The Host can send a command message to the DXL by using the
191. e an existing schedule click on the schedule that you want to edit and then click on the Properties button Either of these two operations will bring up a Schedule Properties dialog box with two tabs Identification and Schedule 3 21 1 1 Schedule Properties Identification The Identification tab has text box entries for ID xi Identification Schedule Number Name and an optional Info text box Number i Name Info El Cancel 3 21 1 2 Schedule Properties Schedule The Schedule tab has two text box areas called Include BEES YY x and Exclude Clicking on the Add button adjacent to dsntfication Schedule the Include text box will bring up a dialog box that HZ allows you to schedule the times when a signal is to broadcast Once you have defined the scheduled times for this event to occur a short descriptive summary will be displayed in the Include area Clicking on the Ezclude Add button next to the Exclude text box allows you EN to specify times when this event is not to occur Again a short summary of the exclude times will be displayed in the text box area Limits Next Occurrences Never Never Cancel Page 120 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Clicking on the Add button the Date Time Specified dialog x box is displayed Using check boxes you can specify the months _ Menthsofthe Year M Jan
192. e handset is pressed and is cleared when the handset is placed on the hook switch The most common application of Handset Stations is to connect them in pairs to form a visiting booth where two people can visit using telephone handsets via a full duplex connection similar to a normal telephone The FDH 420 is a Handset Station A Handset Speaker Station connects to two adjacent SCC 400 ports When the user speaks through the handset the station provides a full duplex connection but when the handset is on hook the speaker provides a half duplex connection The Handset Speaker Station is an FDH 440 Page 70 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL IP Stations IEC or PTA 600 series utilize VOIP technology and operate over the DXL Ethernet network They include multiple switches and outputs which can only be utilized by the IP Station itself As IP Stations do not require physical ports their VOIP PCI Card ports are created on the fly as needed with no limitations on the number allowed Finally a Compound Station is a group of two three or four physical stations The member stations must all be wired to the same DCC or DCE and be designated as a member of a compound station 1 e the Compound Member checkbox in Station Properties dialog box Identification tab must be checked Station Templates Before continuing on how to define a Station it is important to use and understand what a Station Template is The MicroComm DX
193. e name DXL Logs gt Places Save as type Text tab delimited txt Cancel Text tab delimited txt CS comma delimited cs Web Page htm html om Note that all the logs in the database are NOT exported The program will only export those logs that are available with the current filter settings and this is independent of whether or not you can actually see these logs in the Log Viewer window 5 2 1 2 Export Selection You can save a selection of sequential logs from the DXL Log Viewer window Simply drag the mouse or pointer over the selected logs or click on the log hold down the shift key and use the arrow keys on the keyboard to make a selection Now click on Export Selection The program will display the standard Export Logs dialog to let you choose the location type and filename of the saved file Select the location of where the logs are to be saved in Save in and type the name of the file in File name The file can be saved in a variety of different formats that you can choose from the Save as type drop down menu Note that the program will only export those logs that are available with the current filter setting From the picture below the logs to be saved have been highlighted or selected and they will be saved with the file name of DXL Logs which is indicated in the File name entry IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 205 Administrator Software TE DXL Log Yiewer connected
194. e of video switch that you have defined e You will also have to enter a value for Max Input Camera which is the maximum number of cameras that can be used with the type of video switch that you have defined e Finally you have to enter a value for the Max PTZ Preset which is the information for the pan tilt and zoom settings for the camera In our example figure to the right we have stated that rra x Video Switch 1 that is defined as a Pelco switch can have Identification Connection Commands a maximum of 3 monitors and 2 cameras that are e tok P Video Switch Kind Pelco y associated with this switch Additionally a video camera that is defined with this switch can have a maximum PTZ M Alarm Commands value of 2 am i A Y Camera Monitor Commands When you decide to define video monitors in the Video Max Monitor Output 3 Monitors section you will only be able to define 3 Max Camera Input 2 monitors that use Video Switch 1 Max PTZ Preset 2 Also when you define video cameras in the Video Cameras section you will only be able to define 2 cancel cameras that use Video Switch 1 Additionally you will only be able to set a maximum of 2 for the PTZ settings for each camera The purpose of setting these values 1s because they are used for error checking when you define a video camera or a video monitor in the Video Camera and Video Monitor sections of Configure If the values that you def
195. e oldest recorded log to the latest log that None has been downloaded None Specity Displays all logs from the pies cored log to the logs on the time and date specified in Specify L T Relative Now Displays all logs that Wale downloaded a specified amount of time prior to the most recent log l Displays all logs that were downloaded a specified amount of time Relative Specify i i prior to the time and date in Specify L T cl Now Displays all logs between the date and time in Specify E T and the most recently downloaded log Specify Specify Displays all logs between the specified dates and times A special case that occurs in this time filter is when the Earliest Time None and the Latest Time Now This case 1s the same as having no time filter in which case all the logs are displayed in the Log Viewer Therefore this 1s the case that 1s displayed when the Show All option 1s checked in the Filter menu Another special case that occurs is when Earliest Time Relative and the Latest Time Now In all other cases the Earliest Time that you can set for the logs is a constant However in this special case the Latest Time changes as you download new logs For example if you are browsing logs near the E T while you are in stream mode and a new log happens to be downloaded the arrival of the new log may cause an adjustment to the time IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 219 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL window This is because
196. e the letter A then the program brings up the name Acid alphabetically However if you continue to enter the sequence by entering the letter X then the program brings up the name Axel as you have now entered AX which are the first two letter in Axel Page 130 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Man Unman Key Sequence Option A TSM can optionally man or unman itself by dialling a configurable key sequence that does not require a device ID The default string is 23 for Man TSM and is 73 for Unman TSM however you can change this string Remember that these Man Unman key sequences must be unique and different from all the function prefixes If you do not want a TSM to be able to Man or Unman itself then you can leave the entries blank Unmanning a TSM causes the telephone to output an unmanned tone when it is taken off hook or when a call request is made to t The main purpose of manning or unmanning a TSM is to inform other Masters of the status of a TSM Le whether the TSM is currently manned or unmanned This is so that the appropriate action can be taken with respect to calls call requests etc that are sent to the TSM Note that if a TSM cannot locally unman itself then it can be configured so that when it is taken off hook it can send a call request to its secondary master to make a request to be unmanned 3 23 1 2 System Properties Master Operation The Master Operations dial
197. e the ES gt gt OPE Secondary Permissions Paging Feedback Outputs audio received by ap articular device The Initial Identification Switches Tones Call Settings Levels Filters Control Volume control slider is used to adjust the volume Initial Volume Program Group setting in 1 dB steps from 16dB to 16dB You can O ST change this value to suite your person preferences E p Cal Recorder during normal operation of the system The value you a 7 a e o o Call Priority set in the configuration is only an initial volume setting Page Control 8 y 8 Ss CVO GPT COn 3 2 2 12 Program Group Master stations intercom stations and page zones can be connected to audio program material that could be provided by audio sources via one or more of the DCC DCE audio inputs Each program group can consist of up to six music sources with each music source available at two different volume settings A program group can remain local to the exchange or it can be distributed to other exchanges in the system via the Digital Audio Trunk You can make the program group selection from the Program Group drop down menu that you will see in the Call Settings tab for masters stations and page zones Note that you will not see anything in this menu if you have not assigned music sources to the program group in the Program Groups selection in Configure You can assign each master station or page zone with a pro
198. e the name that you want to give a device into the Name entry This name is used in diagnostics logging and in call request lists 3 2 2 3 Info You may type additional information about the Devices into the Info entry You can enter additional information in a small text editor window by selecting the button at the side of Info text box There is a 65 000 character limit for this text box 3 2 2 4 Exchange The Exchange drop down menu lists all the exchanges that are defined in the system From this list of exchanges select the exchange you want to locate a device on In the example on the previous page master Central Control 1 1s located on exchange Support Services 3 2 2 5 Box The Box drop down menu lists the DCC and all the DCEs boxes that make up the exchange you have selected From this list select the box you want your device to connect to 3 2 2 6 Card The Card drop down menu lists the kind of Control Card SCC or MCC or VOIP Card and hence the type of stations masters that you specified when you defined the system 3 2 2 7 Port The Port drop down menu lists all the ports that are defined and available for the particular box card that you selected From this list you can select the particular port that you want the device to use You can use the hardware tree view to specify the port location of a device For example if you select a DCC from the hardware tree view and create a new device then
199. e to start or end calls If you click on Cancel the entire activation process is halted and the configuration will not be activated Page 184 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Configurations on Exchangels DXL Administrator x 1013 12 001K A Are you sure you want to activate the selected configuration 0 002 0024 i Warning If there is a local copy of this configuration in your project it will be marked as activated and you OO z will not be able to make any further changes to it pr Activate i Cancel Ca click on Activate xt Administrator A Activate Show Exchanges gt Reboot exchanges or load new config while running y J i Load Cancel 4 2 11 Activate Activating an Application File This button lets you activate a particular application By activating an application you are ensuring that the application that you have activated is the only application that is active and running on the DXL Note that the DXL can have many Applications loaded on it but it can only have ONE ACTIVE application at one time Also note that the application has to be loaded on the exchanges in the Applications on Exchange s area before it can be activated Click on the Application file that you want to activate and then click on the Activate button The program will display a confirmation message Click on Cancel to cancel the activation process or click on Activate
200. e until you click the OK button to accept the changes and return to the Log Viewer window You can click Cancel in order to retain the previous values and nullify any changes that you made in the Font dialog IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 227 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 5 2 6 2 Font Size The Font Size lets you modify the size of the font without going into the Font Font option Hold the pointer over Font size and then click on the size that you want to use Note that the font size will change immediately without any confirmation Colors from the program Column Settings Reset Layout Show Scrollbar Font size If you want to use a Font size that is not in the list then click on Other A Font Size New Font Size 11 y window pops up and you can select a font size by using the scrollbar in the drop down menu You can also manually type a font size into the New Font Size entry However if this size is not between 4 and 28 then the program will display an error message The font size entered is invalid It must be between 4 and 28 New Font Size 30 gt a x If you enter a font size that is too large to be displayed in the Log Viewer window then the program will display an error message In this case you must hide some columns increase your screen resolution enter a smaller font size or decrease the size of some of your columns other than the Message column which is resized automatically
201. each type of Master 3 5 1 1 Control The Properties windows for the IMS TMM TSM Paging Microphone and IP masters have a Control tab The Master Group does not have a Control tab The information boxes in the Control tab differ slightly depending on the type of master station The various information boxes are discussed below If your system has host ports select the appropriate host E port that is associated with this master station from the A A ee Identification Switches Tones CallSettings Levels Filters Control drop down menu in the Host Port entry Once you lv Powerup enabled Master Call Request Priority specify a Host Port the type of Protocol must be Host Pat ne specified using the drop down menu 1 Host 1 ESE A P 3 P Protocol 0 50 100 TCP ASCII Group Monitoring Initial Step Rate ms 5000 IMS TMM Settings M Answer End calls with hookswitch Passcode 0 Hast Port Tick the Powerup enabled checkbox to start up the master station in an enabled mode If you do not select this option then this master station will start up in a disabled state and all call requests will be forwarded to the secondary master station Therefore it is important to select a secondary master if you do not want the master to start up in an enabled state The Master Call Request Priority sets the priority of a call request made by this master station When a master station has several call requests queue
202. eae a E Ea 200 5 1 3 The Lor Viewer WINdO Ward dnde 201 5 1 4 L s Window Operations ua aid 203 5 1 5 Keyboard SNOU AAA a a a E E ete a lanoassaats 204 D2 TREMO VOUS ica 205 5 2 1 A aera O E te oe Eien rte mens ee eee 205 SeDelgis EXPONE E E 205 liz EXPO SE lE HON ers 205 A O A a 206 A e PAU Se SA ER A O EA 206 A Ka O E E EE E EE E E E E E A E E E E A E E A 206 222 ECMO 010 eee anere E CODES oaR Ae ORL tia 207 A fascvsacsosehensnedeutacnnacnenctadgninsensshee ined eueeseanth cnahadaninsennsherteodeueesuoa T cached guenonensherimedeuieaeors 207 A SCLC Faia sats ccaie seas atic seasons oes cae Steed mo cu A aneeas cee 207 IS ACI RENE 207 FA A II E EE E RE 209 Ale deae a A r a A r a A E a a aA 209 D292 PdA aies das 210 D2 A a A A arvavbnewyas Use aac beabas beau aa noah e buat A a E aE tastes 210 o A A A A ONS PoE ITT PORE NET Er IONE BRE CTE 210 Page vil IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 5 2 4 Fe BEG IV los 010 AAA E e o o SE O OC PA 211 A AA set o O o e 213 o ES oe Sa Le AP O o nn O o O tee secsaeeduscetien ses selegeeeuaecees 213 Dee CA AA e rl o o A EAE E 216 2d Message Text FING ii dt 217 a aa DE A 1 OPEN PA e E o E ee cooma gover padseaeas 218 5 25 ET IS Wie Gg cee e o o o E e 222 apo e ROI rs O o A E E e Al o sousenonaaeatede 222 A E E AIG aa R EE E E 222 As rre me 222 5 2 5 4 Automatically Download Logs As Needed c0oooooccccccnccnccccccncnnononoonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
203. eam Current Logs Stay At End OF Logs When Streaming 5 2 5 1 Connect Click on the Connect button to setup the main communication link between the PC and the Exchanges of the DXL system This brings up the Communications Link Setup window Please refer to Section Error Reference source not found for a description of this option 5 2 5 2 Select Exchanges Once you have setup the main communication link you can select the Exchanges that you want the PC to communicate with Please refer to Section Error Reference source not found for a description of this option 5 2 5 3 Download Logs Select Download Logs to automatically download logs When you select this option it brings up the Logs to Download dialogue box This option is unavailable if you are not currently connected to an Exchange Note that even though the program downloads the logs that you specify in the options below the Log Viewer window only displays the logs that have passed the current filters The Class amp Type and Exchange filters affect both the downloading and the display of logs while the Message Text and Time filters affect only the display The current filters could have been set either through the Filter menu or through the startup settings Also note that any reference to time is made with reference to the time of the DXL Exchange and not the operating system time e The first option is All logs This option downloads all the logs to xi date that have
204. ed Reboots should not normally be necessary it is best to reboot exchanges in a system only when instructed to do so by technical support For remote connections this dialog will reboot the one you are connected through last you will need to reconnect afterwards Hint Right click an exchange for i E Cancel further options 4 5 ALA Status Configuring audio level alarms ALA in a DXL system can be a complicated task The ALA Status utility aids the end user in monitoring their ALA alarms to help tune their ALA settings The ALA Status utility can be started by selecting ALA Status in the MicroComm DXL Diagnostics and Maintenance window View menu 4 5 1 Using the DXL Administrator ALA Diagnostics Function After the ALA Status screen initializes you will get an overview screen on all of the stations that have an ALA detector assigned indicating whether ALA is on and what level setting it is and whether it is alarmed has recently triggered iam ALA Status BAX View Hardware v Update Rate sec Manua y Update All i Alarmed Double clicking a station here will show you a Detailed ALA Analysis Graph for that station which can assist you with setting ALA sensitivity values 4 5 1 1 Detailed ALA Analysis Graph The Detailed ALA Analysis Graph is a graph of the audio signal power received by that station over time Page 188 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL
205. ed by the Log Viewer then the system will automatically download these logs when you jump to this location This operation of filling in the gaps will always take place for any operation that you try to execute in the Log Viewer window Therefore as long as you have the Automatically Download Logs as Needed option turned on the Log Viewer will always try to fill in the missing gaps in logs irrespective of whether you are trying to export logs copy logs print logs or update the scrollbar etc If this selection is not ticked then the program will NOT automatically download missing logs as you scroll through dates and times with missing log entries Note that even though the program downloads the logs specified by the options described above the Log Viewer window only displays those logs that pass the current filters 5 2 5 5 Automatically Stream Current Logs Select Automatically Stream Current Logs for the program to Download Logs automatically download new logs as they are being generated by the Automatically Download Logs 4s Needed v Automatically Stream Current Logs system The option can also be turned on or off by toggling through using the blue circular arrow Toggle Stream Mode in the Log Stay At End OF Logs When Streaming Viewer window If this option is left unticked then the program will not download the logs as they are being generated Page 224 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL
206. ed state When a master is left unattended it is usually put in an unmanned state so as to inform other masters that it is unattended Tick the Accept Man Unman key sequence checkbox if you want to enter a special sequence to either man or unman a TSM This system wide sequence is defined in the Systems selection in Configure You will be able to enable or disable the master station if the Accept Man Unman key sequence option is enabled If you do not choose this option then another master station with permission will be required to man or unman this master station When the TSM is left unmanned you will hear a distinct audible tone when the handset is taken off hook The TSM Settings contains two checkboxes If you select the Require function prefix keys then this means that any calling sequence that you dial will require a prefix digit Do not select this option if you want to dial a number from the TSM without using a prefix digit Since this could lead to potential conflicts devices in different classes could have the same ID number the system uses a hierarchy to step through the different classes of devices until it finds a matching ID number Please refer to the Systems section in Configure for a further explanation of prefix keys IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 51 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 5 1 2 Master Properties Paging Feedback The Paging Feedback tab contains an information box xi Identification Switch
207. ee 9 ZAS LISTOL RECEMU ETO SiS Oo ad 9 DRS A ROO a Te TONY SS ATE PRR SPN I ICR BOT LTE BETO ERE AT KUNE SP NTT SE KO EE RTI A 10 24 2 E CNE Mes e 10 PSD INN A A 10 PAD Wid Preferences General aaa 10 BaD AD Pretere nees CONSUMO dd EE 11 ZARZA Pretercnces LOMA e oie 11 2A 2k PrSterences Did NOS ES A A A A A A A 11 DAD Y Preferences CONNECT A A A EAS 12 2 4 3 Communicator ion ATER NRT 12 DA AO paket csharapntaaace usc ur csg dase sade bata Santis Reeve eae asa wenn eee os 12 PAS 2 ISO SCIP aia cerdieaizaten ra pd rado 13 DADO SMOW SUAS o555 2 ots nn A A OS 13 2 4 4 HDM A A II E 13 ZAR DAD Adimintstrators ser Manual Pl A a 13 A Dial o AA A A A Pa eras 13 E RE OR 13 3 The MicroComm DXL Configuration Edita A cd iio 15 3 1 MicroComm DXL Confieuration Editor Ments IAEA cecil A a ial RNAI cas Leal EA AA A Bae 17 Page IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 1 1 EENT aea A A end eee ean nea Pasiat ake 17 FEEL TNC A O N 17 SI OP A A A A chivas eacatemenn 17 SES NOS O COP gn O at ents O e O baeteus abeaten ae 17 O O O ON 18 A TOA SNS iad the aaca cea teee sagas lad cues thro E staal eddeanudsname ale cnoduiSeanetiadaus 18 LOs Rename isa ada 18 A A A 18 Sl A o Wii ced E ote Wi coh dent ences 19 PEES A A O A N 20 STO gt BR O A AS AA A A AA AG 20 3 1 2 FCG A e E o AR EA e EU E e EE e O none setontases anaes 21 IE EODH NELES Creer wean on A A a 21 SI Change Pass A heats eae Gl en cena saiea
208. efore continuing with the deletion To understand what these options are please refer to Sections 5 2 5 4 and 5 2 5 5 xi You will receive a confirmation message Are you sure you wish to delete all the logs chronologically older than the specified time regardless of before the lo gs are deleted Click on Delete to whether or not they pass the current filter settings from the log archive database delete the selected logs or click on Cancel in Warning If the logs are no longer on the exchange hardware the deletion is permanent IF they are still there they can be redownloaded order to cancel the operation Delete i Delete Future Logs Option There is another option that is not apparent in the Edit drop down menu If you press the Ctrl key on the computer keyboard while selecting the Delete Logs option then a new window pops up the Delete Future Logs window This window lets you delete all logs subsequent to a given time and date The purpose of having this option is to allow users to delete logs with an incorrect date and time For example say a user has incorrectly set the year on the DXL to be year 2030 Now if these logs are not deleted then they will remain at the end of the Log Viewer window until the year 2030 However this Delete Future Logs option lets you delete these incorrectly dated logs so that they do not interfere with the presentation of other logs Note that only logs that are currently in the data
209. el It 1s important to remember that whether the computer is connected to the exchange or not it is constantly checking the connectivity between itself and the various exchanges that 1t can make a connection with When an exchange is displayed in grey it is not possible for the computer to make a connection to that exchange If you leave a tick mark beside the exchange that 1s displayed in grey the computer will continue checking the connectivity between itself and the exchange The moment the PC is able to make a connection to the exchange it will immediately connect to that exchange In the figure below Exchange 2 Top has a tick mark beside it and that the computer is continuously monitoring the connection between itself and that exchange The moment Exchange 2 comes online becomes available the computer connects to Exchange 2 After the PC connects to Exchange 2 the exchange name becomes green in colour indicating that the computer has successfully made a connection to it Select Exchanges X Select Exchanges x Check the eschange s to connect ho Check the eschange s to connect ho Exchange 2 1s tickmarked The moment the computer can make the connection 1t connects to Exchange 2 and Exchange 2 becomes green in color A gt Exchange 1 Bottom Exchange 2 Top Exchange 1 Bottom Exchange 2 Top E Cancel E Cancel Page 172 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Please n
210. elop a configuration it is necessary to specify the design components in a Configure Hardware hierarchical manner as certain items must be configured before other items can reference them For example you cannot connect a master station to an exchange without first specifying the components DCC and DCEs in the exchange In the DXL Configuration Editor the Configure drop down menu lists all the different types of devices that can be included in a configuration This list is in the hierarchical order that you should use in order to build up the configuration Even when you follow this list as you are designing the configuration 1t will be necessary to make at least a second pass through the list IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Exchanges Audio Trunks Masters Station Templates Stations Station Groups Visiting Booths Speaker Lines Speaker Line Groups Status Outputs Paging Outputs Page ones Call Recorders Music Sources Program Groups Tones Messages Signals Schedules Scheduled Operations System Host Ports ALS Detectors Video Switches Video Cameras Video Monitors Page 27 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 2 2 Common Device Entries amp Choices There are certain entries and choices that appear in many different dialog boxes in the Configuration They will be defined and explained in this section and a full explanation will not be repeated in the subsequent sections 3 2 2 1 ID Number An ID Number is a
211. em that are to be used Whether invoked by the main Communications Connect menu or via another module the Communications Link Setup allows you to setup and display the connection links in the Communication Status window From this list you can select the specific channels you wish to use Here it is important to distinguish between the connection links and the communication channels to the exchanges When you connect the PC to the exchanges using a configuration the PC by default is connected to all the exchanges on the DXL However if you want the PC to establish a communications channel to specific exchanges then select only the exchanges that you want the PC to communicate with Remember that you can only establish communication channels to exchanges on the DXL after the PC has setup the main communication link When you make this initial communication link it is setup for all the three modules Connecting and disconnecting from exchanges to modules does not alter the main link itself There is a separate option that you can use to connect or disconnect communication channels from the exchanges for each of the three modules Depending on the module you are in you can choose to connect or disconnect the communication channels to certain exchanges However the connection and disconnection from exchanges in a module does not affect the selections in other modules nor does it affect the main link Depending on the module or utility that you are in t
212. em that you want to connect to then you can use the configuration to supply this information If not then you will probably use a manual entry if enabled to supply the administrator with an IP address or phone number for a single exchange Once the PC has connected to the IP address or phone number you can then download a configuration from that system You can then use this configuration for future connections to the entire system The most important difference between the Manual Entry and the Configuration options is that when you use the Manual Entry option the computer can only connect to a single exchange since you are only specifying a single IP address or phone number However when you use the Configuration option the computer can connect to multiple exchanges since the configuration may contain several exchanges each with their own individual IP address or phone number 4 1 2 1 1 Configuration Ethernet Choose the Ethernet option if you want the program to retrieve the IP x addresses for the exchanges from the configuration that you have Set PAddiess es or Phone Number s From C Manual Entry selected Then click on the Connect button a Configuration Configuguration_1 0 y CO e e When you do this the PC will connect to all the valid exchanges by Communications Link using the IP address that it has retrieved from the configuration that you Connect Via Ethemet y have selected Howeve
213. em to the external host system Enabled Status Messages MStatus Messages When the DXL system makes a call to a Station or Message Register Code I Use Response Message Format performs some other action it has the option of sending an unsolicited message informing the host of the action that it has just performed 1 e it is not a message that is generated Response Messages J Respond To All Host Commands Use Status Message Format Acknowledgements in response to a command from a host This message is known as a Status Message You can enable or disable each status message by checking or unchecking a message E Cak 208 sd in the Enabled Status Messages list By default all The checked messages will be transmitted to the host system E E messages are enabled Upon receiving a command message from the host the DXL will act on the command and then send a Response Message back to the host Response Messages are messages that are sent by the DXL in response to a command that was received from a host For example if a message is sent to the DXL to connect master 10 to station 100 Ical 10 100 lt CR gt If the Use Response Method Format is checked the response messages will take one of the following four forms Done Ical 10 100 a positive confirmation or a negative confirmation in one of the following forms Busy Ical 10 100 Fail Ical 10 100 Sntx Ical 10 100 Status messages will have the
214. emove Option Press the key to select this option and it will take you to the DCE Add DCE Add Remove Remove screen This screen contains two options Install DCE and Remove DCE This window gives you the option of adding or removing a DCE from the system depending on the option that you choose Note that you will only be allowed to select the Install DCE option 1f the DCC currently has a DCE connected to 1t with a solid orange Install light Note that this light will be blinking on the DCC indicating that a DCE box is waiting to be installed If there are multiple DCEs waiting to be installed then this solid orange light on the DCE will inform the user of which DCE box is to be installed next Install DCE FA SN NOT VALID Press the button to select the Install DCE option when the cursor is at the Select gt DCE 1 NZI start of this line This brings up a screen which may display SN Not Valid as Num Dewices 1 the title if you have not entered a serial number SN for the DCE Note that this has no bearing on the installation or deletion of the DCE Page 256 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Select the gt button to move to the first editable field Then use the a button to scroll between DCE 1 DCE 2 DCE 3 and DCE 4 It is up to you to decide the device ID number that will be given to the DCE box however this should reflect the choices that you have made in the Co
215. en which means that the PC is currently connected to Exchangel Exchange 2 is in grey italic because it is not possible for the computer to make a connection to Exchange 2 Notice how this is reflected in the Communication Status window as well By clicking on the right mouse button in the Select Exchanges window a pop up menu is displayed which allows you to place a tick mark next to all the exchange names or remove the tick marks from all the exchanges Select Exchanges x Check the exchanges to connect to Exchange 1 Bottom Exchange 2 Top Connection Status Ed Exchange 1 Bottom at 10 0 394 Exchange Top at 10 02 97 E Cancel IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 171 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Now from the two exchanges in the figure say that we did not want to connect to Exchange 1 Bottom If you do not want to connect to this exchange remove the checkmark near the exchange name and then click on the OK button Now open the Select Exchanges window again You will see from the figure below that Exchange 1 Bottom now appears in black as the PC is no longer connected to this Exchange Select Exchanges x Select Exchanges q x Check the exchanges to connect to Check the exchanges to connect to C Eschange 1 atten Remove the checkmark near Exchange 2 Top Exchange 1 and then click on OK Then open the Select Exchanges window again O Exchange 1 Bottom Exchange 2 Top E Cancel Canc
216. en 1024 and 65535 If you assign a number in the range of 0 to 1023 a warning box will appear The default port number is 10000 for the first port defined on the Exchange and additional ports defined on the Exchange will use the next higher free TCP UDP Port number Since it is possible to have multiple host ports on the same Exchange it is necessary to ensure that each Host Port has a unique TCP UDP Port number for that exchange The same TCP UDP Port number can be reused by Host Ports on other exchanges Note that some TCP UDP Port numbers may already be used by other functions in the system Check the Serial option if you want the host to use a Serial RS232 connection to communicate with the DXL Select the Serial Port port 1 is the only port used at present In this case you can use the pull down menus to specify the Baud Rate Data Bits Parity Stop Bits and Flow Control 3 24 1 3 Host Port Protocol The Protocol tab defines the protocol that the host uses to communicate with the DXL ASCII based hosts communicate with strings while register based hosts communicate with integers stored in registers ASCII Messages For ASCII Messages the Command Status messages are sent as a stream The first four characters identify the command followed by spaces characters or numbers and ending with a carriage return The DXL will respond to an illegal or badly formatted command message with a Syntax error message All commands that are formatte
217. eo Cameras and Video Monitors section of Configure Note that these CCTV settings are only defined for the CALL event 1 e when a call is made from a master to a device When you select the CCTV tab of a Master Station xi Secondary Status Registers Permissions Paging Feedback Outputs Properties the following window appears If there are Identification Switches Tones Cal Settings Levels CCTV Filters Control no video cameras or video monitors associated with a Video Camera A Video Monitor Master Station the information box will be empty Ss a a TP The Sequence number defines the order in which the Device Kind MA EAS ao video cameras and video monitors will be connected The sequence number always remains in serial number order from 1 to 99999 The Number is to the ID number of the pre defined video camera or video monitor This ID number is Add Delete assigned when you define the devices in the Video Cameras and Video Monitors sections and cannot be changed Move Downi Properties The Name is the name of the video camera or video monitor that was assigned to it when it was defined Video Camera If you want to associate a video camera with a master station click on Video 101 xi Camera in the Device Kind entry and then click on the Add button This brings fija up the Select Video Cameras window From this window click on the video camera Camera 1 1
218. eport its status to For a description of the other entries please refer to Section 3 24 1 12 Host Port Status Registers Page 106 MicroComm DXL Page Zone 20 GamesRoomA Properties x Identification Tones Call Settings Members Status Registers Permissions Status Message Moden Peer to peer C Polled Register Based Host Ports Ol Hos tPort 1 Page Zone Status Register Block DAL Address Length Connection Status fi Show Host Port Registers Cancel IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 15 Call Recorders Call recorders are used to record conversations often the conversations made during a visiting booth session A master station that has the call recorder assigned to its permission list can control the call recorder Four types of call recorder outputs are supported MCC Line out line level outputs IP Station Ports utilizing RTP streams only Generic Station Ports utilizing SPA adapters on 300 series ports and Speaker Station Ports utilizing SPA adapters on 400 series ports 3 15 1 Call Recorder Dialog Box A Call Recorder Properties dialog box can have up to five tabs Identification Call Settings Levels Filter and CCTV Monitors only if CCTV monitors are defined for the system 3 15 1 1 Call Recorder Properties Identification The Identification tab requires that you type in an ID EPA EEE ith x Number and a Name a
219. er window hold the mouse or pointer over the column divider in the column header and then slide it across to the desired width To manually resize a column in the status bar hold the mouse or pointer over the column divider in the status bar and then slide it across to the desired width You can abort almost any operation by clicking the red STOP button on the upper left corner of the Log Viewer window This button is disabled unless an operation is in progress during which time it turns to a red colour IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 203 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 5 1 5 Keyboard Shortcuts Shift select upper limit If you want to select a whole set of concurrent logs at the same time then hold down select lower limit the Shift key and click on the first log that you want in the sequence Continue holding down the Shift key and then click on the last log in the sequence When you do this you will see that all the logs between the two limits that you have selected become highlighted go to the earliest log the oldest log go to the latest log the most recent log Ctrl P or y scroll upwards or downwards by an increment or decrement of one second Up Down Arrow keys Ctrl Alt or y scroll upwards or downwards by an increment or decrement of one minute Ctrl Page Up Page Down scroll upwards or downwards by an increment or decrement of one hour Ctrl Alt Page Up Page scroll upwards or
220. erred when the user tries to re copy or re distribute a file that is already present on the Exchanges 4 2 10 Activate Activating a Configuration File This button lets you activate a particular configuration By activating a configuration you are ensuring that the configuration that you have activated is the only configuration that is active and running on the DXL Note that the DXL can have many configurations loaded on it but it can only have ONE ACTIVE configuration at one time Also note that once you have activated a configuration you will not be able to make changes to that configuration To activate a configuration select the configuration that you want to activate from the Configuration s on Exchanges list and then click on the Activate button The program will prompt you with a message Click on Activate to continue with the activation or click on Cancel to cancel the operation After clicking on Activate you will see another dialog window pop up which lets you choose how you want the configuration to be activated Click on Reboot to activate the configuration and reboot the exchanges The activated configuration will be loaded as the exchanges reboot fastest process Click on Load to activate the configuration and then load the activated configuration on the DXL while the DXL is operating much slower process During this process the exchanges will continue to run and calls in progress will continue but you will not be abl
221. error x Copy Failed because there is not enough space on Exchange at 10 0 0 86 message stating that there is not enough memory space on the selected exchange You will then have to delete certain configurations from the exchange s in order to free up memory You may want to view a configuration that does not exist on your PC The _ lt Lopyw lt button lets you download a configuration from the exchange that it is located on into the project that you are working in To do this first select the configuration that you want to view from the Configurations on Exchange s Then click on the lt Copy lt button The file will be added to the active project that you are working in and will appear in the Project Configurations area You will be able to open this configuration and view it in exactly the same way as you open other configurations You can copy multiple files at the same time by holding down the Ctrl key on the keyboard and clicking on the files that you want to copy Note that if the computer is able to retrieve AAA x the IP addr esses p hone number but 1S unable 2 a Disconnect Refresh Select Exchanges to connect to the r equir ed exchang es Project Configurations Configurations on Exchange s because the DXL box is off or for some 0002 0004 Y 0 002 001 other reason then the Configurations on aci HEN N i 0002 002 rr a Exchange s area remains empty This M testi Delete scenario is shown in the figu
222. erties xj Identification Filter Detector Type Lowpass Low pass filter this filter passes all frequencies below a stated corner frequency and attenuates all frequencies above the corner frequency This filter allows low frequency sound through and filters out high frequency sound agg A Comer EME Hz Order f4 y Frequency Response dB vs Hz Cancel ALA Detector 1 ALA Properties x Identification Filter Detector High pass filter passes all frequencies above a stated corner frequency and attenuates all frequencies below the corner Fresno Pop vet frequency This filter allows high frequency sounds through Se and attenuates low frequency sound Berar DN Comer 500 y Hz Drder 4 b Cancel ALA Detector 1 ALA Properties x Identification Filter Detector Band pass filter passes all frequencies that occur within a range of frequencies around the centre frequency and eE EE i e andpass y attenuates all frequencies that occur above and below this range _ _ _ of frequencies Bandwidth 1 y Octave Center Fo y Hz From the figure on the right the filter will only pass the frequencies that are between 500 Hz and 1000 Hz and will attenuate all frequencies that fall outside this range Order 4 Es Band stop filter attenuates all frequencies that occur between xi the two corner frequencies and p
223. erved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 Neither the name of the project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 293
224. es Call Settings Levels Filters Control ensure that all the call requests alarms etc that would a ear normally go to this master are forwarded to a secondary Secondary Master fa master If you want to forward calls made to this master station when it is unmanned to another master station then choose the appropriate master from the Secondary Master drop down menu Note that in this case the call requests alarms etc will not appear on the unmanned master and will appear directly on the secondary master Secondary Master Hone T 11 Central Control 1 12 Central Control 2 13 Central Control Supr 14 Maintenance Office 0 Housing 1 Supr When a master is manned but unattended 1 e there is no one to answer call requests and acknowledge alarms is another case where a secondary master will come into play If the Enable Secondary Alarm Timeout is checked and a time in seconds is entered in the Timeout sec box then all the requests that are sent to this unattended master will be forwarded to the secondary master if the operator does not answer the requests within the specified time Call requests alarms etc will appear on both the manned master and the secondary master and the operators at either master will be able to answer and acknowledge these requests Also note that the system will not allow you to enable a secondary alarm timeout if you have not specified a secondary master from the Seco
225. es Tones Call Settings Levels Filters Control that lists all the stations and paging outputs that are el RRE TERS TA either excluded or will have their volume reduced when E R ES N nase evice Kind Station 1 this master station broadcasts over a page zone Any station or paging output could be included on this list The purpose of this feature is to eliminate audio feedback from stations or paging outputs Paging Output Cancel Select Station in the Device Kind entry and then click on the Add ESEE ioj x button to add a station to the list This will bring up a Select Stations Stations window where a list of all the stations in the system will appear From this Number Mame 2001 Housing 1 Entr list click on the station that is causing audio feedback and then click on the 2002 he E OK button to add this station to the information area in the Paging o E Feedback tab Click on Cancel to exit from this screen 2005 Unit A Inner Entry 2006 Unit amp Inner Exit 20017 Unit A TY Room 2008 Cell A101 2009 Cell 4102 2010 Cell 4103 2011 Cell A104 317 Pal A106 x Cancel To add a paging output to this list click on Paging Output in the Device Kind entry and then follow the same steps as above for adding a paging ouptut to the list The Paging Feedback tab lists all the stations or paging outputs that have been identified as causing audio feedback Now that this list is
226. es that can be viewed by clicking on the icon If you hold down the Shift key while clicking on the icon this expands all the subclasses recursively Each class or subclass has 6 message types that are generated by the firmware on the DXL and that are used by the Log Viewer when it encounters logs They are Errors Warnings Information Debug Other and Unknown These message Types are displayed in the Type column on the Log Viewer window e Errors inform the user of any inaccuracies or faults in the system e Warnings show up in the case when an inaccuracy may or may not be present e Information informs the user of operations being carried out on the DXL box e Debug is primarily used for the developers of the firmware in order to debug the software e Other is a message that the system gives the user if it cannot determine the kind of Log Type that it has 1 e a message that it cannot categorize into one of the four options above e Unknown is displayed when messages are created with a newer application that contains a new LMU file that is different from the LMU files that are currently on the system Therefore the program cannot categorize the message as it does not have the LMU file that the message was created with To correct this you need to download the new application or get one from elsewhere Modify Option iolxi Select Modify to display logs of a particular class and or ty
227. esent on the DXL during normal operation You can set the period of time after which the Host Port will update its time from the Update host every drop down menu The time in this option ranges from 1 minute to 24 hours If the Host Port time needs to be synchronized with the DXL time very closely then this updating time will be smaller and hence more frequent However note that if DXL time is physically changed by using the keypad on the DXL box or through the Remote Front Panel then the Host Port will automatically receive a message to update its time and will ignore the updating time that has been set When you select the Adjust for daylight savings time option then the DXL will automatically adjust its time according to the daylight savings time and will inform the Host Port to do the same If this option is left unchecked then the DXL box will continue with its regular time without adjusting for daylight savings Bottom Option Host port None as EE Modbus TCP IP Host hy DXL will automatically receive this message whenever the time on the Host Port deviates from the time on the DXL Select the second option if you want the Host Port to act as the System Clock Master When you select this option the DXL box will receive a message from the Host Port to update its time to the current time that is present on the Host Port The The DXL can choose the Host Port with which to synchronize its time by choosing the
228. ete to Delete all logs prior to the selected date and hour or click on Cancel in order to cancel the operation Note that the date and time that appears in this window is set to the date and time of the current log that is selected in the Log Viewer window with the time always being set to the base time the hour time Hence logs are always deleted in a block of hour duration and it is not possible to delete specific logs in a particular hour n Eee ae gt You can change the date by using the standard calendar dialog To change the year click on punton Tested Thu Fu ta the year and use the scroll to change to the required year You can also enter the date by 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Clicking on each entry in the date and typing it in manually You can select the time by A a A Ss zD 3 scrolling through the times using the scroll button or by clicking on the hour entry in the Po 2 2 23 time and typing it in manually To change between AM and PM click on this entry and Z Today 20 01 2005 scroll or type it in manually Select the Export logs before deletion option if you ax want to export or save the selected logs before Beta Destaco X z e mc 8 My Comput deleting them from the database and hence the Log KA AM My Recent My Network Places Viewer window Documents test project dxl data e 7 Company Afa Harding Network Desktop 2 Marketing on NTSERVER ntserver W 7 Tushnas Select the location of where yo
229. ettings and Permissions 3 20 1 1 Signal Properties Identification The Identification tab has entry boxes for ID Number x Name as well as an Info text box Fee a a Clicking on one of the selection circles adjacent to the Tone or Message boxes determines whether the signal e E uses a tone or message The pull down menu displays all the tones messages in the configuration From this list Tone None y select the one you wish to use O Message None Zone None y The Zone pull down menu lists all the page zones in the Schedule None bl configuration Select the page zone that you want this signal to be broadcast over The Schedule pull down menu lists all the schedules that Cancel have been defined for the configuration You can select the appropriate schedule Schedules are discussed in Section 3 19 3 20 1 2 Signal Properties Call Settings The Call Settings tab has a slider adjustment to set the x Identification Call Settings Permissions Call Priority of the signal You can specify that the tone or message be repeated several times or continuously as Fel enl A Vee well as control the delay time between the repetitions a ee 50 ee Stop After Count o Cancel Page 118 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software 3 20 1 3 Signal Properties Permissions The Permissions tab is used to specify which master stations can control the signal 1 e have the signal the spe
230. ew name into the New Configuration Name entry Click on the OK button to save the current configuration with its new name Click on Cancel in order to cancel the Cancel New Configuration Name operation 3 1 1 7 Revert Select this menu item if you have made certain changes to xi A Are you sure you wish to discard all changes since the last time you saved this configuration the configuration but you now wish to return to the configuration settings that were available the last time the configuration was saved In effect the Revert option undoes all the changes that have been made up to the time you last saved the changes to the configuration The program will display a confirmation message before it proceeds Click on Discard to eliminate the changes that you have made since you last saved the configuration or click on Cancel to cancel the operation Page 18 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 1 1 8 Properties When you select this menu item the program brings up the Configuration x Properties Read Only window if the configuration is in a locked state orit Nem e Schema version 142 brings up the Configuration Properties window if the configuration is in an Password protected No 1 1 1 1 1 Created 2011 05 24 11 19 34 4M unlocked state The list of the items that appear in this window is displayed on feast Se ee the right and a description of these items is listed in t
231. ewer It always changes both ends E T and L T of the Time Filter to specific dates and time You must select the logs of interest before opening the Time Filter dialog You can select more than one log in the Log Viewer window by holding down the shift key and clicking on a sequential set of logs or by clicking and dragging the pointer over multiple sequential logs Once you have selected the logs of interest open the Time Filter dialog and click on Match Selection Notice that Specify E T will be updated to the date and time of the first log in the selection and Specify L T will be updated to the date and time of the last log in the selection Once you click on the OK button the program will filter and display ALL logs not just the selected sequential logs that fall between the specified range of date and time Therefore the Log Viewer will display all logs from the same second value that you specify in E T and L T as well as logs that may be downloaded later and which fall between the E T and the L T From the figure below notice how the date and time in Specify E T has been updated to the date and time of the first log in the selection from the Log Viewer Also notice how the date and time in Specify L T has been updated to the date and time of the last log in the selection from the Log Viewer Page 220 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL TS DXL Log Viewer offline 2 10 x Fie Edit Sea
232. ey Conversely you cannot edit any line that has an equal sign on it as it is displaying a field that cannot be changed 6 2 1 3 Keypad Description The keypad is made up of three groups of keys l S S SS e The first group of keys amp are used to jump to the highest level of the menu structure A lO gt Y e The second group of keys a i 4 v amp Y are used to scroll l l Fj forward and in reverse through the various menu items and fault status lists e The last group of keys 4 amp gt are used for moving up and down the menu hierarchy for editing values and for acknowledging faults As previously mentioned the local display and keypad can also be accessed via a remote terminal When you connect to an Exchange in this fashion the computer s keyboard maps to the front panel keys of the DCC as shown in the following table IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 243 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Table Mapping computer keyboard to front panel keys DCC k amp ke s 5 L JAE Kr Terminal EJ Page Page EEES Bisp ner geminas Pi Up Down Numeric NJA N A N A Ent r Keypad Note that unlike the local keypad on the DXL box the key repeat rate for the remote terminal depends upon the setup of the terminal 1 e the Telnet client The auto repeat of the cursor is therefore determined by the terminal s settings Also note that instead of using the keyboa
233. first valid value it is replaced by the last valid value for the field the list wraps If you hold down the key for more than 1 second then the field will auto decrement at a 0 5 second rate until the key is released This behaviour is consistent for both numeric and textual fields e g When adjusting the clock s tens of minutes field if you repeatedly press the v key then this will produce the sequence O v 5 v 4 v 3 v 2 Y 1 1 0 When adjusting the time s two character format field if you repeatedly press the v key then this will produce the sequence AM Y ML Y PM Y AM Page 246 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL A You can use the 2 key to speed up the parsing of a list of items such as a Fault list by scrolling a screen at a time towards the top of the list rather than a line at a time This key behaves as follows e If the cursor is on a line other than the first line of the display then select the A to move the cursor to the first line of the display The content of the display does not change e Ifthe cursor is on the first line of the display and there are additional items towards the top of the list then selecting the a key causes the next six items towards the top of the list to be displayed The cursor remains on line one e If the cursor is on the first line of the display and there are four or fewer additional items towards the top of the list then selecting the 4
234. folder This folder address can be set in the general preferences see Section 2 4 2 1 1 You can use the Browse button to navigate to another folder if you want to save your project in some other location New DXL Project x In the New DXL Project dialog box you can type in the name of the project in the Project Name entry Select a path to a folder in the Create Project In entry which is where the configuration data will be located Project Name Grey Institutior Create Project In CAD ocuments and Settings KeithS My Documents DXL Projects Browse ced _ DXL Administrator x The project s name cannot contain any of the following characters Mr lt S The project name should not include the characters 9 lt gt If you type in a name and use one of these characters then the name will not be accepted when you click the OK button of the New DXL Project dialog box An error information box will appear Once you have typed in the Project Name and selected an entry for the Create Project In box you can select the OK button to save this information The project will be created and will open The screen reverts to the MicroComm DXL Administrator window with the project name now included in the title bar The Configuration Logging and Diagnostics icons will now be selectable MicroComm DXL Administrator GrayInstitute_VoIP cbd File Edit Communications Help Diagnostics Logging
235. for the number of projects to pam be displayed in the File menu is made in the General Save Project As A Move or Rename Project tab which is located in the Preferences option of the Delete Project Edit menu 1 C Documents and Settings KeithS My Documents DXL Projects Grey Institution dxl 2 C Documents and Settings KeithS My Documents DXL Projects VOiPExample dxl g i 3 C Documents and Settings KeithS My Documents DXL Projects TrainingProject dxl The list of projects in the order that they were last 4 C Documents and Settings eiths My Documents DXLTrainingProject TrainingProject dx Exit opened will appear with consecutive serial numbers Click on the name of the project that you want to open Note that the project that was most recently used moves to the top of the List of Recent Projects IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 9 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 2 4 1 9 Exit Choose this option to close the MicroComm DXL Administrator window xi and exit from the program If you have not made any changes in the 2 Si OS Do you wish to save changes configuration then the program will not ask for confirmation before shutting down However if you have made any changes then the program will prompt you to save your changes before quitting Click the Save button to save the changes that you have made Click on Discard if you do not want to save the changes that you have made in the DXL Configuration
236. from the list in this screen Page 248 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL gt You can use the gt key for editing values and this is described below e When you are editing any values other than the LCD contrast and backlight intensity you can press the gt key to move the cursor to the next field to the right unless it is already in the right most field If the cursor is already in the right most field no action is taken e When you are adjusting the contrast of the LCD you can press the gt key to increase the contrast of the LCD If the contrast is already at the highest contrast setting then no action is taken the contrast setting does not wrap If you hold down the key for more than 1 second then the contrast setting will auto increment at a 0 5 second rate until you release the key or the highest contrast setting is reached e When you are adjusting the intensity of the LCD backlight you can select the gt key to increase the setting If the intensity is already at the highest intensity setting then no action is taken the backlight intensity does not wrap If you hold down the key more than 1 second the intensity setting will auto increment at a 0 5 second rate until you release the key or the highest intensity setting is reached 4 You can use the 4 key for editing values as described below e When you are editing values other than the LCD contrast and backlight intensity you can
237. ftware MicroComm DXL 1 Overview 1 1 Intent 8 Scope The initial section of this document describes the features and operation of the MicroComm DXL Configuration Logging and Diagnostic application The latter part of this document describes the MicroComm DXL Local User Interface LUI and the Boot Mode operation 1 1 1 Administrator Software The MicroComm DXL Configuration Logging and Diagnostic application is used to e manipulate the configuration of DXL systems e review and control the logs generated by the system and e view the diagnostic information produced by the system This program runs on standard IBM PC compatible hardware The DXL Administrator application consists of four main modules the Shell the Configuration Module the Logging Module and the Maintenance Module These four modules are nearly independent parts of a single Windows application A standard windows installer will install this application In the process 1t will create an application directory to hold the application and all its data subdirectories 1 1 2 Local User Interface The Local User Interface is comprised of an 11 button keypad with a backlit LCD and three LED status indicators that are located on the front panel of the Digital Communication Controller DCC Every DCC provides a Local User Interface LUI and the purpose of this is to facilitate the installation and troubleshooting of an Exchange This document provides a description of the LUI
238. ftware MicroComm DXL 3 17 Program Groups A single Program Group consists of a collection of one or more music sources 1 e different music sources can be members of one or more program groups A program group associated with a master station or page zone is available to these devices This assignment of the program group to these devices is generally made in the Settings tab of the device A station s music select switch lets you step through the list of music sources that are defined for the program group that has been assigned to the Station in the configuration Starting from the idle state no program if you press the music select switch then the station plays the first configured program channel at its lowest volume If you press the switch a second time the same program channel is played at its higher volume If you press the switch a third time the second program channel is played at its lower volume If you press the switch again the music channel moves to the next track When you reach the last program channel and you press the music select switch the program will stop and you will not be able to hear any more music If you press the switch again the music will continue playing A station s program availability can be enabled and disabled from any master station that has the permission to do this When disabled the program channel is disconnected from the station and the program selection switch on the station is ignored When p
239. g 1 DI 2025 Cell 4118 ICM 430 411 101 1 Cell 4101 Speaker Station Housing 14D 2026 Cell 4119 ICM 430 411 101 1 Cell 4101 Speaker Station Housing 1D 2027 Cell 4120 ICM 430 411 101 1 Cell 4101 Speaker Station Housing 1 DI 2028 Cell 4121 ICM 430 411 101 1 Cell 4101 Speaker Station Housing 1 DI 2029 Cell A122 ICM 430 411 101 1 Cell 4101 Speaker Station Housing 1 DI 2030 Cell 4123 ICM 430 411 101 1 Cell 4101 Speaker Station Housing 1D 2031 Cell 4124 ICM 430 411 101 1 Cell 4101 Speaker Station Housing 1 DI Cell 4175 ICM 430 411 1N1 1 Cell 41071 Sneaker Station Hausinn vea Now 1f you want to view or edit an existing station click on the station that you want to view and then click _ o ra E E on the Properties button or just double click on the station This will bring up the Station Properties window You can now view and edit the properties of this station When editing the Properties windows also Name Housing Entry Info El include convenient Previous and Next buttons which Template None allow the user to save their current changes and move to Type Speaker Station 400 Series 7 Compound Member the previous or next item in the list while keeping the Exchange Card Port Box Housing Building 1 y occ y 400 Series SCC1 y fi y current tab the same 1f possible Previous Next Cancel Page 42 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administr
240. g an incorrect IP address etc Page 278 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 MicroComm DXL 7 3 Warnings A list of the warnings that may appear on the local display under certain conditions is displayed below Warning If the DXL battery is removed and the DXL 1s allowed to remain inactive for a while then the DXL memory will lose all the Applications that are stored on it and will only retain the Default Application This warning may arise in other cases as well but the removal of the battery and subsequent DXL inactivity may be the most common reason for this type of error In this case when the user tries to start up the DXL the following warning will be received Hence it will load the Default Application after the user hits the key to confirm the request Warning If the user has selected a particular Application to load when the DXL starts up but this Application is no longer available on the DXL as it may have been deleted then the DXL will not be able to find the selected Application that is required for loading Hence it will load the Default Application after the user hits the key to confirm the request xkkK XWARNING Xxx No valid applications were fe Seles Reverting to DEFAULT APP Please check the DXL backup battery HIC ENIER Eo ia iF aL ica Xxx XWNARNING xkkK The last selected application was mou found Reverring vo DEPAUL APP EE IAN MR eG EOI lien IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 P
241. g the up a and down v arrow keys and then select the option by hitting either the gt key or the key A test or option that has been enabled appears with a tick mark l beside it Note that you can select more than one option at a time and can place a tick mark beside all the options at the same time Once you have finished using the options on the screen select the DONE option to exit the window and continue loading the DXL IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 275 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Note that 1f you do not press a single button after the Boot Options window has loaded then a timeout of 60 seconds will come into effect This will ensure that the DXL exits the Boot Options window and continues to load This is done in an effort to prevent the DXL from remaining trapped in this window if the window has been entered due to non booting issues accidental entry or hardware flaws 7 1 1 1 The Clear IP Addresses Option Select this option if you want to clear all the IP addresses and masks on the DXL This option is useful if you wish to move the DXL box to another location that may have a different IP address and net mask After you select DONE and the Application begins to load it will bring up the Enter IP Addresses window with the cursor on the IP line and the IP address set to 000 000 000 000 You will have to use the gt key to move to the first editable value in this line and then edit the IP address
242. ge 195 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 5 The MicroComm DXL Log Viewer 5 1 Introduction The DXL system logs all significant events including intercom activities call requests alarms errors etc The Log Viewer merges and displays the log information that it collects from the DXL exchanges It also saves this information into a log file that can be reloaded and viewed at a later time even when the log viewer is no longer connected to the DXL system You can select individual messages on the Log Viewer window by clicking on them You can view a subset of all the logs in this window by using the various filter settings that are available There is no fixed capacity for the number of logs that can be viewed or saved however it is advisable to save important messages intermittently by exporting the logs into a file and delete older messages so as to free up disk space on the PC All messages that appear in the Log Viewer window are stored in a database on the computer that is running the Log Viewer Some examples of messages that are generated by a common sequence of events occurring are e Ifa Master calls a Station then a sequence of logs that are similar to the ones displayed below will be displayed in the Log Viewer window Master 1 Touchscreen Master dialled to call Station 4 ICM 4 Master 1 Touchscreen Master is establishing call to Station 4 ICM 4 Call from Master 1 Touchscreen Master to Station 4
243. gister Function Device Kind Number Device Name dl Apply Changes 40100 40100 1 Handshake Host Port Door Control 40100 40104 5 Command Host Port Door Control 40106 40110 5 Status Host Fort Door Control 40111 40120 10 Alarm Queue Hast Port 40121 40130 10 Ack d Queue Host Port 40131 40140 10 Disabled Queue Host Port mooie a ale tral Show Host Port Registers DXL Registers 3 24 1 11 Host Port Register Based Messages Masters The Masters tab lets you associate some of the Master Stations with the host port This tab has been explained in the Host Port ASCII Messages Masters section Please refer to this section for a description of this tab IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 145 Door Control Door Control Door Control 1 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL However the additional option that appears in this tab is the Independent master registers option which appears with the Edit Master Registers button beneath it Master Registers are a set of registers for 10 Central Control each Master Station which will be used for 11 CentalControl1 A 12 Central Control 2 communication between each master and the host DET ase i 14 Mai Offi Therefore the Edit Master Registers selection has a nice to be made for each Master Station These registers e ae OWED Identification Connection Protocol Messages Monitor Masters Registers Status Registers
244. gram group Program availability can also be enabled and disabled on a station by station basis by any master that has permission to do this 3 2 2 13 Filters The Filters tab is used to filter the incoming audio and xl gt Secondary Permissions Paging Feedback Outputs outgoing audio This tab appears with all the devices Identification Switches Tones CallSettings Levels Filters Control that have either an audio input or an audio output The Re i E Filters tab appears in the following sections of input hes adi Configure Masters Station Templates Stations O Lomas Paging Outputs Call Recorders and Music Sources Bandwidth fo w Uictaye Choose the Input Filter option if you want to filter the Comer 600 gt He quality of the incoming audio Choose the Output Ode y Filter option if you want to filter the quality of the outgoing audio 250 500 1 000 2 000 From the Type drop down menu you can select the type of filter that you want to use The choices are None Lowpass Highpass Bandpass Bandstop and Advanced Please refer to the ALA Detectors in Section 3 26 for a description of the various options in this window Cancel Page 32 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software 3 2 2 14 Speaker The Speaker adjustment sets the audio level of incoming audio to the device You can change each slider in 1 dB steps from 16 dB to 16 dB to change the levels The purpose of these level
245. gs Guide application note or talk to our support specialists IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 191 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 4 6 VOIP Device Manager Configuring VOIP stations and TMM devices in a DXL system can be a daunting task especially if a lot of devices need to be configured The VOIP Device Manager utility aids the end user in setting up and maintaining their VOIP devices from a central application The VOIP Device Manager utility can be started by selecting VOIP Device Manager in the MicroComm DXL Diagnostics and Maintenance window View menu This tool requires a direct Ethernet connection to the subnet in use by the VOIP devices and cannot be used over a modem or serial link 4 6 1 Main Window The main window consists of some setting buttons and controls and 11 columns of information for each VOIP device found When first started the tool will show a listing of all nodes scanned last time based on the XML configuration files stored in the project Data Voip directory which is automatically created The user must fill in the IP Range and click Scan Network first in order to do much else GS VOIP Device Manager IP Range 1192 168 fo OO Scan Network Select Template Device E Go to Template website Scanned IP Mac Address Type Firmware Domain IP Reg T O Name Description Username fD IP Address offline OOIZ1FFFFF14 TMM 192 168 0 203 60 TMM 640 4001 dhcp 192 168 0102 D0121FFFFFES TMMre dl 192168 0 21
246. hannels and LEDs Off Each line on this screen represents the status of individual intercom Stations Each line is composed of four fields The first field 1s the hardware intercom number Since each SCC can support 16 lines 1t implies that the Station numbers run from 01 through 16 The second field is the Station ID number that is assigned in the Configuration If a Station has not been assigned or there is no Configuration loaded then the string is displayed The third field is the text string or name assigned to the Station If the Station has not been assigned in the Configuration but has been loaded then the string is displayed If the Station is identified in the Configuration but has not had a text string assigned then blank characters are displayed The fourth field displays the status of the outputs If the Status Outputs are not connected all the outputs show a default of OFF 6 6 1 8 The SCC2 Outputs Option This option works identically to the SCC1 Outputs option and is not covered here again Please see the section above in order to determine how this option works Page 264 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 6 6 1 9 The Temperatures Option This screen identifies reference voltages fan speeds and temperatures for various BDCC Temperatures parameters in the DXL The temperatures are displayed in degrees Celsius C pera Monitoring the status of
247. haracter C this character stands for a fault that has been Cleared and informs the user that the fault has been rectified but not acknowledged If a fault is rectified then the fault in the Unacknowledged Faults window as well as the DCC Faults or DCE Faults window appears with a C beside it This fault disappears from both windows when the fault is acknowledged by pressing the key in the Unacknowledged Faults window on the line containing the fault that has a C beside it A table describing these faults 1s displayed below Table Status of Faults Progression of Fault Status of Fault Unacknowledged Faults DCC or DCE Faults Window Window Fault occurs and nothing is done and the fault is rectified Ekore ola R not acknowledged and the fault is acknowledged all faults are acknowledged in the Unacknowledged Faults window Ze Fault occurs and 1s Fault disappears K acknowledged without rectification C IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 269 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 6 7 2 The DCC Faults Option The faults that are displayed in this window are specific to the DCC This window DOC Faults only displays the status of the faults and therefore you cannot acknowledge faults MCC Spkrl in this window Please see the previous section for a description of characters that Se i Are appear in the fault window 2001 Stn02 Trnk The following table lists faults that may appear only in the DCC Faults wind
248. hat has been added Note that you can change settings and add new cards as needed but you cannot modify card types in this dialog To do this first delete the unwanted card by clicking on the card name MCC SCC PCI and Modem cards in the expanded DCC DCE tree view and use the Delete button at the bottom to remove it For MCC or SCC cards you then go back to the Modify dialog and add the appropriate cards For PCI or Modem cards use the Add PCI Card and Add Modem buttons available at the bottom when you select the PCI Slot and Serial Port 2 DCC hardware tree entries 3 3 2 4 Adding Modifying a DIO DIO Properties A DCC has 4 status inputs and 4 status outputs If a system requires more status Communications inputs or outputs Discrete Input Output DIOs modules can be added to the OF owas WMI Be system If you select Add DIO or in the DXL Configuration Editor the pop F Ethernet RightT rack RT 10 up windows appear as shown below For systems using Lonworks masters the DIO 1 XX is available which adds up to 48 I O points and allows configuration of the output type and input supervision Selecting the Output Type in the pull down menu gives you a choice of outputs Sink Source LED 16 Relay or 48 Relay Inputs can be either supervised or unsupervised If the inputs are supervised you can detect up to two contact wd Mesta pee closures for each input For a complete discussion on the DIO 1XX see the installation manual IM DI
249. hat the program will not let you shut down the logging window until either the files have finished printing or you have aborted the print job 5 2 1 4 Print Selection This option lets you print the selected logs only 5 2 1 5 Exit Select Exit to close the Log Viewer window Page 206 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 5 2 2 Edit Menu 5 2 2 1 Copy The Copy item copies the selected logs from the DXL Log Viewer window to the clipboard in tab delimited format You can then paste these logs into any text document To copy 1 log click on 1t and then choose Copy from the Edit menu To select more than one file simply hold down the shift key and click on the desired logs or click and drag the pointer over multiple sequential logs Then select Copy You can paste these logs into any other program that supports text entry 5 2 2 2 Select All To select all the logs just click on Select All which highlights all the logs in the Log Viewer window 5 2 2 3 Delete Logs Delete Logs a x Delete all logs prior to 04 05 2005 hd Export logs before deletion Cancel Select this option to delete all the logs from the Log Viewer database that have occurred before a particular date and time Select the date using the calendar that appears in the Delete all logs prior to drop down menu The standard calendar control lets you scroll through the months using the arrow buttons Press del
250. he DXL Configuration Editor window open in case you wish to load another configuration IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 17 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 1 1 4 Save Select this menu item if you want to save the current file e g in the case when some changes are made by overwriting the existing file This option offers no confirmation so ensure that all the changes are appropriate for the file being saved 3 1 1 5 Save As Select this menu item to save the existing configuration with a new configuration name This 1s helpful when you want to make some changes to the existing configuration and then save these changes as a new configuration This option 1s also helpful 1f you decide to activate a configuration on the DXL When this occurs the configuration that 1s activated can no longer be edited and you will have to save the configuration with a new file name in order to make changes Selecting this option brings up the Save Configuration As window This xi window displays the Current Configuration Name Type the name of the a new configuration into the New Configuration Name entry Click the OK a button to save the new configuration Click on Cancel in order to cancel Configuration 41 the operation Cancel 3 1 1 6 Rename Select this menu item to rename the current configuration with another ES name This brings up the Rename Configuration window which displays ee o the current configuration name Enter the n
251. he Log Viewer knows the setting that it will use on start up The options that appear for each of the Filters and for the Color Scheme are None Restore last used and Restore saved Select Restore last used if you want to use the Filter or Colour Schemes settings that were used when the user last exited the Log Viewer window This option is independent of whether the Filter or Color scheme was a saved setting or was simply a setting that was used before the Log Viewer was last shut down Select Restore saved when you want to use a saved Filter or Color Scheme When you select this option from the drop down menu you will see a Select button appear next to it Click on the Select button so that you can choose the saved setting that you want to load when the Log Viewer starts up Page 238 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL As an example when you click on the Select button for the Color Scheme x setting you will see the Select Color Scheme dialog From this dialog select the select afiterto losa saved color scheme that you want to use by clicking on it Click the Select button to make the selection or click Cancel to cancel the operation If you have not loaded a project then only the Color Scheme and Class amp Type Filters are configurable This is because the Color Scheme settings and the Class amp Type Filters are saved with the application while the Exchange Filters Message Filters and Time Filters
252. he application Any errors that are detected in the tests will be displayed on the local display Note that if the Clear All option is simultaneously selected then further checks will be run on the NVRAM and the FLASH which will further extend the booting time by several more minutes A list of errors will also be displayed in the local window when these memory tests are carried out EO Oleic Ons Clear IP Addresses Tests Show errors on Clear ALL Perro mime pe eee ae Y Do Memory Tests SDRAM Tesis P OK ed Se io Select Application DONE cae Oneal y Continue loading SDRAM Coste Application 128 MBytes ok IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 277 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 7 1 1 4 The Select Application Option Selecting this option will invoke the Select Applications window after you have selected DONE in the Boot Options window This window will display all the Applications that are currently available on the DXL Pick an Application by first using the up and down arrow key to scroll through the lines and then use either the gt key or the key to load the Application and run it on the DXL Note that the first line will always display the name of the default Application and the line underneath that will display the most recently used Application It is possible to display a maximum of the six most recently used Applications that are present on the DXL If no valid Application file is found then the program w
253. he devices in the call Exceptions to this are paging calls and calls to compound stations where the priority is calculated using the priority that is assigned to the page zone or the compound station rather than the priorities of their constituent members To interrupt an existing call the priority of the new call is calculated If the interrupting call from a master page zone etc is of a higher priority than the existing call then the existing call is disconnected and a new call is established between the interrupting device and the device that was previously in a call The device on the other end of the disconnected call is not put on hold nor is the original call re established after the higher priority call is terminated This discussion applies to normal master to station calls and page calls to zones Pre existing calls between pairs of visiting booth stations as well as program distribution and audio level alarm monitoring are re established after a higher priority call or page is ended In general program distribution is set to the lowest priority audio level monitoring the second lowest and all calls and pages would be assigned higher priorities For example if Masterl has a priority of 50 and Station has a priority of 20 then the priority of the call would be max 50 20 50 Now if Master2 has a priority of 60 and wants to interrupt Station1 then the priority of the new call with Master2 would be max 60 20 60 which is
254. he full MAC address of the discovered device 4 6 2 4 Type Shows the device type If the device is online the device hardware revision is also shown 4 6 2 5 Firmware Shows the devices firmware revision only shown if online 4 6 2 6 Domain IP This represents the IP address of the devices domain registrar usually the IP of the DXL DCC this device 1s configured with 4 6 2 7 Reg T O This represents the registration timeout in seconds for the device Note that networks with large numbers of devices may need longer or differing timeout values For those cases it is recommended to change the value in groups using template devices 4 6 3 User Editable Device Value Columns The user editable columns can be changed be the end user to customize the VOIP devices configuration Note that these values are updated when Scan Network is clicked so do not make any changes until after you have scanned To edit a value simply click on the value an edit box will appear after a short delay When changed these values are only written to the end devices using Update Selected Based on Template Device 4 6 3 1 Name Device name Shown in the device s web page but unused in DXL 4 6 3 2 Description Optional device description Shown in the device s web page but unused in DXL 4 6 3 3 Username ID This represents the ID of the device in the DXL master menus and the username extension on the device s website This must be a unique value and ma
255. he mode of accessing the exchanges and other settings may vary slightly So in this discussion we will highlight the settings that are common for all the modules Any choices and settings that vary will be discussed with their respective sections IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 167 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 4 1 2 1 Communications Link Setup Whenever an attempt is made to connect the Administrator brings up the sl following window You can either select Manual Entry except for the P ddesstes or Phone Numbers From DXL Log Viewer or Configuration You will also need to select the A ela TITS type of Communications Link using the pull down menu provided in the Connect Via box Communications Link Connect Via In both the Configuration and the Manual Entry options you can connect to the exchange s via an Ethernet Modem or Serial connection Choose the appropriate connection type from the Connect Via drop down menu When you establish a connection link to the exchanges 1t does not affect the configuration that is presently operating the DXL system Cancel Connect Via Modem y thernet Modem Serial Use Connect to connect to the exchanges on the DXL the administrator needs to retrieve the IP address or the phone number of the exchange s It can get this information from the configuration file or directly from you the user If you have a configuration for the DXL syst
256. he sound by using the options in the centre of the screen You can use the Shift and Ctrl keys to select multiple sounds Note that the options are identical for both the Tone and Message sound types Descriptions of the various buttons that appear on this screen are shown below Remember to click on the sound that you want to edit before choosing the options below You can click on the Exit button at any time to close the Sounds Editor window IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 23 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Move Click on Move to move a sound from one area source to the other destination so that it is not available in the source area anymore The direction of the arrows gt gt gt or lt lt lt indicates the direction of movement Copy Click on Copy to copy a sound from one area into the other area This makes the sound available in the both the source and the destination areas The direction of the arrows gt gt gt or lt lt lt indicates the direction of movement Delete Click on Delete to delete a selected sound from a particular area x so that it is no longer available A confirmation message window sp Are you sure you wish to delete the selected sounds appears and you will need to click on Delete to delete the sound YH or click on Cancel to cancel the operation Rename Click on Rename to give a new name to a particular sound x The Rename Sound window appears Type the new name of
257. he table below You can italia add to or change the Version comment if the configuration is unlocked Click Lastactivated pow Version comment yA AA on OK to exit this window Name of the Configuration Name of Configuration Will display version of schema of the database that is Version Number is Schema Version es used to create the Configuration files displayed Password protected Will indicate if the Configuration is password protected Will indicate when Configuration was created Date and time displayed Will indicate when Config was most recently saved Date and time displayed Will indicate when Config W t tl Last downloaded ened Mire ON Date and Time displayed downloaded Dae usioaded Will indicate the time when the current Configuration ed was last uploaded AE Will indicate the time when a current Configuration old was last activated Will display any user comments Comment displayed Configuration Properties x As soon as you start to type comments in the Version Comment box the Name Configuration_4 2 selection buttons at the bottom of the Configuration Properties window Schema version i will change You will see a Save button and a Cancel button Click on the wetraetel No Created 2011 05 24 11 19 34 4M Save button to save your comments or click on Cancel button to cancel Last saved 2011 05 24 4 23 28 PM the Last downloaded Never operation Last uploaded Never Last activated Never Wersion commen
258. his master group Identification Members Control Secondary Status Registers Permissions Member Masters Central Control 1 Central Control 2 Cancel Click on the Add button to view a list of all the master stations in the system The o x a Masters Select Masters window pops up and you make your selections from this list After pm selecting a master it is added to the Member Masters area and this master will no n rele z a 20 Housing 1 5 longer appear in the Select Masters window 51 Unit A Control 24 Nw Tower 25 Unit B Control 30 Housing 2 Supr 31 Unit C Control 33 NE Tower 35 Unit D control he cai Cancel Page 64 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 6 Station Templates The MicroComm DXL Configuration Editor supports station templates in order to quickly and easily configure many similar stations such as in a housing unit These are virtual devices with almost the same set of properties as real intercom stations which are described in the next section The principal difference is that they do not have a hardware port address The physical intercom stations may be based on a particular template In this case the station inherits the value of its properties from its station template All the stations that are created from a specific template will have the same set of properties that you have defined in the template For example if a template is defined to have its call reques
259. his wizard helps you on Next gt button eo ey Connect to a private network such as your workplace network To continue click Next The next page of the Wizard the Network Connection Type asks you what type of connection you want to set up ggg onic oy Select the Set up an advanced connection option Ras Connect to followed by clicking on the Next gt button O Web and read email Connect to the network at my workplace Connect to a business network using dial up or VPN so you can work from home a field office or another location Set up an advanced connection Connect directly to another computer using your serial parallel or infrared port or set up this computer so that other computers can connect to it The next page of the Wizard the Advanced Connection Options asks you what type of connection you want to set ee eee up Select the Connect directly to another computer a DCC is similar to a PC option then click on Next gt button Select the connection type you want Accept incoming connections Allow other computers to connect to this computer through the Intemet a phone line or a direct cable connection Connect directly to another computer Connect to another computer using your serial parallel or infrared port Page 282 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software The next page of the Wizard the Host or Guest asks you if you want your PC to act as a Host or as a G
260. hows the list pane of the DXL xJ Identification Call Settings Levels Selectors Filter Configuration Editor with Configure set to Paging Outputs All the paging outputs for Housing Building 1 Number 24 are displayed Name Ampi ier 41 Input I El Type MCC Line Out Pot y Exchange Box f Housing Building 1 y DCE 1 y Previous Next Cancel DXL Configuration Editor Configuration p i z af xj File Edit Configure Paging Outputs Lock a View Hardware Jn Number Name Info Pot E Greylnetitution dl Laundry Supports erwices DCC IMS MCC Line Level Output 1 Maintenance Supports envicesvOCC 2 IMS MEC Line Level Output 2 Unit Page fHousingBuilding JOC IMS MEC Line Level Output 1 Housigl4dmin Page fHousingBuilding OCC IMS MEC Line Level Output 2 Amplifier 1 Input fHousingBuilding DOCE 1145 15 Mm MCC Line Level Out Amplifier 2 Input fHousingBuilding OCE 171MS TSM MECCLine Level Out MedicalPage SpecialHanding DLC2 IMS MECC Line Level Output 1 Segregation Page SpecialHanding DCE41M5 T15M MCCYLine Level Output 1 Administration Page AAdmimnbBuilding OCl IMS MECLine Level Output 1 Visiting Page AAdminBuilding OCl IMS MOCC Line Level Output 2 Properties ve Delete IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 101 Administrator Software 3 13 1 2 Paging Output Properties Call Settings The Call Settings tab has slider adjustments to set Volume it can be set from 16dB to 16dB in 1 dB
261. i M Feb M Mar W Apr May Jun All that you want to include in your schedule You can click on the All Boe ee OL De a button to include all months of the year or None button to remove Days of the Months all checked entries Add o Edit Clicking on the Add button for Days of the Month brings up a Dete dialog box that allows you to select a single day or a range of days Days of the Week i All x CC xi se EEO Naat ne A My eatin Bed ek Sun None Single C Single 3 Hours of the Day Add C Range Range Ay i Edt From ever 1 From fi Hifa every fi elete cre core Minutes of the Hour You can either type in the entries or use the arrows to scroll to the desired value A range of 1 to 31 days will include every day of the month even if the month has fewer days After you click on OK you will return to the Date Time Specifier dialog box and can click on the Add button for Days of the Month to specify another day or a second interval of days Clicking on the Add button for Hours of the Day brings up a dialog box that xi allows you to select a single hour or a range of hours Once you have made your Singe F E i i selections click on the OK to save your settings You can repeat this process as m many times as required to include all the hour time intervals you require re ee y q y q From jp ta 23 EYE im Ca
262. ibute files to other exchanges The distribute feature is important for optimizing file transfer over a PPP connection Uploading files over a PPP connection is slow and should be avoided as much as possible For instance when copying a file to multiple exchanges it is faster to copy the file to one exchange and then distribute the filter to other exchanges instead of trying to directly copy the file to every exchange This is because the Distribute feature uses the Ethernet and is therefore much faster The File Manager will try to perform the latter distribute operation if possible however if none of the Exchanges are capable of distributing the files then the File Manager will still allow the user to copy the files directly but with a warning to the user that it will be slow and will therefore take much longer Copying files over the Ethernet will remain the same when the files are to be uploaded to the exchanges directly Copying files over the PPP however will utilize the distribute function as much as possible If the user tries to copy a file from the Project Configurations area to the Exchanges and the file is already present on one of the exchanges then the File Manager will check to see if the exchange can distribute the file first before trying to re copy the file onto the remaining exchanges Therefore the user may see a copy operation over the PPP turn into a distribute operation instead Note that when an exchange is receiving a fi
263. icking on each entry in Specify a 26 ch e and typing it in manually or by clicking on each entry and using the scroll to scroll Todav 20 01 2005 through that entry To switch between AM and PM click on the entry and use the scroll Page 218 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL The following components of the E T and the L T are discussed underneath Earliest Time E T e None This indicates that no earliest time has been set x which means that the Log Viewer will display the oldest p Earliest Time downloaded log None oldest log e Relative you can ask to see logs that have been EOR Samana downloaded a specific amount of time before the L T Bours l By typing in a number in Relative and then specifying Latest Time whether it is Minutes Hours Days Weeks or Months in Now most recent log the drop down menu you can specify to see all logs a Specify 20 01 2005 sozoam specified period of time defined in Relative prior to the L T Match Selection Cancel e Specify this is a specified date and time for the E T Latest Time L T e Now this is the latest or most recent log that has been downloaded by the Log Viewer e Specify this is a specified date and time for the L T The various combinations of the E T and the L T are shown in the table below Earliest Time E T Latest Time L T p Description A all logs from th
264. ies for Volume Call Priority and Program Group Program Group is a set of music source that can be transmitted to this station An operator at a master station with permission for program control can select one of the music sources in the selected program group when the DXL is running 3 7 3 4 5 Talkback Station Properties Levels The Levels tab can be used to increase or decrease the sound levels transmitted or received by the station 3 3 4 6 Talkback Station Properties ALA The ALA Audio Level Alarm tab is used to configure automatic monitoring of the incoming audio from the station If a loud audio signal is detected that exceeds a set threshold it can trigger an alarm Four different sound level alarm thresholds can be set An operator who has permission to turn on off the monitoring or an automatic schedule can select the appropriate level IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Station 2401 Games Room A Properties xi Permissions Outputs Selectors Identification Switches Tones Call Settings Levels ALA Fites Initial Volume Program Group 200 Tunerlmputs 16dB jo 16dB Call Priority m O AA AO A A 0 50 100 Answer Call Requests Only MicroComm DXL Cancel Station 2401 Games Room A Properties i x Permissions Outputs Selectors Identification Switches Tones Call Settings Levels ALA Filters Speaker Microphone 16dB o 16dB Station 2401 Games Room
265. ification The Identification tab text box has entries for an ID Number Name and an Info box Page 136 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 24 1 2 Host Port Connection A Host port is connected to one of the Exchanges in a x DXL system and this Exchange is specified in the Identification Connection Protocol Messages Monitor Masters Exchange entry of the Connections tab The pull down Exchange MIME menu displays all the Exchanges that have been defined In 6 timeme IP adess 100287 the Configuration From this list you can select the TCP UDP Fort 10000 appropriate Exchange C Serial Serial Port Baud Hate 1 19200 Select the Ethernet option 1f you want the host to use an Ethernet connection to communicate with the DXL The DXL obtains the IP address of the host when the Host Port opens a connection to the DXL system The IP Address entry 1s simply the IP Address of the Exchange Note that Cancel this IP Address was previously defined in the Exchange section of Configure when the Exchange was first created in the Configuration TCP UDP Port is the TCP or UDP port number that this host port will listen to while it is waiting for a connection from a client host system The number of digits for this entry is limited to 65535 However the entries from 0 1023 are typically reserved for well known protocols and hence you should use TCP UDP Port numbers that lie betwe
266. iguration after it was deleted by using the import option Click on the Import button to bring up the Import 21x Configuration s From window Select a Lookin C3 Configurations H EB GD Configuration 1 configuration to be imported by using the icons or E configuration 1 cfg type the name of the configuration that you want to import into the File name entry This file has a cfg file extension 1f you are importing a configuration file or it has an app file extension if you are importing an application file Click on Open to import this file Remember that if you are importing a configuration file then the file 1s imported into the existing project that is currently ee ss Configuration 1 tg El open and active Click on Cancel to cancel the Flesoftype DXL Configuration Ccto E Cancel operation Now that the configuration has been imported into the existing project you will be able to open it and view it in exactly the same way as you open other configurations Note that if the computer is already connected to the exchange s when you open the File Manager window then you can skip the process below which describes how to connect to the exchange s on the DXL 4 2 5 Connect The Connect button works similarly for both the configuration files cfg option and the application files app option Refer to the Communication Links Setup and Status section above for more details on setting
267. igurations area only displays the configurations that exist in the project that is open In the application files app option the Installed Applications area displays all the applications that are installed on the PC 4 2 1 Configuration Files cfg Select this option to manage the configuration files by uploading configurations to exchanges downloading configuration from exchanges activating configuration on exchanges etc The cfg refers to the file extension of the configuration files If the PC is not x Ea E currently connected to the DXL system the E Assisten Fics lanoi Connect Retesh Select Exchanges File Manager window opens and displays _Fieiect Configurations Configurations on Exchanges O 0 002 000d the files that are on your computer only 0 02 01 These files are displayed in the Project Tepeu Configurations area ii In this case you will not be able to see the exchanges on the DXL as you are not A currently connected to any of the exchanges ua Import IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 175 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL If you are already connected to the CAC oo xi Configuration Files cfg exchanges on the DXL when the File P deren aie Piss ace Manager window opens then you will be Pisiest Configurations O 0 002 000d able to see all the exchanges that currently 0 02 01 a R C 0 002 001k _ gt Cop gt exist in
268. ill be saved in the Network Connections folder Add a shortcut to this connection to my desktop To create the connection and close this wizard click Finish _ coe Te con 21x The Connect DXL Modem dialog box will now appear You can type in User name and a Password here we have used dxl as both the User name and the Password You can use the checkbox if you want your PC to save this user name and password To complete the configuration for the serial port connection you need to click on the Properties button Password To change the saved password click here JV Save this user name and password for the following users Me only Anyone who uses this computer Dial oOo _da Comcel Properties Hep Page 290 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL The DXI Modem Properties dialog box has 5 tabs General Options 21x Security Networking and Advanced You will need to change the default configuration in the General tab To change the configuration click the Configure button on the General tab to bring up a Modem Configuration dialog box General Options Security Networking Advanced Connect using 83 Modem Standard 56000 bps Modem COM1 Phone number ode Area c Phone number Altemates Country region code y I Use dialing rules Dialing Rules Y Show icon in notification area when connected In the Modem Configur
269. ill skip this menu and will load and run the default Application instead ESO os Select Application Is selected Application Load selected valid Application Clear IP Addresses DEFAULT APP Clear ALL NARA Do Memory Tests A O e Y Select Application PE Ie AP A A o ET DONE Load Default Application 7 2 Load and Run Program After these selections have been made and carried out the program will run DXL Boot Version 1 0 and load the Application that you have selected or the default Application in bower on Detected the case that you have not made a choice or the choice is invalid A descriptive menu is used to indicate the loading status and report any errors Loading Application DPC WM O e Note that the first line may display a number of different strings depending on the condition in which the DXL is booted e Power on Detected indicates that the DXL has been powered up by using the switch at the back of the DXL e Power on Restart also indicates that the DXL has been powered by the user e User Reset indicates that the user has initiated a reset of the DXL This may appear when you load a new Application or enter a new IP address etc In this case the DXL would check with the user about whether it 1s to reboot or reset itself e Exception Code xxH where xx is the two digit HEX error code indicates a firmware or hardware error or issue such as enterin
270. ime a Threshold and a Duration If you did not select the advanced algorithm you will also have to select a Sensitivity parameter ALA Detector 1 Unit A Monitor Properties x prrgarnnacananccnnnccnnos Mode Relative Short Long S Mode Relative v H elatiwe Power Estimate Time Short 100 ms Long 5 bi sec Threshold fi 2 dB Duration 250 ms Cancel The DXL processes the signal by extracting the power from the filtered signal and then averaging the power over a certain period of time Depending on the time period that you choose this averaging of power gives the result of a short term power estimate STPE or a long term power estimate LTPE In the relative mode the DXL program compares the STPE to the LTPE Mode There are three modes of operation that an ALA detector can have Short Long and M S G alas Relative e Short Mode The Short mode is used to detect short bursts of sound In this mode the ALA alarms are triggered when the STPE is greater than the threshold Page 154 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL e Long Mode The Long mode is used to monitor the background noise levels In this mode the ALA alarms are triggered when the LTPE is greater than the threshold e Relative The Relative mode is used to detect short term noises that exceed the background noise level by a pre determined amount Since the Relative mode uses the values from both the short
271. in this window Please see the section on the Unacknowledged Faults window for a description of characters that appear in the fault window 6 7 6 The DCE 4 Faults Option The faults that are displayed in this window are specific to DCE 4 This window only displays the status of the faults and therefore faults cannot be acknowledged in this window Please see the section on the Unacknowledged Faults window for a description of characters that appear in the fault window 6 8 Default Screens After a Timeout period set by the user of inactivity on the keypad the DCCs display automatically returns to one of two default screens Note that some screens will disable the Timeout period e g the Install IMS screen or Remove IMS screen by continuing to remain in the screen that the user is working with A discussion on how this Timeout period is set is discussed in Section 6 5 1 1 the LCD Adjustment Screen If the Timeout is enabled to a certain time period and if there are no unacknowledged faults then the System Time Date screen is displayed after the Timeout period has expired Conversely if unacknowledged faults are present then the Unacknowledged Faults screen is displayed after the Timeout period has expired When a Timeout period has been set the display will automatically switch between these two screens as faults occur and are acknowledged When either default screen is displayed the interface should behave
272. ine in these sections do not fall into the range of preset values that have already been defined then you will receive an error message The range of values for the different video switch types is tabulated below Switch Max Monitor Max Camera Max PTZ Name Output Input Preset 3 99999 2 99999 2 99999 3 99999 2 99999 2 99999 3 99999 2 99999 2 99999 3 99999 2 99999 2 99999 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 163 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 27 Video Cameras To define a Video Camera click on the Video Cameras section in Configure of the Configuration Editor Click on the Add button to add a new video camera The Video Camera Properties dialog window with a single tab Identification will appear Note that you cannot define a Video Camera if a Video Switch has not been defined with the Camera Monitor Commands option This Camera Monitor Commands option is selected in the Commands tab of the Video Switches section in Configure If you have not defined this type of Video Switch then the program will give you an error message shown below when you try to define a Video Camera clicking the OK button DXL Administrator i xj e Please select a video switch in the Identification tab You may have to create your video switches first if ML there are none available Choose the video switch that you want to associate with this video camera from the video Switch Video Switch drop d
273. ing the operation of an ALA and it is the recommended setting The Network Audio Trunk settings allows for the configuration of the Ethernet audio trunking used in non CEPT DXL installations Note that the default settings of Broadcast with the RTP Port Base at 16512 are usually suitable for most installations but please note that your network switches need to allow the broadcast packets used by the VoIP exchange trunk to pass through the network If you are using a Multicast VoIP audio trunk you need to assign one valid Multicast IP address and Multicast TTL value and have your network switches set appropriately to allow this multicast traffic through where required Refer to the latest DXL application note DXL APP 203 v v for more details on this advanced configuration IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 135 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 24 Host Ports This section describes how host ports are implemented in a DXL configuration Details on the various host port protocols supported by the DXL are contained in the Installation Manual IM DXL HIS P2 0 The system supports the use of host ports in order to communicate with external systems Host Ports and a DXL system exchange three types of messages Command messages Status messages and Response messages Only the Host is allowed to send Command messages to the DXL however the DXL can send Response messages in response to a command sent by the Host and Status messages to describe the status
274. io Level Alarm ALA Control Station Call Requests Control Station Group Audio Level Alarm Control Station Group Call Request Control Station Group Program Control Station Program Allows a TSM to make a call to a Master Station Allows a TSM to make a call to a Page Zone as defined in the configuration Allows a Master to Man or Unman another Master Program availability for Page Zones can be enabled disabled from TSMs Audio level alarm settings for Stations can be adjusted from TSMs Call requests from Stations can be enabled disabled from TSMs Audio level alarm settings for Station Groups can be adjusted from TSMs Call requests from Stations Groups can be enabled disabled from TSMs Program availability for Station Groups can be enabled disabled from TSMs Program availability for Stations can be enabled disabled from TSMs Procedure to Follow 1 Enter the required Prefix followed by the Master Station ID with preceding zeroes if required 2 Enter the required Prefix followed by the name of the Master Station Enter the required Prefix and then the Page Zone ID with preceding zeroes if required Enter the required Prefix the Master ID the Configuration Separation Character and then 0 to Unman a Master or 1 to Man a Master Enter the required Prefix the Page Zone ID the configured Separation Character and then 0 to turn Program availabilit
275. ion Links Setup and Status 2 4 3 1 Connect This menu invokes the Communications Link Setup dialog which is used to connect to the exchanges on the DXL For more information refer to the MicroComm DXL x Diagnostics and Maintenance section 4 Communications Link Get IP Address es or Phone Number s From Manual Entry Setup P Configuration Configuguration_1 0 y Communications Link Connect Via Ethernet y Disconnect i Page 12 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 2 4 3 2 Show Setup The Show Setup brings up the Connection Link Setup window This window is for information only and cannot be edited 2 4 3 3 Show Status Selecting Show Status will bring up the Communication Status window showing a xl A 7 s l Exchange 100 S upport Services at 10 0 0 1 list of possible connections In this example the dimmed italic entries indicate that Erhene 200 Housing Building 1 at 10 0 0 2 there are no devices responding at the IP address The black entry indicates a device is responding to the IP address being sent out and a connection link exists Exchange 400 Special Handling at 10 0 0 4 Exchange 500 Administration at 10 0 0 5 2 4 4 Help Menu Selecting the Help tab of the MicroComm DXL Administrator window displays the i DXL Administrator User Manual F1 following choices Contact Information About 2 4 4 1 DXL Administr
276. ion Lists As a member of a group or groups a master will receive its own alarms and call requests and it will also receive the alarms that are directed to any of the master groups that it belongs to Similarly a master that is a member of a master group operates on the union of its own permission lists and the permission lists of all the groups that it belongs to While a master can be a member of more than one master group it can have only one secondary master or secondary master group Also alarms that are directed specifically to the master not the group are forwarded to the master s secondary when it is unmanned rather than to the remaining members of its group Master groups can also be configured with secondary masters or master groups In this case alarms that are specifically directed to the master group are not forwarded until the last of its members 1s unmanned Master Groups are very useful for the purpose of queuing call requests at many masters So if a station issues a call request then this call request 1s queued at all the masters in the master group Hence call requests and alarms can be attended to much more quickly than if there was only a single Master that was responsible for handling all the requests IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 63 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 5 5 1 Master Group Master Properties Members The Members tab contains an information box that lists x all the masters that are included in t
277. is active on the system This mapping or assumption is usually correct but it may not necessarily be so Additionally when you select a log the Log Viewer window displays the Configuration that this log belongs to This Configuration is displayed either as a separate column in the Log Viewer window or in the Status bar depending on the current Column Settings that you have chosen DAL Log Viewer connected to i e exchange ee The E E i i Hints 5 leoebug ntemal shelle 04 01 2005 30 Housing Building 2 E Listener c on be 50007 accepting dient connection 30 Exchange number of from 10 0 1 200 on socket a 73 current Configuration E Debug fInternalfshells O4f01 2005 30 Housing Building 2 Listener on port 50007 bound and accepting connections on socket 9 Debug Anternal Shells O4f01 2005 30 Housing Building 2 Shell on socket 73 started Pd Tnfo System Startup 041012005 7 30 Housing Building 2 DRL system user reset occurred at 16 46 ML on 4 1 2005 Info System Startup 0401 2005 30 Housing Building 2 DXL system started using applicabon file y DEL Demo New RI OXL 0 4 0B83 APP Debug Anternalfinterco 0401 2008 30 Housing Building 2 Intercom task Ul inibialized successfully Configuration that the unknown device belongs to ae J IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 235 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 5 2 6 5 Reset Layout The Reset Layout menu
278. is displayed when the PC connects to the Exchanges Now say you close the Communication Status window by clicking on the x symbol in the top right corner of the Communication Status window Now if you want to view the Communication Status window again click on the Disconnect button that is located in Page 200 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL the Transfer Menu of the Log Viewer window This opens the Communications Link Setup window Click on Cancel in this window After you do this you will see that the Communication Status window re appears 5 1 3 The Log Viewer Window The main menu in the Log Viewer window lets you e Connect to the Exchange that you want to download log messages from e Select messages for copying into other files or for printing purposes e Change the default setting that the log viewer starts up with e Search for messages that contain certain letters words or phrases e Filter messages according to the Class amp Type of event the Exchange from which the logs originated the Message that is generated from the event occurring and the Time that a log is generated e Change the font settings for the messages as well as the column setting and the scrollbar for the Log Viewer window File Edit Search Filter Transfer Format SS px Log Yiewer offline O x ae aaa X Debug E Debug WE Debug XE Debug Debug J Info Debug li Interna
279. iscussed next When you click on the Connect button in the Communications Link Setup window the Select Exchanges window appears with checkmarks beside all the Exchanges that the computer will try to connect to and download logs from This window has been discussed in the Communication Link Setup Dialog in Section Error Reference source not found Please refer to this section for a description of how to use the Select Exchanges window When you connect to the Exchanges on the DXL you will see the x Communication Status window appear You can right click on the Exchange1 Bottom at 10 0 2 94 Communication Status window and then click on one of the four options that A ia appear Refresh Disconnect Preferences Stay On Top fresh If you click on Refresh the PC will check the connectivity to the Exchanges dl ES Disconnect If you click on Preferences this will take you to the DXL Administrator Preferences Preferences window In the Connection Tab of this window you can choose to show or hide the Communication Status window This tab has been discussed in Section O Remember that the Communication Status window does not always appear as it depends on the option that you have selected in the Connection Tab of the DXL Administrator Preferences window This tab has been discussed in Section 2 4 2 1 3 In this tab say that you have selected the option that will ensure that the Communication Status window
280. ist of all the cameras that you have defined so far Click on any one of these cameras to set it as the default camera A default camera can be separately specified for each monitor Note that you can only set a Default Camera if you have chosen the Show Default Camera option from the When Call Ends drop down menu Once you have completed defining the monitors click on the OK button to associate this video monitor with the master The Add Delete Move Up and Move Down buttons in the CCTV tab work in exactly the same way as the previous section and will not be discussed here again The Properties button is an additional button that appears with this window This button is used to view the settings of a video monitor that has already been defined To view the properties or settings click on the video monitor and then click on the Properties button or just double click on the video monitor Rules We will now discuss some rules for connecting video monitors on Masters to video cameras on Stations and vice versa In the discussion M refers to a video monitor and C refers to a video camera The notation M101 gt C101 means that Monitor101 is connected to Cameral01 The following rules apply for the Camera Monitor Commands method of interconnecting cameras and monitors 1 With the exception of rule 2 connections will be established between cameras and monitors in the same order that they are assigned in the Configuration
281. k the DXL Configuration Editor each time you open the configuration editor Note that the DXL Configuration Editor window will open in an unlocked state only if it has not been activated or if it is not password protected i Cancel Also note that no changes will be made until you click on the OK button to accept the changes The Restore Defaults button works in exactly the same way as the button in the General tab discussed previously and is not discussed here again 2 4 2 1 3 Preferences Logging Logging is discussed in a Section 5 2 4 2 1 4 Preferences Diagnostics Diagnostics is discussed in Section 4 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 11 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 2 4 2 1 5 Preferences Connection The Connection tab lets you stipulate whether you xi General Configuration Logging Diagnostics Connection want the Communication Status window to appear and also the rate at which you want the connectivity status between the PC and the DXL exchanges to be J Show communication status window when connected Y Show IP addresses in the communication status window f efr e shed Refresh communication status every 2 seconds The Communication Status window di splays Disconnect communications link when it becomes unused whether or not the PC is currently connected to the tal Og ls Ves z Prompt v exchanges on the DXL This window is explained further in Section 3 1 1 10 If you check the Sho
282. k for open or short circuit faults on Aii A aaa the audio lines The check boxes beside Supervise no AS Port 1 and Supervise Port 2 turn this capability on or off If a port is supervised its faults are always reported to the Exchange DCC however you also have the option of reporting the faults to a Master Station The pull down menu on the Report Faults To drop down menu lists all the Master Stations in the system Select the Master Station that will be monitoring the faults from this list All the faults that are detected on the supervised switches will be forwarded to the Master that you define here Note that 1f you do not define a Master to report the faults to then the faults will still appear on the DXL but they will not be reported to any of the Master Stations If the Master that 1s to monitor faults has not been defined yet then you will have to return to this window later You can define a port as being unsupervised by removing the tick mark in the checkbox beside Supervise Port 1 or Supervise Port 2 Note that 1f you have an unsupervised port you will only be able to define one switch for that port If a port is unsupervised then any faults that occur at its switch will not be reported to the DXL or to the Master Station 3 5 2 2 IMS and TMM Master Properties Call Settings You can select the Page Control so that it operates as ECGS SSS ES Secondary Status Registers Permissions Paging Feedback O
283. l i saa FETA na Status Dutput SO dipu Flashing Light 1 fHousingBuilding DEC IMS MOC Status Output 170 utput Relay Control 1 fHousingBuilding DEC IMS MOC Status Output 270 utpat Flashing Light 2 fHousingBuilding DEC IMS MOC Status Output 3 0 utput Relay Control 2 fHousingBuilding DEC IMS MCC Status Output 4D utpat Properties he Delete Page 100 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 13 Paging Outputs Paging outputs are audio outputs used as inputs to audio amplifiers and their associated selectors The amplifier outputs are generally connected to external speakers in this case via the PZE Four types of paging outputs are supported MCC Line out line level outputs IP Station Ports utilizing the speaker or line out on the 600 Series IP Stations Generic Station Ports utilizing SPA adapters on 300 series ports and Speaker Station Ports utilizing SPA adapters on 400 series ports In our example the two amplifiers require two line level outputs from a DCC or DCE Selecting Paging Output in the Configure entry of the DXL Configuration Editor allows us to add paging outputs to the configuration 3 13 1 Paging Output Dialog Box The Paging Output Dialog Box has 5 tabs Identification Call Settings Levels Outputs and Filter 3 13 1 1 Paging Output Properties Identification The Identification tab requires an ID Number Name Info Type and the location of the output Port The picture below s
284. l Autodesk Plotter Manager EA Automatic Updates 9 Date and Time SA Display Folder Options Fonts Game Controllers 9 internet Options Network Connections Phone and Modem Options Power Options Printers and Faxes A Regional and Language Options Sy Scanners and Cameras Scheduled Tasks Calibrate monitor fo Adobe Version Cue Adds removes and Adds removes and Set up Windows to Set the date time Change the appear Customize the displ Add change and Add remove and C Configure your Inte Java Plug in Control Customize your key Microsoft Outlook P Customize your mo Connects to other c Configure your tele Configure eneray s Shows installed prin Customize settings Add remove and c Schedule computer The Network Connections window displays all the current Connections on your PC The next step in creating a serial connection is to use open the New Connection Wizard by using the File menu or double clicking the New Connection Wizard icon IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Security Center View your current s Elsounamax Control Panel for So lolxi File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help ay Q Back P L Search Folders 5 3 X 19 m Address e Network Connections z Go 7 DXL Serial Disconnected Firewalled Communications cable be LAN or High Speed Internet L Local Area Connection L
285. l Intercom Tasks 0 1b4 Block 1 DXL Demo Ex 96 lt From IP gt 02 02 2100 02 02 2100 02 02 2100 02 02 2100 02 02 2100 02 02 2100 02 02 2100 102 02 2100 12 51 94 4M MAS Handling request MSG_DCX_Audio_Disconnected 12 51 94 4M MAS Handled request MSG_DCX_Audio_Disconnected NU SUCCESS 12 51 94 4M STA Handling request MSG_DCX_Audio_Disconnected 12 51 94 4M STA Handled request MSG_DCX_Audio_Disconnected NU_SUCCESS 12 51 94 4M CEPT Handling request MSG_DCX_Audio_Disconnected 12 51 94 4M CEPT Handled request MSG_DCX_Audio_Disconnected NU SUCCESS 12 51 94 4M DCE 1 has been disconnected 2 12 51 94 4M STA Handling request MSG_DCX_ALA Disconnected Note that for viewing purposes it 1s not necessary to be connected to an Exchange as the logs can be viewed offline However new logs can only be downloaded after connecting to the required Exchange s IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 201 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL The Log Viewer window has several display characteristics that can display the following information for each log entry A picture representing these parameters is shown below Column T C Date l Time Message ype 155 oe DEL Log Y Viewer r connected to 1 exchange a AO ay i eae te sa ee eee se ns ce ee ee ecco a HR al inte m E Ta sks CLE Jani FE 27 2005 Jog 19 1 63 AM iT his e char ige is Sah ee H he clo sk 08 19 21 634M Sent prore broadcast re
286. l host and 1t always begins with the number 4 Digits specifies the number of decimal digits in the offset and 1t can be set from 3 digits to a maximum of 6 digits Maximum specifies the maximum number of registers that the DXL or the host can use for this Host Port Initially a default value of 65535 is set for a setting of 5 or 6 digits assumes addresses can be located with a 16 bit offset number relative to a base address or to the maximum value possible with a setting of 3or 4 digits For many PLCs this must be set to a lower value The program automatically adds a number of zeroes before the Maximum entry so that the number of digits in the offset equals the number chosen in Digits The Normal Register Addr follows the format of 4n where n is the offset As an example if Digits 5 and Maximum 65535 which is a common assignment for PLCs then the last memory address that can be assigned 1s the address at location 4n 465535 The Ext Register Address refers to extended memory that may reside on the DXL or the external host and it always begins with the number 6 Digits specifies the number of digits in the offset and can be set from 3 to a maximum of 6 digits Maximum specifies the maximum number of memory registers that the DXL or the host can use for each host port The Ext Register Address follows the format of 6bn where b is the bank number and nis the offset As an example if Digits 4 and address 999 then the last
287. l not appear in the Log Viewer window Click on Select All to display the log messages from all the M Show al other exchanges not isted above Exchange s in the Show Exchange area This places a tick mark A beside all the Exchange names Click on Clear All to display none of the log messages from the Exchange s in the Show Exchange area This removes the tick marks from all the Exchange names It is possible for different Configurations to have the same exchange number 1 e 10 but a different exchange name For example Configuration 1 may have Exchange 10 defined as Support Services whereas Configuration 2 may have Exchange 10 defined as Medical Unit In this case all the names that are associated with the same Exchange number will appear in a list beside the Exchange number So in our example 1t will appear in the Show Exchange area as 10 Support Services Medical Unit This allows the user to view the different names on different Configurations that are all defined with the same Exchange number Page 216 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL In order to display logs for Exchanges that are not shown in the Show Exchange area put a tick mark in the Show all other exchanges not listed above checkbox This lets you display log messages that may belong to a Configuration that you do not have in your current Project For example say a new Configuration is made but you do not have a copy of th
288. l see the Select Exchanges window pop up which will display the exchanges Exchange 01 Exchange 02 and Exchange 03 By IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 179 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL default the PC 1s connected to all the Exchanges that are not in grey and have a tick mark beside them The Configurations on Exchange s area is displaying all the configurations that contain these three Exchanges However in our example Exchange 02 and Exchange 03 appear in grey meaning that the computer has been unable to connect to these exchanges Therefore since Exchange 01 is the only Exchange that the computer is connected to the Configurations on Exchange s window is only displaying the configurations that are on Exchange 01 Select Exchanges x Check the exchange s to connect to Exchange 1 Exchange 01 Exchange 2 Exchange 02 Exchange 3 Exchange 03 Cancel E gt Configurations on Exchange s area is displaying all the Configurations on Exchange 01 File Manager Configuration Files cfg Application Files app Project Configurations O 0 002 000d 0 002 001 O 0 002 001k O 0 002 002a test Import Export gt Copy gt Delete Checksum 31 27196518 Show Exchanges Now say we do not want to view the configurations on Exchange 3 and so we decide to exclude Exchange 03 To do this we will have to remove the tick mark from Exchange 03 in the
289. l the installation press the key anytime before you press the key Remove IMS To remove an IMS from a DCC or a DCE select the Remove IMS option This takes you to the Remove IMS screen Press the gt button to reach the first field that can be edited Scroll through the list by using the a key to display the parameters MCC1 MCC2 MIC1 and MIC2 for the DCC and each DCE Remove IMS Select DCC Continue Note that all the parameters for the DCC and each DCE appear here whether or not they have already been deleted Also even though some of these parameters may have already been deleted the program will not stop amp you from deleting them again Once you have located the parameter that you want to delete press the key The program will display the message Enter ACK Continue to ask for confirmation If you press the key then this IMS parameter is now deleted from the DCC or DCE that you have specified To cancel the installation press the key anytime before you press the key If an MCC card that was connected to an IMS is deleted while the IMS is connected to the DCC or DCE then the IMS will display a message saying Configuration not bound on its display screen Page 258 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 6 6 The Status Menu Selecting the Status menu brings up the Exchange Status window which allows you to choose between 6 options These options are Exchange Statu
290. l usually import a file when you are trying to install an updated version of an application file As updated versions of the application files become available they are usually e mailed to the DXL administrators or made available on our FTP site As an administrator you can then download the file and import it into your computer You can then load it onto the exchanges on the DXL and activate it so that it is running on the exchanges You can also import a configuration file that another administrator may have e mailed to you Although since you will probably be using your own configuration files that you have developed it is less likely that you will have to import a configuration file Remember that you do not have to be connected to the exchanges on the DXL if you want to import a configuration file or an application file The Import button works similarly for both the configuration files and the application files so it will be explained using the configuration files as an example When you import a configuration it can only be imported into the project that is currently active and open Application files are independent of the project that you are running and by importing an application file you are simply installing this file on your computer Note that you cannot import or create a configuration that has the same name as a previously activated configuration The exception to this is when you are trying to restore a previously activated conf
291. larm entry sets the maximum number of alarms that you can define in the Alarms tab This number can be set anywhere in the range from 1 to 99999 The Alarms tab operates in exactly the same way as the MENE x Alarms tab that was that was discussed with the Alarm Identification Connection Commands Alarms Contacts selection in Section 3 26 1 3 The only difference is that Status Outputs contact closures are not used to activate or deactivate the video switch but instead the DXL sends to the video switch through the serial port a command that informs the video switch the Alarm Number The Alarms tab now displays an Alarm Number instead of a Status Output Add Delete Properties Cancel IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 161 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL In the Alarms tab click on the Add button to define a new alarm x This brings up the Alarm Properties dialog window This dialog box alam Number fT has five entries Alarm Number a unique ID Number On Event the iii type of event that you want to trigger an alarm Off Event the type of On Event Call Request event that turns off the alarm Device 1 Station in this case and Dff Event Answer Acknowledge Stations 1 Station 1 Masher any r coa Devise 2 Master in this case are the device s that triggers the alarm If you try to use the same Alarm Number to define another alarm then a x pop up error message will appea
292. lasses will be displayed e A grey tick means that the conditions for having either a black tick or no tick have not been met e Clicking on no tick or a grey tick will make it black while clicking on a black tick will make it white All other ticks will be updated in order to preserve all the above conditions for every class and type If you are in Selected log class only mode clicking on a tick will affect the inclusion of messages for the selected class only Also note that e A black tick beside a class means that all messages of any type belonging to that class will be displayed e A black tick beside a type means that all messages of that type belonging to the selected class or one of its subclasses will be displayed e The absence of a tick beside a class means that no messages of any type belonging to that class will be displayed IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 215 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL e The absence of a tick beside a type means that no messages of that type belonging to the selected class will be displayed e A grey tick means that the conditions for having either a black tick or no tick have not been met e Clicking on no tick or a grey tick will make it black while clicking on a black tick will make it white All other ticks will be updated in order to preserve all the above conditions for every class and type Note that All is not is not really a class but the route of all classes you will never see
293. late Properties dialog boxes Rather than repeating similar descriptions only the Speaker Properties Template dialog box is described 3 6 1 Speaker Station Template 3 6 1 1 The Identification tab for the Speaker Station Template Properties dialog box is similar to the Identification tab for the Speaker Station Properties dialog box The main difference is that the template does not have entries for the port connection If you want the stations that are created from this template to be members of a Compound Station then you need to place a tick mark in the Compound Member checkbox Once stations have been created based on this template the Type entry will be dimmed and cannot be changed without first deleting all the stations derived from this template Speaker Station Template Properties Identification Station Template 1 Cell A101 Properties Identification Switches Tones Call Settings Levels ALA Filters Outputs Number ll Name Cell 4101 Info ICM 430 211 001 al F Compound Member 3 6 1 2 Speaker Station Template Properties Switches The Switches tab has default entries for two switches The function of these two switches is initially set to Unknown Select a switch and then click on the Properties button to bring up a pop up Switch Properties dialog box with two tabs Input and Settings A drop down menu allows you to specify the function of the switch A description of the switch functio
294. lays the serial number for DCE 1 DCE 2 DCE 3 and DCE 4 The display will say NOT VALID next to a DCE that 1s installed but has no serial number SN entered The display will be a blank if the DCE s are not currently installed in the system APP displays the application version that is currently active and operating on the DXL box IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 267 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 6 7 The Faults Menu Press the key on the DXL box to select this menu The purpose of this menu is to describe various faults that are present in the system The Exchange Faults window Remote Front Panel 10 0 0 96 he foll ti xchange Faults contains the following options Ee lt ry 1 Unacknowledged e 2 Faults 2 DCC Faults hy gots v 3 DCE 1 Faults 4 DCE 2 Faults Install Fault 5 DCE 3 Faults 6 DCE 4 Faults 6 7 1 The Unacknowledged Faults Option Note that the Unacknowledged Faults option lists all the faults irrespective of Unacknowledged Faults whether they are on the DCC or the DCE If you want to view faults that are ke plans specific to the DCC or one of the four DCEs then you will have to select that 2001 Stn01 particular option SCC1 Stn02 Trnk Note that when a fault occurs it is displayed in both the Unacknowledged Faults window as well as in the DCC Faults window or the DCE Faults window depending on where the fault has occurred Also note that a faul
295. le it may become non responsive until the transfer 1s complete Therefore it 1s possible that the File Manager will fail to talk to an exchange even though it is both online and connected The File Manager handles this situation by using a retry dialog box which is similar to the dialog box that is used for reconnection 4 2 13 Delete Click on the Dee button to delete a configuration from the project in the Installed Configurations window or to delete a configuration on an exchange in the Configurations on Exchange s window Remember that if you want to delete a configuration from the Configurations on Exchange s area you will have to be connected to the exchanges on the DXL To do this click on the configuration or application that you want to delete and then click on the Delete button x You will receive a confirmation message before the file is deleted Click Are you sure you wish to delete the selected file s on Delete to delete the file or click on Cancel to cancel the operation 2 Remember that you cannot delete the default application or the E ancel A P ea currently active configuration file application file 4 2 14 Disconnect You will be able to see the Disconnect button only after you click on the Connect button and after the computer has successfully opened a connection to the exchanges on the DXL Click on the Disconnect button to close the connection to the selected exchanges When you d
296. le field which is the hour The time is in the format HH MM and the cursor will be blinking alternately with the wymbol Note that the program will not allow you to enter an invalid digit Hence 1f the time 1s set to AM and the second digit in the Hour field is 8 1 e H8 32 AM then the program will not allow you to enter a number into the first entry for the Hour field because this would be invalid You can enter a digit into each entry by using the gt key to move forward between entries and using the 4 key to move backwards between entries The entries can be changed by using the a key to scroll up and the v key to scroll down Press the key to save the changes and return the cursor to the start of the Time line or press the key to ignore the changes made and return to the start of the line You can edit the system date in a similar fashion An example editing session is provided below with blinking characters that are used to illustrate the position of the cursor In this example the time is being changed from 2 32 PM to 12 38 AM Page 254 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software e Firstly position the cursor on the line that you want to modify In this example the system time is to be updated so the cursor is placed on the Time line e Next press the gt key to select the first field for editing the tens of hours in this case The cursor alternates with a blank in the tens of hours po
297. lect the Properties button to bring up the Audio Trunk Properties window which has 2 tabs Identification and Exchanges 3 4 1 1 Audio Trunk Properties Identification Select the type of Digital audio trunk that is being used AA x Identification Exchanges from the Type pull down menu Copper or Fiber optic Once you have entered the name of the Audio Trunk it will appear in the header of the Audio Trunk Properties o C window Mt o zal Type Fier y Cancel Page 46 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software 3 4 1 2 Audio Trunk Properties Exchanges The Exchanges tab lists all the exchanges in the digital AAA Identification Exchanges audio loop Each exchange is listed in the Exchanges area with its ID number and Name If you have not added any Exchanges MicroComm DXL Number Name Add exchanges to the audio trunk this window will be empty Click on the Add button to bring up the Select Exchanges window This window lists all the exchanges in the system Click on the exchange that you want to include in the audio trunk and then click on the OK button to make the selection Click on Cancel to cancel the operation You can make more than one selection at a time from this list Exchanges that have been defined with audio trunk ports that do not match the audio trunk type will NOT be displayed here The exchanges that you have selected appear in the xj Identification Exchanges
298. led Status Outputs down to end SCC1 Outputs 4 Status Inputs 5 Status Outputs 6 SCC1 Outputs scC2 Outputs Temperatures 7 SCC2 Outputs Error Counters 8 Temperatures 9 Error Counters Note that these options will remain the same for the DCE 1 DCE 2 DCE 3 and DCE 4 options Page 266 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 6 6 3 The DCE 2 Status Option The options for this section are similar to the options under the DCE 1 Status Option so please refer to the DCE 1 Status Option in Section 6 6 2 for a description of these options 6 6 4 The DCE 3 Status Option The options for this section are similar to the options under the DCE 1 Status Option so please refer to the DCE 1 Status Option in Section 6 6 2 for a description of these options 6 6 5 The DCE 4 Status Option The options for this section are similar to the options under the DCE 1 Status Option so please refer to the DCE 1 Status Option in Section 6 6 2 for a description of these options 6 6 6 The Configuration Option Select this option by placing the cursor at the start of the line and then press the Configuration Status CFG DXL Manuals R3 CF key CFG displays the name and version number of the current Configuration that is lapp DYL 0 5 2B1 APP active and operating on the DCC This screen disp
299. left unchecked then the permissions that have been defined in the Configuration will still be in effect Finally the user can configure the language used in the IMS 440 and IMS 640 master menus Currently English and Spanish Mexico are supported but other languages can be added as needed contact customer support 3 23 1 3 System Operation Clock The Clock tab lets you set the system time x in two different ways depending on TSM Dialing Master Operations Clock Logging General whether the DXL or Host Port is acting as f The system clock ts controlled by the DSL system the System Clock Master The clock can be set from any DSL control panel Time synchronization updates are sent to all connected hosts when the clock is set and periodically thereafter Update hosts every 23 minutes W Adjust for daylight saving time The system clock t synchronized to an external host s time The clock is set when time synchronization commands are received from the host system Host port More y Page 132 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Top Option Select this option if you want the DXL to act as the System Clock Master In this case the Host Port will receive a message from the DXL to update its time to the Update hosts every 1 minute v 1 minute 2 minutes 5 minutes 10 minutes 15 minutes 30 minutes 1 hour 2 hours 6 hours 12 hours 24 hours current time that is pr
300. lit LCD and three LED status indicators that are located on the front panel of the Digital Communication Controller DCC This document also provides a description of the LUI s operation when accessed remotely through a Telnet client Every DCC provides a Local User Interface LUD that 1s used to facilitate the installation and troubleshooting of an Exchange Through the LUI you can Adjust the LCD s contrast and backlight intensity Invoke self test routines on the DCC and any attached devices that provide a self test feature These test results are displayed on the front panel and any self test failures are added to the device s fault list Install new or replacement USB LonWorks and Ethernet devices such as DCEs Desktop Masters etc Set the DCC s static Ethernet IP address es and net mask Set the PPP Ethernet IP addresses View and set the system time and date View and acknowledge Faults that are local to the Exchange Individual lists are provided for All of the unacknowledged faults on the Exchange All Faults including those that have been acknowledged A separate list is provided for the DCC and for each DCE View the Status of all of the devices on an Exchange including installed firmware components When the user first starts up the DXL box the following screen is displayed Note that the first line may display a number of different strings depending on the condition in which the DXL is booted
301. ll Semmes A A A A A EAS 78 Di leds SANON Properties SV ELSA RA A ARA PA ARA RAR 78 lO Stanow PTO De Cees AMA oo 78 E O S PiE are isaac esas a T 79 SELES Station Properties Permissions pd oia ds 79 Sl Lo Station Properties Outputs a ii aEnesa 80 3 7 1 10 Station Properties CECI tt data 80 3 7 1 11 Station Properties 9 Lats Eo Str ls 81 3 7 1 12 Station Properties CCTV aa AA eens acid A A laura duaveatanede 81 SL Compound Stato daria E A 82 ST Compound Station Properties denni Canon x 4 aiicawteiaiions a T 82 3k22 Compound Staton Properties Members nd ao 82 3 1423 Compound Ston Properties Status Register sa dd 83 3 7 2 4 Compound Station Properties Permissions cccccccssssssssesseeeececceceeeeeeeeassaseeseeseeeeeeceeeeeseeaasaassseseeeeeeeeeeees 83 3 7 3 Talk DACKE Sto a a A A ATAA A T A EA T 84 Page iii IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 7 3 1 Configuring a TBE 310 using the Administrator sssrinin a aa aa e aada a 84 3455 2 AddmeaA TBE tome COn ido 86 375 5 Defining the Talkback Stations in the Contisurati n rai A E ae ew enn 86 370 Talkback Station Properties Dralo BOX reset db E i Eat 88 3 7 3 4 1 Talkback Station Properties Identification soooeeeeeessssssssssssseeteeerssssssssssssseccrreerssssssssssssscetereresssssse 88 JTA Talkback Station Properties WINE al 88 LELAS Talkback Station Properties TONES taco iaa 88 3 7 3 4 4 Talkback Station Properties Call Setti
302. llation program The following MicroComm DXL Welcome to the MicroComm DXL Administrator Setup window should automatically load A een nee once you have inserted the DXL Administrator CD ROM into the CD drive of your PC Note that Administrator rights are needed to install the program This wizard will guide you through the installation of MicroComm DXL Administrator 1 4 0 beta 4 MicroComm DXL Intercom Application 5 0 0b3 has been pre installed into this version of the DXL Administrator so that it is available to copy to your MicroComm DXL exchange s The first page displays the version of the software Click the It is recommended that you close all other applications before starting Setup This will make it possible to update relevant system files without having to reboot your computer Next gt button to continue with the installation Click Next to continue MicroComm DXL Administrator Setup 1 4 0b4 Next gt Cancel IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 3 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL The second page of the setup displays the licence tica EST E x agreement Read the agreement carefully and if you agree SSA ee EA e ee dministrator with the terms and conditions proceed with the installation acia by clicking the I Agree button Press Page Down to see the rest of the agreement NOTICE READ THIS AGREEMENT CAREFULLY HARDING INSTRUMENT CO LTD DOING BUSINESS AS HARDING INSTRUMENTS IS WILLING TO
303. logs will be retrieved from the exchange s when you click on the Download button The download status is displayed on the Status Bar You can click on the red STOP button to abort the transfer while it 1s in progress IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 223 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 5 2 5 4 Automatically Download Logs As Needed Select Automatically Download Logs as Needed from the Transfer Download Logs menu if you wish to download logs when they are needed to fill in the Log Viewer display You can turn this option on or off by toggling PREMIA A Ar through using the green circular arrow a Toggle Auto Download Automatically Stream Current Logs Mode in the Log Viewer window Stay At End Of Logs When streaming When you scroll to a section in the logs with missing not downloaded log entries or you scroll back past the oldest log or you scroll forward beyond the newest downloaded log then the program automatically downloads these logs in an effort to fill the gaps Usually a whole hour of the missing logs will be downloaded at a time However in the case that there are not enough logs to fill the screen the program will continue to download logs exceeding an hour until it has enough logs to fill the Log Viewer screen A similar operation is also carried out if you decide to jump to a certain date and time using the Go To Date Time option from the Search menu If the logs for the date and time that you specify have not been download
304. lose Previous Next Cancel IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 107 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL For VOIP recorders you have two options in the IP CallRecorder 9999 Properties Recorder Settings box Use SIP RDP or Use RTP Identification Call Settings Levels CCTW Monitors Filter For the Use SIP SDP option you can set up the DXL Volume Output Active Status Output a E g None system to dial up the call recorder when the recorder is E er OEREN 16dB 16dB turned on with a standard SIP Session Initiation Om IP Recorder Settings n n Use SIP SDP Protocol call which will ultimately send an RTP stream 7 Use RTP after the SIP initiation y RTP IP Address 192 168 112 RTP Port 500d To use this your call recorder device normally situated j po on another PC in your network running VOIP recording would have to have a SIP account settings as follows Previous Next Cancel Account User Name enter call recorder number Account password blank or enter call recorder number if blank is not an option Domain SIP server enter IP address of this exchange s DCC Authentication no Authentication name blank or enter call recorder number if blank is not an option Authentication password blank or enter call recorder number if blank is not an option With the Use RTP option the DXL simply sends the raw RTP data stream to the specified device Simply enter the IP
305. lso right click on a column in the Log Viewer window and select Column Settings to display the Column Format Settings dialog Column Format Settings K E x 22 DYL Log Yi tedto 1 exch E O x de es ia mato i ojx Data Column Status Bar Format File Edt Search Fiter Transfer Format z Type v Both bd Merg ee See Py 20 B Class iv LMU a Iv Column Settings ICRI VInfo Internal 20 2005 09 49 27 38 4M This exchange is acting Configuration I Iv as the dock master ds T z Debug Internal Intercom Tasks CLK January 20 2005 09 49 27 398 AM Sent periodic broadcast request to determine Date ga Long z clock master Time v AM PM ms y eee Exchange E v Both y Restore Defaults Cresi IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 233 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL sn mm tr ite FO aE Ta as Tal T S Janu j at 21 2005 Jos 19 Sii AS AM itt de ee pacar de E pa 10 as tie elo M mast ber Sent periodic broadcast request to determine clock master NU_SUCCESS deDebug finternalfintercom TasksiCLK January 21 2005 08 19 21 634M Info fIntemal Intercom Tasks CLE January 21 2005 08 22 21 56 AM This exchange is acting as the clock master Debug fintemal Intercom Tasks CLK January 21 2005 08 22 21 560 AM Sent periodic broadcast request to determine clock master NU_SUCCESS Debug fInternal Shalls January 21 2005 08 23 20 81 AM Listener on port 50009 accepting dient connection fr
306. me of the filter that you want to load and click Load Clicking Cancel will close the dialog and leave the filter settings unchanged Cancel If there are currently no filters of this type that are saved then the Load option is greyed out and you will not be able to select it Page 212 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Delete Option Select Delete in the Filter s submenu to delete any unwanted filter settings that have been saved This will bring up the Delete Filter window Select one or more filters in the list and then click on Delete You will be prompted to confirm the deletion before the filter settings are deleted So you can click on Delete to delete the selected filter or click on Cancel to cancel the operation Kf gt gt DXL Administrator E x AN Are you absolutely sure you wish to permanently delete the selected filter Cancel As Delete Class And Type Filter x Select one or more filters to delete Coros If there are currently no filters of this type that are saved then the Delete option is greyed out and you will not be able to select it The other options that appear in the Filter menu and in the submenus are discussed below 5 2 4 1 Show All Select Show All to display all the logs that are currently in the Log Viewer Shift Ctrl 4 Class amp Type Filter b window In effect this option disables any filters that might be curren
307. memory address that can be assigned is the address at location 6bn 690099 where the first digit from the address is always picked off as the bank IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 141 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL number Notice that the system automatically adds two zeroes before the two 9 s because the number of digits in the offset which is 0099 must to be 4 Omron UDP If the PLC Protocol Omron UDP is chosen then you xi have additional entries to make in the DXL Network Identification Connection Protocol Messages Monitor Masters Registers Status Registers Address and the PLC Network Address areas The C ASCII Messages j Md IP Protocol TCP Y Normal Register Addr and the Ext Register Address eo entries are similar to the same entries for the EE ene A A S Modbus TCP Op tion PLC Protocol MT Digit 5 3 Digit 5 El Maximum 65535 Maximum 65535 k Register Address Format You will have to fill in the Module entry for the PLC and i NN Normal Dn n offset DL Network ddress PLE Network Address gt the DXL and the Node number for the PLC Additionally e g address at 2000 D2000 Node 87 Node 0 a Extended Ebn b bank n offset you will need to enter the Network address for the DXL ena aoa Modde Jo and the PLC which is the address that is used when Al information is being sent between the DXL and the PLC Show Host Port Registers Cancel Since th
308. menu and configure the I P Address for the unit 2 3 4 Connect the Ethernet cable to the back of the box 5 Once loaded connect to the DCC with the administrator and download the correct firmware 6 Once loaded connect to the DCC with the administrator and download the correct configuration Note The reason for this is that the DCC running the default application has DHCP enabled if no I P address is explicitly assigned If the customer has a DHCP server on the same network the DCC may get an I P assigned to it from the server that should not be used If the lease time is long the I P leases may not expire in time causing the customers DHCP server to run out of addresses to assign If DHCP is not an issue either no server on the network or the leases expire quickly ensuring the server does not run out of addresses then Ethernet may also be connected at initial power up IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 273 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 7 Boot Mode The boot mode is entered by holding down the Boot Mode button while powering up the DXL box In this mode you will be able to make selections such as choosing which Applications to run clearing IP addresses clearing memory and running memory tests Note that in order to enter this mode you will have to hold down the Boot Mode button with a bent paper clip or a small screwdriver However you must not use a sharp instrument that is capable of damaging the but
309. ms ding Previous Next Cancel Configuration sounds are sounds that are used in the currently active configuration that you are working on Shared sounds are sounds that are available in the software and can be used by any application if desired If a sound from the Shared Sounds list is selected for use in the configuration then it will automatically be added to the list of Configuration Sounds To listen to either a Configuration Sound or Shared Sound select the appropriate choice Click on the Sound Name that you want to hear and then click on the Play button Click on the sound that you want to add to the Sound entry and then click on the OK button to add the sound to this entry Click on Cancel to exit the window Please refer to Section 3 1 2 5 for a detailed description of the Sounds Editor window Page 114 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 18 1 2 Tone Properties Settings The Settings tab has a slider to adjust the Output Level in xi 1 dB steps from 16 dB to 16 dB Identification Settings A tone consists of a sound clip that can be played siii q continuously played once repeated several times or 168 D 16d played periodically Eo If you select the Continuous checkbox then the sound clip Repeat Cont is played continuously without any delay between clips Delay msi 500 7 However when you select this option the other entries T Periodic Repeat Count and Periodic are dimme
310. n i Internal Y Debug So placing a tick mark beside a Class indicates that all the messages of E e o AS Y Other 3 R E g H IM Unknown that class and its subclasses will be displayed in the Log Viewer Hence aA Sistem Sitio this will also automatically assign a tick mark to its subclasses as well OK Cancel Page 214 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Now if you want to filter all the messages of a certain Type then placing a tick mark beside the message Type will allow the Log Viewer to display this message Type If message Types are turned on or off by checking or unchecking them for a particular class of message i e Host then these message Types will also be turned on or off for the subclasses i e Register Protocol and Text Protocol of that particular class of message However turning message Types on and off for a subclass of messages 1 e Register Protocol will only affect that particular subclass and the Class that it belongs to 5 In order to keep the changes made in a subclass independent of changes The checked log messages will be displayed in the log window made in a class and vice versa select the Selected Log Class only Status and control of Selected log class and all its subclasses option e Selected log class only OM Els showLoo te Hence selecting a particular Class of messages i e Host by placing a EA Al M Errors tick mark beside it does not
311. n If there are no devices queued the Install indicator is extinguished Note that if there is more than one DCE to be set up for installation then the orange light will appear on a single DCE at a time which will indicate the DCE that is to be installed next in the queue 6 9 1 3 The Fault Indicator This indicator is Red in colour and blinks when an unacknowledged fault of any type is present on that device The DCC fault indicator reports only faults that are present on the DCC it does not report DCE faults including faults that are detected on the audio trunk and the USB network Similarly a DCE fault indicator only reports faults that are local including a failure to connect to the USB to the DCE in question Note that due to hardware limitations the fault indicator will be on solid not blinking under some fault conditions 1 e when the FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array cannot be loaded due to a hardware fault or an invalid firmware image Page 272 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 6 10 Initial Setting of IP Addresses When a DCC is shipped it does not contain preloaded application firmware and thus does not contain an initial valid IP address The following procedure is recommended to insure the DCCs have the correct IP addresses Steps to bring a DCC to the operational state 1 Connect Power to the DCC do not make an Ethernet connection Turn the DCC on Using the front panel enter the setup
312. n the Settings tab MicroComm DXL Switch Properties Function MAIS Input Settings Port Station Port 1 Switch 2 Contact Type MNO Momentary Normally Open Y Cancel Switch Properties Function RAT IS Input Settings Master 21 Unit Control y Call Request Priority 3 6 1 3 Speaker Station Template Properties Tones The Tones tab for the Speaker Station Template Properties dialog box is identical to the Tones tab for the Speaker Station Properties dialog box The entries for the Tones tab are discussed in Section 3 7 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Station Template 21 Cell A101 Properties Identification Switches Tones Call Settings Levels ALA Filters Outputs Call Announce Monitor Announce Start 1 StaTone Start None y End 2 ReminderTone y End None y Reminder Noe o YS Reminder None y M Call Request Acknowledge Tone a Page 67 Administrator Software 3 6 1 4 Speaker Station Template Properties Call Settings The Call Settings tab for the Speaker Station Template Properties dialog box and the Speaker Station dialog box are identical and is discussed in Initial Volume Section 3 7 16dB jo 16dB Call Priority 0 so 100 Answer Call Requests Only MicroComm DXL Station Template 21 Cell A101 Properties x Identification Switches Tones Call Settings Levets ALA Filters Outputs
313. n a class are the same colour then its box will show a solid colour However if the entries in the Log Type Colour display are different then the class as well as its subclasses and the root will show a multicolored box A Status and control of e Selected log class and all its subclasses Selected log class only Log Class Color Log Type Colo L al BB Errors E O Host o Warnings Spx Log Viewer connected to 1 exchange E e oj xj O Register Protocol O Information File Edit Search Filter Transfer Format E E Protocol a Le E Debus O J cee E oe W Other E File System EET arene ar 20 LATA AM Shell on socket 80 finished E Unknown E File Transfer X Debug Internal Shells January 20 09 49 23 00 4M Shell on socket 78 finished LL Flash Y Info fInternal Intercom Tasks CLK January 20 09 49 27 38 4M This exchange is acting as the Er Intercom Tasks ae ee X Debug fInternal Intercom Tasks CLK January 20 09 49 27 38 4M Sent periodic broadcast request M Logging to determine clock master E Low level Capture NU_SUCCESS LL Memory Usage LU Info fInternal Intercom Tasks CLK January 20 09 52 27 31 4M This exchange is acting as the im Miss clock master E Shells X Debug fInternal Intercom Tasks CLK January 20 09 52 27 314M Sent periodic broadcast request to determine clock master LJ Task Communications NU_SUCCESS L Maintenance Info fInternal Intercom Tasks CLK January 20 09 55
314. n ene A You have successfully completed the steps needed to Wizard page of the Wizard is displayed You can use the create the following connection check box entry if you would like to create a shortcut icon o Oe PEE on your desktop If you are satisfied with all your entries click on the Finish button The connection will be saved in the Network Connections folder _ Add a shortcut to this connection to my desktop To create the connection and close this wizard click Finish lt a ron co The Connect DXL Serial dialog box will now appear You can type in 1 User name and a Password here we have used dxl as both the User name and the password You can use the checkbox 1f you want your PC to save this user name and password To complete the configuration for the serial port connection you need to click on the Properties button Password foes I Save this user name and password for the following users He only Anyone who uses this computer connect Conce Properties Help Page 284 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL The DXI Serial Properties dialog box has 5 tabs General Options 2x Security Networking and Advanced You will need to change the EEG E default settings in the Security tab and change the default configuration in the General tab To change the configuration click the Configure button on the General tab to bring
315. n the camera and the monitor that you want to connect together the Move Up and Move Down buttons will allow you to quickly and easily change the associations between cameras and monitors Video Monitor If you want to associate a video monitor with a master xl a gt Secondary Status Registers Permissions Paging Feedback Outputs station then click on Video Monitor in the Device Identification Switches Tones Cal Settings Levels CCTY Filters Control Kind entry and then click on the Add button This DN ceo Moric I brings up the Select Video Monitor window i E a The title End Command in this window displays the command that the DXL will send the video switch after the call to the station has been completed The title Default Camera displays the default camera that the monitor on the master will be connected to after Move Up Properties the call has been completed Cancel The entries for these titles are discussed next From the Select Video Monitor window click on the video camera that you xl want to associate with this Master from the Video Monitor drop down menu Video Monitor ANTEE Jo Nothine When Call Ends Do Nothing y Disconnect PA Show Default Camera DefeullCamera Cancel Page 56 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL For this video monitor you will also have to define what the video monitor must do after the call t
316. nWorks network which requires a LonWorks card in the PCI slot of the DCC Secondary Permissions Paging Feedback Outputs i Identification Switches Tones CallSettings Levels Filters Control The tabs associated with a IMS master is shown above If a system has CCTV or Host Ports the master station tabs will change to allow you to configure these devices TMM Master TMM master stations IMS 4XX or MAI 4XX series are used to interface with either desktop TMM or panel mount MAI master stations with external associated ae ei a EA display panels or touchscreens Both types are similar to Identification Switches Tones CallSettings Leves Fites Contra IMS master stations except that they do not have a display and therefore do not require the DCC to have a XLon PCI card i e they do not require a connection to a data exchange network The TMM and MAI masters use the same type of master ports as the IMS master stations TMM and MAI master stations are used with touch screens and host ports The tabs associated with a TMM master is shown above If a system has CCTV or Host Ports the master station tabs will change to allow you to configure these devices TSM Master A Telephone Set Master TSM 1S used with a standard Secondary Permissions Paging Feedback Outputs telephone set that is used as a master station The tabs gaai TE TE O E for configuring a TSM are shown on the right again additional
317. nal can be used to report the current state of these specific devices to the host and are read only registers from the host s point of view Note that the address registers defined here must not clash with previously defined addresses Device King Master j o tation Page Zone Status Registers to the Host Port put a tick mark in the check boxes that are next to the names of the devices By default all these boxes are left unchecked First select the device kind that you want to define Status Registers for from the Device Kind drop down menu This could be a Master a Station or a Page Zone To add a device with Device Kind Master When you select Master in the Device Kind you will have to put a tick mark next to each Master that you want to select Host Port 1 Door Control Properties x Identification Connection Protocol Messages Monitor Masters Registers Status Registers Status Message Mode Peer to peer f Polled Device Kind HAERE Each Master has two optional registers to indicate the device s that it is connected to The first register indicates the kind of device that the Master is connected to and the second register holds the ID number of that device These registers must be contiguous and are defined in the Communication Status entry Central Control Ot Central Control 1 O12 Central Control 2 0O13 CentralControl Sup 0O14 Maintenance Office O 20
318. ncel Clicking on the Add button for Minutes of the Hour brings up a dialog box that xl allows you to select a single minute or a range of minutes When you select range Singe gt of minutes you also can select the time interval between events Once you click on m OK you can click on Add again to select another single minute or range of e ENE E minutes Cancel Example The following example shows a Monday Wednesday Friday class schedule with a buzzer sounded on the hour and 50 minutes later from 8 AM until 4 PM from January 4 2006 until April 12 2006 with no classes for the week of February 19 to 25 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 121 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL The following two Date Time Specifier dialog boxes will satisfy these requirements On the left is the Include times and on the right is the Exclude times Date Time Specifier Date Time Specifier minute 50 minute 50 Returning to the Date Time Specifier dialog box you AS will see the following display Note the summary description of the scheduled event On Mon Wed and Fri of Jan to Apr At D and 50 minutes past 8 to 16 o clock On Mon Wed and Fri days 1 to 3 of Jan At 0 and 50 minutes past 8 to 16 o clock On Mon Wed and Fri days 13 to 31 of Apr At 0 and 50 minutes past 8 to 16 o clock On Mon Wed and Fri days 19 to 25 of Feb At 0 and 50 minutes past 8 to 16 o clock 12 120004 at 00 00
319. nd make it easier for maintenance or administration personnel to understand the system setup and operation Click on the button to fill in additional information in a small text editor window a Cancel Fill in the IP address for the exchange into the IP Address entry Each exchange requires a unique IP address An IP address 1s an identifier for a computer or device on a TCP IP network Networks using the TCP IP protocol route messages based on the IP address of the destination The format of an IP address 1s a 32 bit numeric address written as four numbers separated by periods Each number can be zero to 255 For example 1 160 10 240 could be an IP address Within an isolated network you can assign IP addresses at random as long as each one 1s unique The four numbers in an IP address are used in different ways to identify a particular network and a host on that network The Phone Number entry is used to specify the dial up number for the modem You can enter the telephone number in various formats 1 e 1 780 462 7100 17804627100 Page 34 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 3 1 2 Exchanges Settings The Settings tab is shown on the right x Identification Settings The Audio Trunk pull down menu displays all the audio trunks that have been defined Select the appropriate audio Audio Trunk Port Type Fiber Audio Trunk trunk once the audio trunks have been created n Audio Tru
320. ndary Master drop down menu 3 5 1 5 Master Properties CCTV The CCTV tab that appears in the Stations section of Configure operates in exactly the same way as the CCTV tab for master stations and will not be discussed in detail in the stations section The CCTV tab allows you to control the video connections between monitors and cameras associated with masters and stations when a call is made from a master to a station A similar tab provides the same setting for a station The CCTV camera tab lets you associate a group of video cameras and video monitors with a master station When a call is made these lists are used to determine which commands to send to the video switch This causes the video switch to connect the appropriate video cameras and video monitors for the call In addition to an audio connection this allows you also set up a visual connection to see whom you are talking to Note that you will need to first define the video switches in the Video Switches section of Configure Only after you have defined a video switch will the CCTV tab appear in the Master Properties dialog box Remember that the video switch must be set with the Camera Monitors Commands option selected this choice is made in Page 54 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL the Commands tab of the Video Switches section in Configure After this you will have to define the video cameras and video monitors that are using these switches in the Vid
321. ne in the Configure entry of the Configuration Editor allows us to add page zones to the configuration Clicking the Add button brings up a window with 5 tabs Identification Tones Call Settings Members and Permissions The Identification tab requires that you assign an ID Number and Name for the page zone In this case the page zone is named Games Room 3 14 1 2 Page Zone Properties Tones The Tones tab has entries for defining Start End and periodic Reminder tones when a page announcement is being made Configuration tones are created using the Tones entry in the Configure box of the Configuration Editor 3 14 1 3 Page Zone Properties Call Settings The Call Settings tab has entries for Volume Call Priority and Program Group Program Group is a set of music sources that can be transmitted over the page zone An operator at a master station with permission for program control can select one of the music sources when the DXL is operating Page 104 MicroComm DXL Page Zone 20 Games Room Properties x Identification Tones Call Settings Members Permissions Number 2 Name E ames Room Info E Page Zone 20 Games Room Properties x Identification Tones Call Settings Members Permissions Call Announce Start MRE End None Reminder None v Cancel Page Zone 20 Games Room Properties x Identification Tones Call Settings Members Permissions
322. nfiguration DCEs that have not been installed in the system yet will appear with a N I not installed beside them When you have made a selection A press the button to return to the DCE Add Remove screen Remove DCE l FA To delete a DCE select the Remove DCE option by pressing the button when the cursor is at the start of this line This brings up the Remove Device elect gt DCE 1 window Select the gt button to reach the first field that can be edited Then use the a button to scroll between DCE 1 DCE 2 DCE 3 and DCE 4 which gives you the choice of the DCE that you want to remove While scrolling a N I beside the DCEs indicates that those DCEs are currently not installed Once the DCE that you want to delete appears on the window press the button to delete this DCE SN not Valid may appear on top of the window as you may not have entered the serial number SN for the DCE into the system yet However this has no bearing on the installation or deletion of the DCE The program will take you back to the DCE Add Remove screen 6 5 1 5 The IMS Add Remove Option Se Press the button to select this option This takes you to a screen that lets you install or remove an Intercom Master Station IMS Note that you will have to ras l Pie initially install an IMS so that the DXL recognizes it ee Install IMS To install an IMS select the Install IMS opti
323. nfigure starting from Audio Trunks and going up to Video Monitors have a similar window where you can add new entries delete existing entries and view edit the properties of existing entries Let us use the Stations section as an example 3 3 4 1 Properties Button To view the existing stations in the configuration select Stations in Configure Now set the View to hardware You will be able to see a list of all the exchanges in the tree pane Now say you want to view the stations that are defined for a particular exchange click on the exchange that you want and you will see a list of the existing stations in the list pane If this list is empty it means that no stations have been defined for this exchange In the figure below you will see all the stations that have been defined for the Exchange Housing 1 DXL Configuration Editor Configuration 1 Oj x File Edit Configure Stations y Lock Y View Hardware y Number Name Info Template Tye Pm S ein o TEE MADAD Ao 170 S Pans usi xi 430 211 i usi Ta Unit A Outer Entry ICM 430 211 001 None Speaker Station Housing 1 DI Housing 1 a 2004 Unit Outer Exit ICM 430 211 001 None Speaker Station Housing 1 DI H ousing lt 2005 Unit amp Inner Entry ICM 430 211 001 None Speaker Station Housing 1 DI E
324. nistration y Dec y 400 Series SCC 1 y 2 y J Single Exchange Only Cancel IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 45 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL When you click on the OK button the program will proceed to assign the highest number of stations that it can duplicate on the Administration exchange in the Number To Duplicate entry Notice how the program has changed this entry to 63 instead of 100 stations If you now click the OK button the program will duplicate 63 stations on Administration Exchange If you had not selected the Single Exchange Only option the program would have located the first 63 stations on Administration Exchange and would had continued to locate the remainder of the duplicated stations 37 stations on the next available exchange 3 4 Digital Audio Trunk A call connection between exchanges in a DXL system uses a digital audio trunk configured in a ring topology that usually includes all the DCCs i e all the exchanges in the system Twenty channels are available for audio connections and 6 channels are available for music distribution The ring can be either copper or fiber optic depending on the type of DCCs that have been ordered for the system In principle a system could consist of two or more isolated digital audio trunks with no audio paths between the isolated trunks 3 4 1 Audio Trunk Dialog Box Select Audio Trunks from Configure This will display a default audio trunk Select this trunk and then se
325. nk The Report Trouble Summary Alarms box uses a pull down menu to display all the master stations in the system From this menu select the master station that is to receive the alarms Since initially no master stations are described in the configuration you will have to return to the Exchange Properties window to specify this information after the master stations have been defined Report Trouble Summary Alarm To Master 10 Central Control EA E E A 11 Central Control 1 12 Central Control 2 13 Central Control Supr The Audio Trunk Port Type will display whether you have chosen fiber or copper transmission medium for the audio trunk connections This option is defined in the Audio Trunks option in Configure and cannot be changed in the Exchange Properties window Once all the exchanges are configured the View Containment entry appears as File Edit shown on the right Notice that the system name Grey Institution dxl now has an Configure MEA expansion contraction icon The exchanges themselves do not have an View Containment y expansion contraction icon since no subcomponents have yet been defined El Grey Institution dsl z Support Services z Housing Unit 1 a Housing Unit 2 z Special Handling Administration IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 35 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 3 2 Adding a DCC DCE DIO TBE or PZE to an Exchange If you select one of the exchanges for example Sup
326. nnection to exchanges from different modules is totally independent Connecting and disconnecting from exchanges through the Select Exchanges window in a module does not affect the communication status of exchanges in a different module Select Exchanges window edited inthe Select Exchanges window edited in the Select Exchanges window edited in File Manager DXL Log Viewer Diagnostics Check the eschangels to connect to Check the exchange s to connect to Select an exchange to connect to Exchange 1 Bottom Exchange 1 Bottom O Exchange 2 Top Exchange 2 Top Exchange 2 Top E Cancel Cancel E Cancel IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 173 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 4 1 2 3 Disconnect When you disconnect the main communication link you are closing the connection between the PC and ALL the exchanges on the DXL that the PC is connected to Remember that when you disconnect this affects the connection to the exchanges for all the three modules When you disconnect the Communication Status window disappears Remember that disconnecting the main link is entirely different from disconnecting the connection between the PC and one or more exchanges from the Select Exchanges window When the PC connects or disconnects from certain exchanges the main link is still intact but you are simply choosing to connect or not to connect to certain exchanges However when the main communication link is disconnected the PC can
327. nnnaninennnnss 224 5 2 5 5 Automatically Stream Current Logs ccccccccccccccccceceeasseseessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaassssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaaeasssesseeeeeeeess 224 5 2 5 6 Stay At End Of Logs When Streaming cccccccccccsssssssssssseeeecceceececseesaaeesssseeeeeececcessesssaaaaagagssseeseseeeess 225 5 2 6 A eee CE E e o o O 227 For A AA o ee ee ee 227 PL TPO 14 0 OPEP E ep o O ES O Sanaemasesotat da taausancassoatinassomeoneataaiates 228 a OL OES OPA e o e E E A E T E 229 Ioe Conna o o o 233 A o LA e e IP PUE Elo O e O E ER EME ER 236 L200 SHOWS So llo e OP0PoUNO U PXAPXP o tardnandeaednosconennesinaborenatonesnninabhienetanneenioabeanaes 236 5S2 Edit Menu Contine seccatid 237 A A O 237 Ll PRE eiS Ve COS biocidas 231 32 2 ce A e o 0 EEC 240 6 MieroComm DXL Local User Interface dada 241 6 1 TEV ge Jai Ti 070 E PEIO a UR A 241 6 1 1 Th Remote Pron Pano iras aio cas S 242 6 2 DISPONES EA Ds ani 242 6 2 1 ii AP A A E PU E 242 6 2 1 1 Keypad Display Organization di ii Teee isis 242 021 2 CuUESOrS and Y sua CCS arbitro 242 ES NN A A 243 6 2 1 4 Keypad Group 1 LD TD e BD cc coccion ono nana aan 244 CAA E el ECO O PE E e e E UR 244 6 2 1 5 Keypad Group 2 a n A v amp y A ands sc OEA EA E 245 e kE gt 0 6 2 1 6 Keypad Group 3 f amp oeste ons 248 6 3 VOM TE AEO EE E E O T E E E A A OEE E A E E 250 6 3 1 ra e O aei Pe e OA E 8 A E matennsnaaecines 250 031 1 Editing fromthe F
328. nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 167 4 1 2 Communication Links Setup and Status ooooooonnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnaninnnnnss 167 AZ Communications Link Setup nation cds 168 AZ LL CONAM aio coa 168 E Manual ENUY eira A a sate ene website crete a a G tte eateahssoaatanonearaaneamee a 169 AO Nes o A a AAA A II O II A 170 Aae IS A A esonsanlnenatahinedsesibactesventanes 171 AN 23 A AA A a Ta oe cua A To enue ese ee 174 4 1 2 4 Closing windows while connected to Exchanges cccccccccceccecceceeesseeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaassseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 174 A REG LCL AA A ae erry AO 175 4 2 1 Contiguration Files is iia 175 4 2 2 Application Fles App ralla detec liceos 176 4 2 3 EDO os faces A ta lane eae etna acec em caue E Ge teat desea setcane tatescanseelantustdsceeneet 177 4 2 4 OT 178 4 2 5 Ve A o A a A A A 178 AS COMMSCUON POD ICM testa oido rias Ji dedos 179 4 2 6 Select CM AMOS tte 179 4 2 7 SOW Ee Rie AIT atacantes 181 4 2 8 Retreat ias 182 4 2 9 O 182 4 2 9 1 Rules for copying Configuration Files and Application Files oooooooonnnnnccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 184 4 210 Activate Activatine a Contiguration File ica rabioso 184 4 2 11 Activate Activating an Application Fl a ici 185 O A RR LR O 186 AS DEE A O E CO II In A 186 Are DIS COMME a ton cados 186 ALD O 187 AMO CHECKSURE 187 Page vi IM DXL ADM 1 5 0
329. no longer connect to any of the exchanges on the DXL Disconnecting the connection between the PC and exchanges on the DXL is discussed with the Select Exchanges option however in this section we will discuss how you can disconnect the main communication link between the PC and the DXL 4 1 2 4 Closing windows while connected to Exchanges There are two possible cases that could take place when you close the File Manager window from the DXL Log Viewer window or the DXL Diagnostics and Maintenance window As an example let us say that you had established the original xi connection by clicking on the Connect button from the Log Viewer A ao If the computer is currently connected to the exchanges and since you 4 had established the connection to these exchange s from the Log i Leave Cancel Viewer itself the program will prompt you with a message as you try to shutdown the Log Viewer window However if the computer is currently connected to the exchanges but you had NOT established this connection from the Log Viewer window then the program will NOT prompt you with a message as you try to shutdown the Log Viewer window Still continuing with the example click on Disconnect if you want the close the DXL Log Viewer window and close the main communication link by disconnecting the computer from ALL the exchange s that it is connected to on the DXL When you do this remember that the PC will disconnect from ALL the exchanges in
330. nput 1 Y Supervised Status Input 2 JV Supervised Status Input 3 JV Supervised Status Input 4 SCC 1 400 Series y None SCC 2 1300 Series 400 Series 401 Series IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 PCC Options Y ALA Enhanced PCI Card XLon T CEPT Port Fiber Copper Fiber Modem MCC 21M5 id MCC Options Y ALA Enhanced PCI Card Lon y CEPT Port Fiber v V Supervised Status Input 1 JV Supervised Status Input 2 Iv Supervised Status Input 3 JV Supervised Status Input 4 SCC 1 400 Series y SCC 2 400 Series y Cancel DCC Properties x PCC Options Y ALA Enhanced PCI Card Lon y CEPT Port Fiber Modem W MCC 2 1M5 MCC Options V Supervised Status Input 1 Y Supervised Status Input 2 JV Supervised Status Input 3 Y Supervised Status Input 4 SCC 1 400 Series y SCC 2 1400 Series X 300 Series 400 Series 401 Series Modem W MCC 2 IMS y MecolNone coa JV Supervised Status Input 3 Y Supervised Status Input 4 SEG 400 Series y SCC 2 400 Series y Cancel Page 37 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 3 2 2 Adding a DCE Once a DCC has been added the configuration window will change to allow you to add DCEs DIOs TBEs or PZEs DXL Configuration Editor Configuration 2 File Edit Configure Hardware y Lock Y View Containment y Proper
331. ns in effect until the occurrence of the timeout that returns the display to the default screen e g until 5 minutes after the last key press If you enter an invalid password then the digits that you had entered are cleared and the cursor is returned to the original position 1 e the original Enter Password screen is reinstated You can cancel password entry at any 7 time by pressing the key In this case you will be returned to the previous screen with the cursor at the leftmost position Page 252 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 6 5 The Setup Menu 6 5 1 Introduction The setup menu has up to 6 different options that you can choose from These are 1 LCD Adjustment 2 System Time Date DCC Setu LCD Adjustment system Time Date 3 Ethernet IP Mask Ethernet IP Mask DCE Add Remove 4 DCE Add Remove ico 5 IMS Add Remove 6 ALA Activations Run istan Faun Note that the IMS Add Remove option will only be available if a LonWorks card has been installed on the DXL 6 5 1 1 The LCD Adjustment Option Ga j Press the when the cursor is on the LCD Adjustment line which will take oro SITO you into the LCD Adjustment screen To scroll between the 3 rows on this Backlight gt o000 i Ti t gt DISABLED screen place the cursor at the start of each line and then use the v and a oe 5 keys Contrast To edit the contrast move the cursor to the start of
332. ns is contained in the Stations section of this manual Function Music Select T Call Request Call Request Cancel Call End Hook Switch Microphone Mute Switch PTT bo Page Panic Alarm Tamper Alarm Tamper Alarm Cancel Station Template 21 Cell A101 Properties i q Identification Switches Tones Call Settings Levels ALA Filters Outputs Number Function 1 Music Select 2 Call Request M Switch Input Supervision IV Supervise Port IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 66 Administrator Software The Input tab in addition to selecting the Function of the switch allows you to use a pull down menu to specify one of the four possible types of switch contacts The default is set to MNO Momentary Normally Open which is usually used for DXL stations Contact Type MNO Momentary Normally Open MAO Momentary Normally Oper MAIC Momentary Normally Closed LNO Latched Normally Open LNC Latched Normally Closed The Settings tab allows you to specify the master station that will for example receive a call request if the switch function is set to Call Request as well as set the priority of the call request Call Request Tamper Alarm and Panic Alarm switch function are directed toward a master needs require a priority setting The Call End switch is associated with a station and a Page switch is associated with a page zone The remaining switches do not have an entry o
333. nstitution del is Groupa HousingBulding aa TETT Graup 2 FZE Groups fHousingBuilding PE 1 S5peaker Group 3 Properties les Delete IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 99 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 12 Status Outputs Status outputs are relay outputs that can be assigned one of xi the following functions panes Number 201 Function Audio Output Active eae keyampt SSS Audio Output Active CCTY Alarm Contact Info a Page one Selected Function Audio Output Active y For example the Page Zone Selected outputs are used to Exchange Card Port control relays that will be activated for some page zones Houses i fe ay an E but not for others You could configure a relay network Used By None that could perform the same functions as a PZE 110 but with the added complexity of having to wire it up In our example we have configured six status outputs two using the PZE and four using the status outputs of the DCC The two outputs associated with the PZE are used to key the mute control of the amplifiers and are assigned the Audio Output Active function The other 4 status outputs will be activated when a page zone is selected and are assigned the Page Zone Selected function The list pane of the Configuration Editor displays the status outputs oar DXL Configuration Editor Configuration E Oo xj File Edit Configure Status Outputs Lock a View Hardware z jr Ann W Greylnstitution de
334. ntification Switches Tones Call Settings Levels Filters Permissions Outputs Selectors deleted Because of this the Delete button is always Number Funcion Add a 1 Music Select dimmed when you click on switches that have been pre 2 Call Request Delete defined by the program The Number 2 switch push Properties button is physically located on the lower right hand side of a station front plate and is normally used as the Call Request switch If there is a second switch the push button associated with that switch Switch Number 1 is een located on the upper right hand side of the station front Noe plate and is commonly used as a music select switch Supervision J Supervise Port The following drawing displays the switch positions The Handset and Handset Speaker Stations have a EM x full duplex connection and require two audio channels Identification Switches Tones Call Settings Levels Filters Permissions Outputs gt where each channel can be multiplexed with contact Number Function ooo O A Unused closure information for up to two switches Therefore if Unused Delete Hook Switch Unused HE w N you define a station type as a Handset or a Handset Speaker type station the Switches tab will initially display three of the four switches in the Unused state For this type of station the second switch on the Y Supervise Port
335. nu of the MicroComm DXL Administrator This list can be used for quick reference and loading If the option is not ticked then the project names will not appear on the File menu Default project directory Ic Documents and Settings KeithS My Documents DXL Projects Browse J Display recent projects on the file menu Number of recent projects to display on the file menu 4 Restore Defaults i Cancel You can choose to display up to a maximum of 10 of the most recent projects on the File menu by selecting the appropriate number in the Number of recent projects to display on the file menu drop down menu Note that no changes will be made in this window until you click on the OK button to accept the changes Click on Cancel to retain the previous values and nullify any changes that you have made in this window Page 10 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Click on the Restore Defaults button if you want to set the setting in this tab back to their original default values When you click on this button a confirmation message appears Click on Restore if you want to restore the DXL Administrator X A gt Warning All the settings on this tab will be changed back to their original default values The change will not actually be saved until you press OK on the Preferences SA dialog Do you wish to proceed setting in this tab back to their original default values Note that the program
336. o enable an ALA on either an individual station or a station group ALAs are assigned to stations by selecting the ALA tab for the Station or Station Templates 3 25 1 Defining ALA Detectors You can define an ALA detector by selecting ALA Detectors in the Configure box of the DXL Configuration Editor and clicking on the Add button This brings up a dialog box with 3 tabs Identification Filter and Detector 3 25 1 1 ALA Detector Properties Identification The Information tab has entries for ID Number Name REISS xl Identification Filter Detector and Info Number i Name ALA Info El Cancel 3 25 1 2 ALA Detector Properties Filter There are six different types of filters that you can choose from None Low pass High pass Band pass Band stop and Advanced 3 25 1 2 1 Filter Parameters The following terms are used to describe the filter parameters e Pass band the pass band is a range of frequencies where a filter passes Frequency Response dB vs Hz signals with a predefined limit on the amount of attenuation the signal will experience 1 e an ideal pass band would pass signals with no attenuation but such a filter cannot be realized in practice In our discussions the pass band 1s considered to be the range of frequencies where the signals are attenuated less than 3dB The 3dB values are often referred to as the corner frequency In the figure to the right the pass band is from the left most p
337. o receive the call requests from the compound station Additionally all the station that are members of the compound station will be connected to this master station for the call so that audio from all the stations will be mixed and heard at the master and audio from the master will be heard at all the member stations Compound Music Select switch the button that is associated with this switch is usually used to begin or end the music that is played at the compound station and hence at all the members Stations to skip past sound tracks and to set the volume of the music to either high or low The Station Properties dialog box could have up to 12 tabs depending on whether a Host Port and CCTV has been defined Two of the most critical settings are defining the port connection in the Identification tab and defining which master will receive a call request in the Switches tab Other parameters that can be set include volume levels tones that can be generated when a call is made defining the Master that will receive hardware faults etc Page 72 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 7 1 1 Station Properties Identification The Identification tab is shown on the right Station 2008 Cell A101 Properties x Permissions Outputs Selectors Select the Template entry to specify the parameters of Identification Switches Tones CallSettings Leves ALA Fites the Station according to
338. o that is attenuated Notice that both the plots below are low pass filters with a corner frequency of 500 However the plot on the top has a filter order of 1 while the plot on the bottom has a filter order of 4 Note how the plot on top begins attenuating the signal well before the corner point is reached and in the stop band gradually attenuates the signal achieving an attenuation of 36 dB at approximately 3 400 Hz However the plot for the higher order filter shown at the bottom does not attenuate the signal much before reaching the corner frequency thus keeping the signal at an optimal constant amplitude and then sharply attenuates the remainder of the signal obtaining an attenuation of 36 dB at approximately 1 500 Hz ALA Detector 1 ALA Properties x Identification Filter Detector Type Lowpass Bandwidth fo v ctaye Corner 500 ind Hz Order i Frequency Response dB vs Hz Corner frequency 500 Hz Order 1 ALA Detector 1 ALA Properties x Identification Filter Detector Frequency Response dB vs Hz Type Lowpass bad 200 3 400 5 Bandwidth 0 v Octave corner irequency q y Corner 500 Hz order 4 Order E v 250 500 1 000 2 000 Cancel Page 152 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 25 1 2 2 Filter Descriptions The different types of filters that you can define in the Configuration are ALA Detector 1 ALA Prop
339. o the station has ended This choice is made from the When Call Ends drop down menu Note that there may not always be three options in this drop down menu since the choices that appear in this menu depend on the type of switch that you have defined The definition for the type of switch that is used is made in the Commands tab of the Video Switches section in Configure e If the video switch is defined as a Pelco switch then you will see three options in the When Call Ends drop down menu They are Do Nothing Disconnect and Show Default Camera e If the video switch is defined as a Vicon Ultrak or Bosch switch then you will see only two options in the When Call Ends drop down menu They are Do Nothing and Show Default Camera The three options are discussed below e If you select Do Nothing then the DXL will not send a command to the video switch and therefore the monitor will be left connected no action taken to the Station s camera at the end of the call e If you select Disconnect then the DXL will send a command to the video switch telling it to disconnect the video monitor from the video source after the call has ended e The Show Default Camera option means that the DXL will send a command to the video switch telling it to connect the video monitor to the default camera after the call has ended You will be able to make a selection for the default camera from the Default Camera drop down menu This menu will contain a l
340. o this you will not be able to view the configurations that are located on the exchanges on the DXL i e the Configurations on Exchange s area will be greyed out because the computer is no longer connected to the exchanges on the DXL Page 186 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 4 2 15 Size The Size entry indicates the size of an application file or a configuration file To display the size click on the name of the configuration in either the Installed Configurations area or the ae Configurations on Exchange s area The size of the file will appear in the Size entry 4 2 16 Checksum The Checksum is a value that is calculated from a group of data in a file and it is often passed ai E er Checksum along with the data when it is transferred Since an application or a configuration may have more a than one configuration defined with the same name which must be avoided in practise you can use the Checksum entry along with the name of the file in order to determine if the files displaying the same name are actually the same files This is because if a file that has the same name and the same checksum value then it is highly probable that it is the same file However if the files have the same name but a different checksum value then they are most likely not the same files To display the Checksum value in this area simply click on the name of the configuration in either the Installed Configurations area o
341. of the DXL to the Host The physical connection to the external network can be either an Ethernet network or an RS232 serial connection Host Ports entries appear in a Master Properties under the Control tab and the Status Register tab window Host Ports entries also appear in the Stations under the Status Registers tab and Page Zones under the Status Registers tab window You must remember that any changes made in the Host Port section will also affect these entries When you select Host Ports from the A Editor Conlara E 10 x Configure pull down menu of the DXL james Configuration Editor initially there will viewfa y be no entries in the List pane as you have es PPP tale a ai not yet defined any Host Ports Click on AA sd Add button in the main window to add a new host port If Host Ports have already been defined and you want to edit a Host Port then select the Host Port that you want to edit Properties Add Delete and click on the Properties button in the main window Select a host port and click on the Delete button in the main window to delete an existing host port 3 24 1 Host Port Dialog Box A Host Port Properties dialog box will initially have six tabs Identification Connection Protocol Messages Monitor and Masters and if you select a Register Based protocol two more tabs will be displayed Registers and Status Registers 3 24 1 1 Host Port Properties Ident
342. og box has several check boxes to specify how the TSM will operate with a host port call recording configuration permissions and IMS master menu lamnguage System Properties TSM Dialing Master Operations Clock Logging General TSM Operation W Ring TSM master with assigned Host Port when call requests are queued i Automatically connect TSM Master with assigned Host Port when the handset goes off hook and call requests are queued Call Recording Permissions Activate master call recorders during monitor connections We Disable all permission checks Disable Host command permission checks IMS Operation Master Menu Language Spanish Mexico E Cancel When TSMs are operated with a Host Port then several additional Configuration options configured on a per system basis become available When a TSM is controlled directly by the DXL and is not assigned with a Host Port it will always ring when a call request is queued However when the TSM is associated with a Host Port it will now receive commands IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 131 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL from the Host port instead of directly connecting to call requests that are queued Hence if you select the Ring TSM Master with Assigned Host Port when call requests are queued option then the TSM will always ring when call requests are queued and while the Host Port is sending messages to the TSM to tell it what to do with these call requests
343. oint on the graph up to 500 Hz corner frequency Note that OdB is the maximum value of the pass band signal co Mi ee Page 150 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software Stop band is the range of frequencies through which the filter attenuates or lessens the amplitude of the signal In our discussions we will consider stop band as the range of frequencies where the signals are attenuated more than 3dB In the figure to the right the stop band is all frequencies above500 Hz Corner frequency is the transition frequency between the pass band region and the stop band region or the point at which the frequency is attenuated by 3dB where the reponse curve intersects the 3dB line You can read the corner frequency from the graph by looking at the point where the 3dB line crosses the response curve and determining the frequency that corresponds to this point In the figure to the right the corner frequency is 500 Hz MicroComm DXL Frequency Response dB vs Hz 200 3 400 24 1 a EAERI 250 500 1 000 2 000 Frequency Response dB vs Hz 250 i 1 000 2 000 Corner Frequency 500 Hz Bandwidth band pass and band stop filters have two corner frequencies a lower corner frequency and an upper corner frequency both of which pass through the 3dB points In the case of a band pass filter the bandwidth is the range of frequencies that occur between the lower and upper corner frequencies
344. om 10 0 0 938 on socket 65 Class Anternal Intercom Tasks CLE LMU 0 164 Configuration two _ex Block 416 Date January 21 2005 status Bar Time 06 19 21 63 AM Configuration Exchange Exchange 1 Colin Additional information on objects in status har Note that you can get further information on the selected logs To do this hold the mouse pointer over the status bar The Log Viewer will briefly display all the information for the selected log entry Some of the information can be formatted in several ways and these formatting selections are made under the Format column in the Column Settings option These are e Type you have three options for displaying this data If you want the Type of log to appear with an icon then choose Icon If you want the Type of log to appear with a name then choose Name If you want the Type of log to appear with both an icon and a name then choose Both e Date you can choose for the Date of the logs to appear in a Long format eg January 13 2005 or ina Short format DD MM Y YYY However the Long and Short format depend on your PC s Regional and Language Options which are found in the Control Panel settings of your PC e Time you can choose for the Time of the logs to appear in 24 Hour mode 14 03 36 in AM PM mode 02 03 36 PM in 24 Hour ms mode 14 03 36 25 or in AM PM ms mode 02 03 36 25 PM High precision time is useful on a busy
345. om bells or a call request a e A 0 Lost Saura 2057 signal Messages are sound clips that are Delete gt gt gt only used when an operator requests that the Rename gt message be played for example an All Clear ames message after a fire alarm z port gt gt gt Messages stored as wav files can be Import Record Import Record imported as Shared Sounds or as Configuration Sounds The example shows wav files imported from Microsoft Office 2000 Selecting Import brings up a window that you can use to navigate to locate the desired wav file Please refer to Section 3 1 2 5 for a description of the Sounds and Messages Editor window 3 19 1 Message Dialog Box The Message Properties dialog box has two tabs Identification and Settings 3 19 1 1 Message Properties Identification The Sound entry lists the name of the sound file that x Identification Settings describes the message To select the sound file that you want to add to the Message click on the Select button Number i This brings up the Select Message Sound window where _ the available message sounds are listed You can select from either the list of messages in the Configuration Sound Select Sounds or the list of messages in the Shared Sounds Select Message Sound oj x f Configuration Sounds Shared Sounds Configuration Sounds Stored 11 4 sec Max 20 0 sec All Clear 5 210 Windows lt
346. om speakers Similarly 4 output lines must be paralleled to provide 20 watts of audio power for the Exercise Yard speakers while a single output line is adequate to drive the speakers in the entrance area The TBE will be wired as follows Entrance Speakers DE Exersice Yard Speakers A F F Po Games Room Speakers IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 85 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 7 3 2 Adding a TBE to the configuration A TBE 310 can be added to an exchange when the Configure entry of the DXL Configuration Editor is set to Hardware The window that appears after a DCC two DCEs and a TBE have been added to an exchange Housing Building 1 1s shown in the following picture The buttons at the bottom of the a Editor Configuration3 f a Oj xj t DXL Configuration Editor tano hawe SSC window allows you to Add DCE viewftomanmen ropa ae Add DIO Add PZE Add tree ino 2 TBE or Delete a selected item p AAA Once a fourth DCE and or TBE has ee been added the DCE and TBE ne selection buttons will dim and can i ee no longer be selected AdminBuilding l Function Parameter Exchange E de 200 HousingBuilding1 Delete 3 7 3 3 Defining the Talkback Stations in the Configuration The TBE 310 outputs are configured as a special type of station In our example we will configure the T
347. ommand registers for a Master The Assigned Masters list displays all the Master TESS ISS x Identification Connection Protocol Messages Monitor Masters Stations in the system Put a tick mark beside the Master Station that you want to associate with this host port Assigned Masters 4 j DAE Unchecking a Master Station will only change the Master O Central Control 7 3 A A 11 Central Control 1 Station Configuration if the Master Station has been R Ao assigned to this host port A ee O 20 Housing 1 Supr Initially all the Masters Stations are left unchecked by al ria default When you select a Master Station by placing a 1125 UniB Conta re O20 Housing 2 Supr checkmark beside it it causes this Host Port to be set as O31 Unit Control NE Tower the Host Port of the selected Master Station s This setting can also be seen in the Master Properties under the Control Tab window which is viewed by selecting the Masters section in Configure Cancel Page 140 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 24 1 7 Host Port Register Based Messages Protocol If you select an Ethernet connection and then Register Based Messages in the PLC Protocol Omron AIDE PLC Protocol tab you can select one of three transport protocols that are Modbus TCP presently supported Cimplicity TCP Orion IOP d e Modus TCP e Cimplicity TCP e Omron UDP If you select Serial connecti
348. on When you open the Operation tab you need to xi select the Function that this scheduled identiicatin Operation operation is to perform The dialog box will appear in two different formats depending on whether you are using it to control an ALA or Schedules a Program Four different ALA setting are ALA Of 5 ALA Om possible and you have the option of scheduling ALA Level 1 3 ALA levelt y f eve eve y different ALA setting for different times ats mo o ALA Level 4 None X Curent State ALA Off Next State ALA Level 1 Time Thu 2006 01 26 22 05 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 123 Administrator Software If you select a Program control function the dialog box will have two entries that allow you to specify the scheduled turn on and turn off times Page 124 MicroComm DXL Scheduled Operation 2 Program Control Properties Function Control Station Group Program ha 7 Pegennngo SS BPegennng0 Y IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 23 System Properties The System option lets you define system wide parameters that characterize how the system operates 3 23 1 System Properties Dialog Box The System Properties dialog box has fiver tabs TSM Dialling Master Operation Clock Logging and General 3 23 1 1 System Properties TSM Dialling A system that has Telephone Set Masters TSMs needs to have well defined calling sequences in order for an ope
349. on which takes you to the Install IMS screen Press the gt button to reach the first field that can be edited Scroll through the list by using the a key in order to display the parameters for MCC1 MCC2 MIC1 and MIC2 for the DCC and each DCE MCC is an acronym for Master Control Card which is used to define the Master Stations MIC is an acronym for Microphone and MIC1 and MIC2 refer to the audio channels that are associated with the IMS Install IMs Install IMs eelect gt DCC Hit service pin eelect DCC MCC 1 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 257 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Note that all the parameters for the DCC and each DCE appear over here whether or not they are already installed Also even though some of these parameters may already be installed the program will not stop you from installing them again Once you have scrolled to the appropriate parameter press the key The program will instruct you to Hit Service Pin You must now press the service pin located behind the IMS in order for the DCC or DCE to recognise the IMS Once you have pressed this pin the screen will display a message indicating whether an MCC1 MCC2 MIC1 or MIC2 has been added and whether it has been added to a DCC or a DCE The program will then ask you for confirmation by displaying the message Enter ACK Continue If you press the key to accept the confirmation then this IMS is added to the DCC or DCE that you have specified To cance
350. on Exercise Yard A settings are shown on the AE right The ports 4 to 7 of the TBE are connected in A R parallel to give an audio output of 20 watts CN Exercise Yard Template None OO Talkback Station om HousingBuiingt z TBE z EXE The station Entrance A settings are shown on the right EAS Only port 8 is used for this audio output ao Template None OO Talkback Station m HousingBuldingt TBE y IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 87 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 7 3 4 Talkback Station Properties Dialog Box The Talkback Station Properties dialog box has 10 tabs that are used to set parameters for the talkback stations These will be described briefly in this section 3 7 3 4 1 Talkback Station Properties Identification The Identification tab is used to specify an ID Number x Name and the ports that are connected in parallel Once Permissions Outputs Selectors i Identification Switches Tones Cal Settings Levels ALA Filters a Talkback Station is selected the Template entry is dimmed i e you cannot use a template to describe a Number Talkback Station If this station is to be used as a MN EE member of a compound station then the Compound i al Member check box needs to be checked ne A Type Talkback Station Y IC Compound Member Exchange Box First Port Last Port HousingBuilding1 y TBE y fi y 3 y Cancel 3
351. on Wizard Phone Number to Dial What is your ISP s phone number New Connection Wizard ion Availability You can make the new connection available to any user or only to yourself IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 289 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL The next page of the Wizard Internet Account Activity HR Internet Account Information asks you to type in a User name and Pas sword You will need an account name and password to sign in to your Intemet account Type an ISP account name and password then write down this information and store it in a safe place If you have forgotten an existing account name or password contact your ISP User name ax Password eee Confirm password eee J Use this account name and password when anyone connects to the Intemet from this computer V Make this the default Intemet connection At this point you have almost completed configuring the Madrsici uce modem connection and the Completed the New a the New Connection Connection Wizard page of the Wizard is displayed You J You have successfully completed the steps needed to can use the check box entry if you would like to create a create the following connection O Make this the default connection Share with all users of this computer Use the same user name password for everyone shortcut icon on your desktop If you are satisfied with all your entries click on the Finish button The connection w
352. on the DXL Administrator 1 5 Desktop Shortcut or click on the DXL exe located in the location you specified as the Start Menu Folder in the setup If you have selected the Quick Launch Shortcut then you will have an icon on the task bar that will allow you to start up the program Note that starting with version 1 4 the DXL Administrator supports running as a standard user under Vista and Windows 7 so no UAC prompt should appear Note that Administrator rights are still needed with Windows XP and when using dial up modems For XP use an administrator account For Vista Windows 7 right click the application shortcut and select Run as administrator When the program opens the MicroComm DXL Administrator window appears A flash screen that displays the version number of the software will also briefly appear The Configuration Logging and Diagnostics buttons will be dimmed and cannot be selected because a project is not open When a project is open this window will display the project name in the title bar and these three buttons will be enabled ZE MicroComm DXL Administrator loj ES File Edit Communications Help 2 4 MicroComm DXL Administrator Main Menus The MicroComm DXL Administrator window has four menus they are File Edit Communications and Help and they are described below 2 4 1 File Menu The MicroComm DXL Administrator File menu is used to manage projects A project is a planned implementation of a DXL system
353. on then only the Modbus TCP protocol is supported Modbus TCP and Cimplicity TCP The Modbus TCP and Cimplicity TCP from the user s xl Identification Connection Protocol Messages Monitor Masters Registers Status Registers point of view have identical protocols and only the Modbus TCP protocol is discussed If you choose C ASCII Messages Modus TCP with the pull down menu for the PLC A Ui Protocol entry you will need to enter 5 other parameters oa O The first Normal Register Addr entry requires you to PLEProtocot ModusrtcP ow Pfs Ad Dist fs I g ee gt Maximum 65535 Maximum 65535 enter the number of decimal digits required to identify the Fegistes Address Format es ma 1 Normal 4n n offset PLE Network Address gt offset address of the registers The second entry ra N Nowe Maximum sets the maximum number of contiguous Extended 6bn b bank n offset e g bank 1 at 1000 611000 register addresses that are available The Extended Register Address entries require that the same two parameters must be specified When you assign register addresses the Configuration Editor will use this information to check if you have made valid entries The PLC Network Address must correspond to the PLC Network Address assigned to the Modbus PLC Show Host Port Registers Cancel The Normal Register Addr refers to normal memory that may reside on either the DXL or the externa
354. one y Bandwidth 0 E Octave Eomer fo Hz Order fo 3 6 1 8 Speaker Station Template Properties Outputs The Outputs tab for the Speaker Station Template xl Properties dialo g box and the Speaker Stati on Identification Switches Tones Call Settings Levels ALA Filters Outputs Properties dialog box are identical and is discussed in Number Function Add Section 3 7 Delete Properties Cancel IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 69 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 7 Stations The MicroComm DXL system supports several types of intercom Stations e Speaker Station 400 Series e Handset Station 400 Series e Handset Speaker Station 400 Series e Compound Station e LED Station 401 Series e Privacy Station 401 Series e Generic Station 300 Series e Talkback Station e IP Station ICE or PTA 600 Series The DXL Configuration Editor has slightly different Station Properties dialog boxes for each type of station The dialog boxes for the Speaker Station Handset Station Handset Speaker Station LED Station Privacy Station Generic Station IP Station and Talkback Stations are similar and are discussed together The Compound Station dialog box is significantly different and is discussed separately 3 7 1 Intercom Stations All intercom stations except Talkback and IP Stations are connected to a DXL system via ports on the SCC cards contained in the DCCs or DCEs There are 3 types of SC
355. ons Lo Phone and Modem Options Power Options Y Printers and Faxes A Regional and Language Options y Scanners and Cameras i Scheduled Tasks Security Center Dsoundmax Address a Control Panel gt Go Name 3 3 Adjust your comput Installs and trouble Install or remove pr Configure administr Calibrate monitor fo Adobe Version Cue Adds removes and Adds removes and Set up Windows to Set the date time Change the appear Customize the displ Add change and Add remove and C Configure your Inte Java Plug in Control Customize your key Microsoft Outlook P Customize your mo Connects to other c Configure your tele Configure eneray s Shows installed prin Customize settings Add remove and c Schedule computer View your current s Control Panel for So ioixi File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help a Q Bak P Search Folders 15 X 19 m Address e Network Connections gt Go LAN or High Speed Internet Local Area Connection Wizard s New Connection Wizard LAN or High Speed Inter VIA Rhine II Fast Ethern Page 281 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL The New Connection Wizard opens with a page entitled did Welcome to the New Connection Wizard After reading ee to the New Connection the information about what the Wizard does you can click T
356. oooO O OS Add a page is made to the talkback station The Selector Kind pull down menu offers the following choices Selector Kind Speaker Line Groups 7 one Select Outputs Speaker Line Groups Cancel The list on the selectors tab will display the selectors of the currently selected kind that are associated with the talkback station and only selectors of that kind can be added to the station Selector Kind Speaker Line Groups ag Page 92 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 8 Station Groups A Station Group is a group of Stations that can be controlled with a single command For example all the cells in a housing unit may have music available at certain times A group that includes all the Stations in the housing unit allows the operator to turn on or turn off the programming to all cells simultaneously Similarly ALAs Audio Level Alarms can be turned on off to a group of Stations by sending the appropriate command to the Station group 3 8 1 Station Group Dialog Box In order to make the operation of a DXL system easier an operator must be able to control stations as a group rather than each station individually An example would be to turn on and off the program sources for a block of cells or to turn on and off monitoring of a group of cells A Station group dialog box has three tabs Identification and Members and Permissions 3 8 1 1 Station Groups Properties Identifi
357. ooononoccnnncnnnnnonnnnnnonononononnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 62 3 5 4 2 Paging Microphone Master Properties Call Settings oooooonnnnncnncnnnnoncnnnnnononnnonnnnnnnnnccnnnonononnonnnnnnninnnnnnnss 63 RNI Master GTO Susa es ios 63 IIE Master Group Master Properties Members ur clado 64 IO DALON MPIO ee Rr N T A A T EN 65 3 6 1 Speaker Stadon Lempa do dde 66 3 0 1 1 Speaker Station Template Properties dent COM ir iS a A 66 3 6 1 2 Speaker Station Template Properties Switches c scsesssseeeeceecceeeeecaaassssessseeesecceceeeeeeseasaaasasssseeeeeeeeess 66 SOL Speaker Station Template Properties LONAS R A A 67 3 6 1 4 Speaker Station Template Properties Call Settings ooooooonnnncnnnnnnnnnnnononononnnononncnncnncnnnnonononnnnnonnnninnnnnnnss 68 IOS Speaker Statiom Template Properties Levene da 68 3 6 1 6 Speaker Station Template Properties ALA cc cccssssssssssseeeeecccccccesseacceensssseeeeeececcceeesssssaeeeggssseeeeeeeeees 68 JONE Speaker Station Template Properties Pilters ii ii a warn ne Rae 69 3 6 1 8 Speaker Station Template Properties O sesseur na E E S 69 D O q E POP on R O 70 del MEC ONES LAG ONS A A A A ES 70 Stall Staton Properties Identiicaon cdi 73 EZ Station Properties SWitChess sudo dados 73 IEZI Usms a pres deine ds Wicho do ceci 19 IN MOS AMES WIEN a a a 76 Slds Station Properties TORES A A lao eee 77 See Stato Properties Ca
358. or a broadband account you wont need a phone C Use the CD got from an ISP The next page of the Wizard the Interconnect eAiukos Connection asks you how you want to connect to the qn BA Internet Select the Connect using dial up modem option Connect usi dial up modem then click on Next gt button EPR E AA C Connect using a broadband connection that requires a user name and password This is a high speed connection using either a DSL or cable modem Your ISP may refer to this type of connection as PPPoE C Connect using a broadband connection that is always on This is a high speed connection using either a cable modem DSL or LAN connection lt is always active and doesnt require you to sign in Page 288 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 MicroComm DXL The next page of the Wizard the Connection Name asks you to give your PC modem connection a name Type in a suitable name we have used DXL Modem followed by clicking the Next gt button The next page of the Wizard asks you to type in the phone number of the modem This is not required at this stage since we are not going through telephone network Click the Next gt button The next page of the Wizard titled Connection Availability asks you who should be able to use the connection you can select Anyone s use or My use only New Connection Wizard Connection Name What is the name of the service that provides your Intemet connection New Connecti
359. ost Port 1 Door Control Properties 3 x Identification Connection Protocol Messages Monitor Masters Registers Status Registers Register Blocks j Status Message Mode DXL Address PLC Address Entries Length Peer to peer Handshake 401 00 El C Polled Command SES EN Sequential registers EN Status X 630300 pa 7 Equal queue sizes Alarm Queue fssonio 5 lt fro DXL Administrator xj 690930 5 a past i m fo i y The Command address block is out of range Disabled Queue 690940 5 4 10 NOS J Show Host Port Registers If you specify an address block that is conflicting with another address block then you will get an error message and the conflicting parameters will show up in red when you click on the Show Host Port Registries button All valid address locations will appear in black DXL Administrator E i There are conflicts in your register assignments Host Port 1 Door Control Properties x Identification Connection Protocol Messages Monitor Masters Registers Status Registers Register Blocks Status Message Mode DXL Address PLC Address Entries Length Peer to peer Handshake 40100 my Polled Command jaar oq N B Sequential registers Status fao 06 E 4 Equal queue sizes faon 5 afio Alarm Queue x A Host Port 1 Door Control Registers e xj Ack d Queue 401 21 5 M0 Disabled Queus TENN mi 0 Conflict Start End Length Re
360. ot including a parity bit in a transmitted word When you use even or odd parity the system calculates the number of data 1 bits in each word and then adds a single bit at the end of the data bits to make the total number of number of data plus parity 1 bits sent either an odd or even number e Stop Bits The Stop Bits are used to signal the end of communication for a single packet of information Choose the number of bits 1 or 2 that you want to use from the Stop Bits drop down menu e Flow Control Serial Port 1 When you select Serial Port 1 the Flow Control drop down menu has two options None and Xon X off Xoff is a character that is sent by the receiver to temporarily stop the transmission during communication Xon is sent by the receiver when it is ready for more data None is used if you do not want a flow controller In this case you cannot temporarily stop the transmission and the receiver has to be able to keep up with the transmission rate Serial Port 2 Note that if you select Serial Port 2 the Flow Control drop down menu has three options None Xon Xoff and Hardware You can use Hardware flow control if you want to use actual hardware lines to perform handshaking When a receiver is ready for data it asserts the RTS line indicating that it is ready to receive data This line is then interpreted by the sender at the CTS input which tells the sender that it is clear to send data to the receiver Page 160 I
361. ote that the Select Exchanges window is slightly different for the Diagnostics module This is because when you are in the Diagnostic Select Exchanges x Select an exchange to connect to module the PC can only connect to one exchange at a time Therefore instead of the tick marks beside the Exchanges you will simply have to click on the exchange that you want to connect to Exchange 2 Top From the figure on the right you can see that both Exchange 1 and Exchange 2 are displayed in black indicating that it is possible for the PC to make a connection to either exchange Just click on the exchange that you want the PC to connect to and then click on the OK button Cancel Remember that the Select Exchanges window for a module operates independently of the Select Exchanges window in the other modules Therefore the exchanges that you select in the Select Exchanges window of the File Manager DXL Configuration Editor could be different from the exchanges that you select in the Select Exchanges window of the DXL Log Viewer As an example the three Select Exchanges windows shown below have all been opened during the same connection session In the first window the PC is connected to Exchange 1 through the File Manager window In the second window the PC is connected to both exchanges through the Log Viewer window In the third figure the PC could be connected to either exchange through the Diagnostics module Therefore the co
362. ow Table Faults that apply only to DCCs 8 EthnXXXXxXx Ethernet failure X denotes the corresponding Ethernet number 6 7 3 The DCE 1 Faults Option The faults that are displayed in this window are specific to DCE 1 This window only displays the status of the faults and therefore faults cannot be acknowledged in this window Please see the section on the Unacknowledged Faults window for a description of the characters that appear in the fault window A table describing the faults that may appear in both the DCC and the DCEs is displayed below Table Faults that apply to DCCs and DCEs Fault Description Fans not running properly SCCI Stn XX SCC2 Stn XX MCC Spkr X MCC Mier X X denotes a number that corresponds to the Station Speaker or Microphone number Page 270 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 6 7 4 The DCE 2 Faults Option The faults that are displayed in this window are specific to DCE 2 This window only displays the status of the faults and therefore faults cannot be acknowledged in this window Please see the section on the Unacknowledged Faults window for a description of characters that appear in the fault window 6 7 5 The DCE 3 Faults Option The faults that are displayed in this window are specific to DCE 3 This window only displays the status of the faults and therefore faults cannot be acknowledged
363. owever the MicroComm DXL telephone calling sequences can be customized for a particular facility in order to create a more efficient operation The parameters that define how the telephone Masters will operate is set in the System selection of the Configure entry 3 5 3 1 TSM Master Properties Switches The Switches Tab lets you assign switches to the TSM Master Normally the off hook condition is the only switch action associated with a telephone and this does not require any settings Select the Add button to bring up a dialog box that lets you assign switches to the TMS Master For example you could specify a switch on the TSM that acts as a PTT switch for page announcements 3 5 3 2 TSM Master Properties Call Settings Select the Connect to caller ID option to connect to the ES Secondary Status Registers Permissions Paging Feedback Outputs device that is shown in the caller ID MESAS sent Identification Switches Tones Call Settings Levels CCTV Filters Control between the first and second rings This provides a Initial Volume connection that is consistent with the phone s caller ID display even if call requests from higher priority devices CI tots eB Call Recorder are received after the caller ID transmission Select the None El Connect to highest priority device option to connect to pa Page Contra 8 P y P E C VOX PT f On the device that has the highest priority call req
364. own menu Note that you can associate the same video switch with more than one video camera Also note that you will not see any video switches in this menu if they have not been previously defined Once you have defined the video switch that you PRA NNNN 3a want to use with this video camera you will have Identification to enter two more values Enter the number for Number 1 the input video camera that you want to use in the Input Camera entry Enter the PTZ preset Name Camera 1 values that you want to use with this video h SS A camera into the PTZ Preset entry A i fi ideo 1 Note that the two values that you enter will need eal to fall within the same range as the numbers that Fanaa you had entered for the Max Camera Input and PTZ Preset 0 the Max PTZ Preset for this video switch in the Camera Monitor Commands tab of the Video Switch Properties window E Cancel If the numbers do not fall within this range then you will see an error message for out of range PTZ and input camera values DXL Administrator DXL Administrator i The camera input value must be between 1 and 9999 Page 164 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 28 Video Monitors To define a Video Monitor click on the Video Monitors section in Configure drop down menu in the DXL Configuration Editor The Video Monitors Properties dialog window with a single tab Identification will be displayed Click
365. ox drop down menu Select the SCC card that you want to locate the duplicated stations on from the Card drop down menu Exchange Select the exchange where you want to begin locating the duplicated stations Use the exchange drop down menu to make this selection In our example the program will begin locating the stations on Port 2 of the exchange Administration If you have the Single Exchange Only option checked then the program will NOT move to the next exchange if it does not have the space to duplicate the number of stations that you want on the selected exchange However if you do not select this option and the exchange runs out of ports then the program will proceed to locate the remainder of the duplicated stations on the ports of the next exchange This is usually not good practice and this option is always left checked by default To illustrate this if you decide to duplicate 100 Stations on Administration Exchange and you have selected the Single Exchange Only option then the program will display the following message as it will not have the number of ports needed to locate 100 Stations on Exchange 01 There are not enough available ports for all the duplicated devices The Number To Duplicate will now be 1 set to the highest possible value La Duplicating Station 5001 SW Tower Entry x Number To Duplicate 63 First Number 5002 First Name sw Tower EntryDl Exchange Box Card Port First Port Admi
366. pe This The checked log messages will be displayed in the log window a a AS brings up the Class amp Type Filter window You can select a class or a M status and control Of Selected log class and all its subclasses subclass by clicking on its name You can resize the window if needed C Selected log class only Show Log Class Show Log Type EY Al Errors ad He 1 Wamings When a class of message for example Host is ticked this means that egister rotoco permea pre A 7 A mA e pega Pa this class of message is being displayed in the Log Viewer Similarly nterna ebug H Maintenance 7 Other when a type of message for example Errors is ticked this means that M System Activity Unknown j i a System Startup the Log Viewer is displaying this type of message Cancel If you want to filter all the messages belonging to a certain class i e Sres The checked log messages will be displayed in the log window Host and want to mirror these same changes for its subclasses 1 e Register Protocol and Text Protocol then select Selected Log Class and all 1ts subclasses In this case any changes made for a class will affect all Status and control of e Selected log class and all its subclasses C Selected log class only Show Log Class Show Log Type the messages of that class and all its sub classes aA a gt Eror E Host j JN Protocol a baa MMi Text Protocol IV Informatio
367. pen circuit fault connection This is displayed in the table below Table Switch States S No State Status for Intercom Master AAA OoOo ide AA switch A line voltage 3 B switch B line voltage CO4 Ss short circuit fault connection O5 O open circuit fault connection 6 6 1 2 The MCC Audio Inputs Option MCC is an acronym for Master Control Card Each line in the MCC Audio Input screen displays the status of an individual Master Station and is broken into four fields The first field is fixed and displays whether the user is installing MCC1 or MCC2 The second field is the Master Station ID number that is assigned to MCCI and MCC2 in the Configuration If a string has not been assigned in the Configuration or no Configuration has been loaded then the string is displayed The third field is the text string or name assigned to the Master Station If the Master Station has not been assigned in the Configuration but has been loaded then the string is displayed If the Master Station is identified in the Configuration but has not had a text string assigned then blank characters are displayed The fourth field displays the status of the line s The different states for various types of Master Stations 1s displayed below Intercom Master Station For an IMS the first character displays the status of the speaker line S and the Dec MCC Status second character displays the statu
368. pes Each class or subclass has 6 message log types that are generated by the firmware on the DXL box These can be selected as Errors Warnings Information Debug Other and Unknown These message Types are displayed in the Type column on the Log Viewer window Errors inform the user of if there are any inaccuracies or faults in the system Warnings show up in the case when an inaccuracy may or may not be present Information informs the user of operations being carried out on the DXL box Debug is primarily used for the developers of the firmware in order to debug the software Other is a message that the system gives the user if it is not sure of what kind of Log Type it has 1 e a message that 1t cannot categorize into one of the four options above Unknown is displayed when messages are created with an LMU file that is different from the LMU files that is currently on the system and hence being used to translate the messages Therefore the program cannot categorize the message as it does not have the LMU file that the message was created with Modify Option acors eee loxi Select Modify to change the colours of message classes and or types Sttussndeontrolof a e Selected log class and all its subclasses This brings up the Colors window which will allow you to modify the Selected lag class ony existing colours for the logs By default all the log messages are displayed Log Class Color Log Ty
369. port Services by clicking on its name the DXL Configuration Editor window will now display certain information about the exchange in the Function pane Initially a DCC can be added to the exchange as shown below Once you have added a DCC to the exchange the Add DCC button in the Configuration Editor window because each exchange can only have one DCC will change to an Add DCE button and the additional entries Add DIO Add TBE and Add PZE will appear In certain situations Modify and Delete buttons may also appear to allow you to change certain settings or delete unwanted cards Note that when you have added the maximum of four DCEs and or TBEs to the exchange the Add DCE and Add TBE buttons will be dimmed and you will no longer be able to select them DXL Configuration Editor Configuration 2 Oj x Fie Edit Configure Hardware y Lock View Containment y Property Value ________________________ Grey Institution ds Support Services Housing Unit 1 Housing Unit 2 Special Handling Administration Function Exchange Exchange Exchange 100 Support Services Add DCC Delete 3 3 2 1 Adding a DCC Click on the Add DCC button to fill in the necessary entries in the xl ES DCC Properties window If the DCC has audio level alarm capability ines cia you should select the ALA Enhanced checkbox The DCC supports PCI Card fxLon y PCI Card TA
370. press the 4 key to move the cursor to the next field to the left unless it is already in the left most field of the editable value When the cursor is already in the left most position then no action 1s taken e When you are adjusting the contrast of the LCD you can use the 4 key to decrease the contrast If the contrast 1s already at the lowest setting then no action is taken the contrast setting does not wrap If you hold down the key for more than 1 second then the contrast setting will auto decrement at a 0 5 second rate until the key 1s released or the lowest contrast setting has been reached e When you are adjusting the brightness of the LCD backlight the 4 key decreases the intensity If 1t 1s already at the highest intensity setting no action 1s taken the backlight intensity does not wrap If held down for more than 1 second the intensity setting will auto decrement at a 0 5 second rate until the key 1s released or the lowest intensity setting has been reached IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 249 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 6 3 Value Editing 6 3 1 Introduction Value editing is performed in a consistent fashion whether the item is strictly numerical e g static IP address or is textual in nature e g selecting a device to install During editing you are not allowed to enter an invalid value For example if the time is in AM PM mode then you are not allowed to enter 13 as the hour This applies to all editing
371. projects to display on the file menu E y Restore Defaults 3 1 2 5 Sounds Select this option to import export record xi edit and play various sound types This FdimaScundiye Tone C Message T Configuration Sounds brin s u the Sounds Editor window There Shared Sounds Total Length 11 4 sec Max 120 0 sec eS UP SoundName Length sec are two sound types Tone and Message 200H2 250ms 0 250 00H 2 250m 0 250 n 250H2 250ms 0 250 50H2 250ms 0 250 300H2 250 0 250 1000H2 250r 0 250 Tones are normally short sound clips such as oe ap 0 250 buzzer whistles or bells Messages are a oa rial at 600H2 250 0 250 histl 0 426 usually longer sound clips often obtained by gt 0042250ms 0 250 ma 850H2 250ms 0 250 recording a voice announcement 1000H2 250ms 0 250 1200H2 250ms 0 250 A 1400H2 250ms 0 250 The Sounds Editor window has two display eon nein F areas The Shared Sounds area lists Import Record Import Record Sounds that can be used in any configuration The Configuration Sounds area specifies Sounds that are only being used in the configuration that you are currently editing This window also displays the total combined length of time of all the current configuration sounds as well as the total maximum allowed length of all the configuration sounds To edit sounds in either area click on the name of the sound to select it Once you have selected a sound you can edit t
372. quest to finternalfintercom Tasks CLK January 21 2005 Anfo fIntemal Intercom Tasks CLE January 21 2005 08 22 21 556 AM This exchange is acting as the clock master Debug fintemal Intercom Tasks CLK January 21 2005 08 22 21 560 AM Sent periodic broadcast request to Debug intemal Shells January 21 2005 08 23 20 81AM Listener on port 50009 accepting client connection from 10 0 0 98 on socket 65 class fIntermal Intercorm Tasks CLE LMU 0 164 Configuration two ex Block 416 Date January 21 2005 Time 06 19 21 63 AM Exchange 1 Colin Status Bar Co uration Exc h E nig Additional informaton on objects in status har Each log entry has nine characteristics that are described below Message Type this indicates the type of message that is being viewed There are six types of messages Errors Warning Information Debug Other and Unknown Message Class this indicates the Class of message that the message falls under The current Message Classes fall under Host Internal Maintenance System activity and System Startup Classes are a hierarchical classification of messages into related groups LMU file the LMU file contains a detailed description of how to format the log entries Hence this records the LMU file that was used to build the application that was running when the log was generated The Messages subdirectory contains the log message format databases produced b
373. queued at the master when it occurs This switch does not have to be associated with an external button on the station A switch can be configured as a tamper alarm switch so that it sends an alarm to the master when it is pressed released or tampered with Tamper Alarm Cancel switch this switch is used to cancel a tamper alarm when it occurs The purpose of having this switch on a station is to force the operator who received the alarm to physically go to the station and turn off the tamper alarm Unused switch you can set a switch to the unused state which means that the switch does not have a specific function You can use this setting for a switch that is present but which you will not be using or a station that has provisions for two switches buy only one switch present Volume Step this switch is used so that the user can step through different volume levels for audio clarity This type of switch is mostly used at visiting booth stations for users that are hard of hearing Each time the user presses the switch the volume would increase progressively and then cycle back to the starting point There are two switch settings that only appear when you set a Station to be a Compound Station Member They are the Compound Call Request Switch and the Compound Music Select switch Compound Call Request switch when you press the button that is associated with this switch a call request is sent to the master that is configured t
374. quire a digital audio trunk CEPT network Every DCC in a system 1 e every exchange requires a VOIP card The tabs for an IP master station are shown on the right Note that IP Masters support 14 pre defined switches that correspond to the speed dial keys on the right side of the IMS 640 They also support a 15 input with the optional footswitch TMM IP Master The TMM IP Master type is used by the TMM 6XX and Permissions Paging Feedback Outputs i Identification Switches Tones CalSetings Control Seconday MAI 6XX devices and utilize Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP The inter exchange Ethernet network is used for call connections between exchanges Such systems do not require a digital audio trunk CEPT network Every DCC in a system 1 e every exchange requires a VOIP card The tabs for an TMM IP master station are shown on the right Note that TMM IP Master type has 2 pre defined switches setup as PTT and hook switches plus one additional switch only available on the MAI 6XX An Form C Relay output is also available but only with MAI 6XX devices IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 49 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 5 1 General Tabs There are certain general tabs in the Master Properties window that are similar irrespective of whether you choose a TSM IMS TMM Paging Microphone Master Master Group or IP Master Hence we will discuss these general tabs below and then continue on to the tabs that vary for
375. r 1t will not connect to exchanges that are invalid IP address that cannot be accessed and those that are not defined on the currently active configuration This is the default setting and is used most commonly coc After you click on the Connect button the program will display a Communication Status information box Page 168 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL If you have connected to the exchanges by using the Configuration option then the x k y F i Exchange 1 Support Services at 10 0 0 1 Communication Status window will display all the exchanges that belong to the Ershange 2 Housing Building 1 at 100 02 Exchange 3 Housing Building 2 a lo configuration that you have selected If the computer cannot connect to certain 7 peca Handnola Tiani exchanges then these exchanges will appear in grey italic in the Communication Status window In our example the PC computer cannot connect to Exchanges 3 4 and 5 but has successfully made a connection link to the Exchanges and 2 and they appear in black Modem xi Get IP Address es or Phone Number s From When you connect via a modem you will have to choose the modem on Alba your PC that you want to use from the Connect Using drop down Configuration Configuguration_1 0 menu The Dial Exchange drop down menu displays the phone communications Link numbers of all the exchanges that are defined in the configuration yo
376. r i The alarm number has been used already When the event that you define in the Alarm Properties dialog window occurs the DXL sends a message with the Alarm Number to the video switch to inform the switch of this occurrence Remember that the action that the video switch takes after receiving this information is entirely up to the personnel who program the settings on the video switch and is not associated with the DXL operator The other entries in the Alarm Properties dialog window were discussed previously in Section 3 24 1 3 Note that the maximum number of alarms that you can define in the Alarm tab depends on the number that you have entered for Max Alarm in the Commands tab Video Switches Commands Camera Monitor Commands Camera Monitor Commands are created on the fly and are used to set up connections between monitors and cameras when calls are established between devices The usefulness of this method lies in the fact that the user does not have to explicitly define every event for which the monitors and cameras on the Master and the Stations are connected Additionally you do not have to explicitly define which camera gets connected to which monitor and vice versa This is because the Configuration uses a set of rules when it decides the cameras and the monitors that are to be connected when a call is established Because of the flexibility of the Camera Monitor Commands this kind of connection can only be set up when a
377. r the Configurations on Exchange s area The size of the file that you have selected will appear in the Checksum entry 4 3 Remote Front Panel Remote Front Panel Exchange 2 Top The Remote Front Panel can be started by selecting Remote Front Panel in the MicroComm DXL Diagnostics and Maintenance window View menu Once you connect to an exchange this Remote Front Panel DCC Setu LCD Adjustment eystem Time Date you to carry out the same operations as if you were using Sees ee the front panel keyboard It also allows you to make changes using the remote computer s keyboard rather than interface provides a mirror of the local display and allows using the front panel keypad install After you click on the OK button you will see the Remote Front Panel appear when the connection to the exchange is made Refer to the MicroComm DXL Local User Interface section further in this document for more information on using the local user interface IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 187 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 4 4 Remote Reboot Select Exchanges Check the exchange s to reboot You can remotely reset chosen exchanges in a configuration by selecting Remote Reboot in the MicroComm DXL Diagnostics and Maintenance window View menu Once you connect to an exchange this Remote Reboot interface allows you to select which exchanges to reboot and hit Ok Right click an exchange to force all or none to be select
378. ram Monitor Station Group Call Visiting Booth Control Visiting Booth Call Page one Click on the function that you want to give the master permission to access and it will appear in the Function area As an example say that we want to give the master permission to call a station Click Call Station in the Function drop down menu Now we have to identify the stations that we want to give the master permission to call Click on the Add button to see a list of all the stations that are related to the Call Station entry You can make an individual selection of stations from this list or you can add all the stations to the list As the devices are added to the permission list they will appear in the information window with the Number and Name of each device displayed In a similar fashion you can add devices for each entry that you choose in the Function drop down menu To delete a device from the information window click on the name of the device in the information window and then click on the Delete button Note that a Master Group is a separate type of master please refer to the Master Group section for a detailed description of how these masters operate You will only be able to click on the Show Master Group Permissions checkbox if the master that you are defining is a member of a master group Click on the Show Master Group Permissions checkbox to display the permissions for the master group that this master belongs to In thi
379. ration TEST1 Remember from the previous example that this is because Exchange 01 is the only Exchange that the computer can connect to IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 181 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Disconnect Refresh l Configurations on Exchange z O 0 002 0000 C 0 002 001 O 0 002 001k Show Exchanges 7 Exchangels containing TEST1 Exchange 1 Exchange 01 Click on TEST1 and change 1 Exchange 01 then click on this button Disconnect Refresh Select Exchanaes Configurations on Exchange st Q 0 002 0000 L 0 002 001 O 0 002 001K Hide Exchanges Activate Show Exchanges Notice how the Show Exchanges button has changed to a Hide Exchanges button 4 2 8 Refresh When the computer initially connects to the File Manager window and connects to the exchanges it is possible that the system does not make a connection to certain exchange s due to an error To avoid the chance of not connecting to certain exchanges because of errors on the network etc click on the Refresh button to reconnect to all the exchanges This will ensure that the computer is connecting to as many exchanges as it can 4 2 9 Copy The gt Copy gt button lets you upload a configuration or application onto the exchanges on the DXL By default the program will upload the files onto all the exchanges on the DXL unless you have selected specific exchanges in the Select Exchanges window using the Select Exchanges
380. rator to use the TSM to carry out his functions Such tasks include calling other master stations or intercom stations making page announcements turning on ALAs audio level alarms etc System Properties E x TSM Dialing Master Operations Clock Logging General Dialing Forma Function Prefive Prefix Digits E Call Master 0 Call Page one Call Station H Call Visiting Booth 3 Control Master Manned Disabled Control Page one Program Fi i Fixed Length Variable Length Fixed Length Id Digit Variable Length Enable TSM Dialing Timeout station Timeout me 7500 Master Station Group Control Station Audio Level Alarm E 2 Page Zone 2 E Dial Masters by Hame 2 e 2 T Visiting Booth Control Station Call Requests 4 Control Station Group Audio Level Alarm 3 Separation Le e H de Control Station Group Call Request Disabled Man TSM 23 Control Station Group Program Unman TSM 734 Man Unman Key Sequence Control Station Program mo m Note that call and monitor connections require the entry on the telephone keypad of a Prefix followed by the Device ID Number and a termination character as shown below Fixed Length Dialling Separation Key Variable Length Dialling IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 125 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Function Prefixes Option The various functions that a TMS Master can perform are shown in the area marked
381. rch Filter Transfer Format cia TT Tasks CLK January 20 2005 09 01 27 56 AM This exchange is acting as the clock master Debug fInternal Intercom Tasks CLK January 20 2005 09 01 27 56 AM Sent periodic broadcast request to determine clock master NU_SUCCESS 9 info fInternal Intercom T CLK ETT 5 09 04 27 56 AM This ange is acting as the clock master Debug Internalfintercom T lt Panu 5 09 Time Filter x Earliest Tim None oldest log Relative fi Hour s prior to Latest Time 9 Info fInternal Intercom T CLK PENE ry 5 ME Debug fInternal Intercom T O info fInternal Intercom Tasks CLK O 2005 h 09 10 27 50 AM This exchange is acting as the clock master Debug Internal Intercom Tasks CLK endar 20 2005 09 10 27 50 AM Sent periodic broadcast request to determine clock master NU_SUCCESS Debug Internal shells January 20 2005 09 10 37 25 AM Listener on port 50008 accepting client connection from 10 0 0 98 on socket 27 Debug Internal Shells January 20 2005 09 10 37 25 AM Listener on port 50008 bound and g Specify 20 01 2005 y 3 04 27 AM accepting connections on socket 5 Debug Internal Shells January 20 2005 09 10 37 25 AM Shell on socket 27 started Debug Internal Shells January 20 2005 09 10 40 31 AM Listener on port 50009 accepting client Latest Tim connection from 10 0 0 98 on socket 29 c Debug Internal Shells January 20 2005 09 10 40 31 AM Listener
382. rd you can also use a mouse to point and click on buttons that appear on the Remote Front Panel S S wy 6 2 1 4 Keypad Group 1 amp Select the Setup key to display a top level menu that allows a particular Setup item to be selected for display and editing as desired This includes setting the LCD contrast amp cl backlight intensity setting the system time setting up the Ethernet network s etc Please see Section 6 5 for additional details Select the Status key to display a top level menu that displays the Status of selected I O S ranges as well as other information such as firmware versions Please see Section 6 6 for 2 _ additional details Select the Fault key to display a top level menu that allows a particular range of Exchange s Faults to be selected for display This includes wiring faults audio trunk faults self test e faults etc Please see Section 6 7 for additional details 6 2 1 4 1 Page 244 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 6 2 1 5 Keypad Group 2 a 4 P v amp Y a This key performs the two context sensitive functions described below You can select the a key to parse a list of items such as a Fault list This key behaves as follows e Ifthe cursor is on a line other than the last line of the display and there are additional items above this line then select a to move the cursor up one line The contents of the display in the current window
383. re defined switches and will not be discussed 3 7 1 3 Station Properties Tones Tones can be associated with either call or monitoring al Permissions Outputs Selectors op erations Call Announce and Call Request Identification Switches Tones Call Settings Levels ALA Filters Acknowledge entries were discussed previously in OPPP EPIN a section 3 22 Start fi StartT one Start None y End AM End None y The Monitor Announce tones are the tones used to Reminder 2 ReminderTone Reminder None E inform a station that it is being monitored Select None cal Request acknowledge if you do not want to inform the station that it is being Tone 2 ReminderTone W monitored You can use the pull downs to select from the list of tones that have been defined You can specify if a tone is generated when the monitoring begins if you select Start when the monitoring ends if you select End and as a periodic reminder during the monitoring process if you select Reminder IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 77 Administrator Software 3 7 1 4 Station Properties Call Settings Tick the Answer Call Requests Only checkbox in order to ensure that a Master can only establish a call to a station after the station has made a call request to the master In this case the Master will not be able to place a call to a station on its own and will only be able to answer call requests from a station
384. re to the right s ize 38 394 Checksum 31 27196518 Import Export Show Exchanges IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 183 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL In our example if you try to copy Configuration 0 002 002a from the x Project Configurations area to the Configurations on Exchange s area Ther ee ne ech ange E A you will receive the following error message This message means that the x computer has been unable to upload the selected configuration to the exchange s on the DXL because PC has been unable to connect to any of the exchanges on the DXL The Copy button works similarly for the Application Files app option 4 2 9 1 Rules for copying Configuration Files and Application Files The rules that apply to the Copy operation are listed below 1 Uploading and distribution of the default application is NOT allowed 2 Files will NOT be copied to offline or unselected exchanges 3 The user will not be able to copy a file with the same name but different checksum value as an activated file Therefore even if the file that you are trying to copy onto the exchanges is not the same as the activated file that is already on the exchanges the system will not allow you to copy this file if both the file that you are trying to copy and the activated file have the same name 4 If a file is being copied to multiple exchanges then ALL the exchanges MUST have enough space for this file 5 Nothing is transf
385. rogram availability is re enabled it begins at the program channel and volume settings that were in effect at the time that it was disabled 3 17 1 Program Group Dialog Box Setting the Configure entry in the DXL Configuration Editor to Program Groups will display in the List pane of the Configuration Editor window all the program groups in the system Selecting Add will bring up the Program Group Properties window with two tabs that will allow you to create a Program Group 3 17 1 1 Program Group Properties Identification The Identification tab has entries for ID Number and a Identification Members Number 200 Name Tunerlnputs Info El Name Previous Next Cancel Page 112 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 17 1 2 Program Group Properties Members The Members tab lets you add music sources to the xl Identification Members program group Click on the Add button to add music sources to the program group This brings up the Select Member Music Sources Unit Tuner 21 Unit Tuner2 UnitB Tuneri Music Sources dialog box in x Music Sources UnitB Tuner2 MedicalT unerl MedicalT uner 2 OK Cancel Previous Next Initially the Select Music Sources dialog box lists all the music sources in the system The music sources are identified by their ID Number and Name To add a music source as a member of a program group click on the musi
386. rol Station Audio Level Alarm 2 Control Station Call Requests 4 A n ee Control Station Group Audio Level Alarm 3 Control Station Group Call Request Disabled Man TSM 234 Control Station Group Program 6 Unman TSM 734 Control Station Program 5 E Cancel Note that the Fixed Length Id Digits includes the device ID number as well as any preceding zeroes For example if the Fixed Length Id Digits for a station is set to 4 the call station prefix is set to and the station device number is 34 then you will have to dial 0034 in order to make a call to this station from the TSM The purpose of this option is to make the system more efficient For example 1f the system has only 6 Master Stations then 1 digit would be sufficient to identify the Master Stations hence making the calling sequence more efficient Also note that if the number selected in the x Fixed Length Id Digits option is less than the A There are not enough fixed length digits for dialing to all the masters in the system Would you like to ent F P correct this automatically number of digits in the device ID field then the program issues a warning If you select Yes then the program will automatically change the entry in the Fixed Length Id Digits for the device that the warning pertains to If you select No then the program will allow you to keep your choice but will not allow you to dial to this device The separation
387. ront Panel pasan ol anat 250 63 12 Editing troma Remote Terminal atodos 250 0 PASS WO PROTECCION eat 292 6 5 T S MAP e e o E 253 6 5 1 IEA e E UU o E E E 253 65 12 The LED Adjustment OPIO siccscsssicssiesnbeoaviantecssdambeeadcateouetadewbeabtandonssdawbewascateoueaaiGend ued biandonasdaubieadcatouetedands 253 A The system AMA e e RO o 0 E O E II 254 GAl The Hinemet IP Mask O DUO e sossoosiotcoiolcesioenorescacentosclonlesblaos E EN 256 6514 The DCE Add Remove ODON ascuas EEE EEEE ES 256 6 0 1 3 The IMS Add Remove ODUON seserian teea aa EE E EEEN EE AE E AN EENE E AE 257 Page viii IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 6 6 Fhe US MICH ease va ora AAA eo ara eae 259 6 6 1 The DCC SAUS OPA eta 259 SOM General oraa A A A A A A A A ecu 260 66 12 Whe MCC Audio Inputs OPIO AA A A 260 6 64 35 he SCC lL Audio mp its OP ao oe 262 COLA The SCC Audio Inputs O cae eG ee ee eG ee ee eG ee 263 6 6 5 Lhe Stas Inputs Opuomsc taticsveatestenancuenpineetn O gaiesln cine agence 263 6 6 1 6 The Status Outputs Options aiii is 263 6 6 27 The SC Cl Outputs OPINA a a aE 264 GOTS The SCC Outputs OPUN eisa dd aliens 264 6 60 19 The Temperaire Opi Obeni a a E a E a ae 265 00 10 The Audo Trunk Opio essed a a d 265 6 6 1 11 The ETA AS 6 he OPON er eE 265 66 1512 The Fror Counters OPA aioe eee oe ee ea 266 6 6 2 he SDC Bro Status OPON ea anton rad dipolo oido dipolo srl dpi 266 6 6 3 he DCE Status O a E a
388. rst Time If a password has never been set then the Current Password entry is not available x To set the password type a string into the New Password entry and then confirm Current Password this new password by typing it into the Confirm New Password entry Click on OK to accept the new password Click on Cancel in order to cancel the operation New Password Contirm New Password eet cnc Change an Existing Password Click the Change Password option to change the existing password Type the xl existing password into the Current Password entry Then type the new password Current Password into the New Password entry Now confirm this new password by re typing it into the Confirm New Password entry Click on OK to accept the new password Click New Password on Cancel in order to cancel the operation and retain the old password Contirm New Password e Cancel IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 21 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Delete an Existing Password To remove the password altogether click on the Change Password option Enter the existing password into the Current Password entry and leave the New Password and Confirm New Password entries blank Click on OK to continue with the process of removing the password or click on Cancel to cancel the operation If you click on OK then a confirmation message will x The new password is blank Do you wish to remove password protection from
389. s 1 DCC Status DCC Status 1 DCE 1 Status 1 Status 2 Status NZI 3 Status N I 2 DCE 2 Status 4 Status N I Configuration 3 DCE 3 Status 4 DCE 4 Status Install Fault 5 Configuration The screen consists of the items displayed above You can select an item by placing the cursor in front of the desired parameter and then pushing the key The system will display N I not installed next to any DCE that is not currently installed on the system Note that the Status menu is mainly for displaying values and that you cannot edit values in this menu 6 6 1 The DCC Status Option This menu allows the user to view the status of various parameters related to the DCC They are 1 MCC Audio Inputs 2 SCC1 Audio Inputs POE e epetus MCC Audio Inputs 3 SCC2 Audio Inputs SCC1 Audio Inputs SCC2 Audio Inputs 4 Status Inputs Status Inputs status Outputs 5 Status Outputs SCC1 Outputs 6 SCC1 Outputs 7 SCC2 Outputs 8 Temperatures 9 Audio Trunk Screen scrolled Temperatures down to end Audio Trunk Firmware Store 11 Error Counters Error Counters 10 Firmware Store IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 259 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 6 6 1 1 General For all switch inputs I indicates an idle state A indicates a switch A line voltage B indicates a switch B line voltage S indicates a short circuit fault connection and O indicates an o
390. s Debug j fInternal Interc January 20 2005 09 58 27 331 AM Sent periodic broadcast request to Reset Layout determine C 0 ck master NU_SUCCES 0 1b4 two ex Ex 84 lt From IP gt End of logs 77 Page 236 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 5 2 7 Edit Menu Continued 5 2 7 1 Preferences Select Preferences in the Edit menu to bring up the DXL Administrator Preferences window This window consists of 5 tabs General Configuration Logging Diagnostics and Connection The first two tabs have already been discussed with the DXL Configuration Editor so the Logging Tab is discussed here 5 2 1 1 Preferences Logging Select the Logging Tab to configure the Startup xi Settings These are the settings that the program uses General Configuration Leasing Diagnostics Connection when the DXL Log Viewer starts up Note that the Startup Settings changes made here will only come into effect when Transfer Full manual Y Serolibar Show y the Log Viewer is closed and reopened das JV Restore last column format settings and which columns to display JV Restore last layout settings column widths ordering font ete Color Scheme None bi Filters Class amp Type None y Exchange Restore saved y exchange Select Message Text Restore saved y message Select Time None y Abort Notification Message Interpretation V
391. s a TBE to communicate with three areas The example Housing Building 1 is divided into two identical units called Unit A and the Unit B The following example uses a TBE 310 to communicate with 3 separate areas in Unit A The three areas are to consist of 1 An overhead bank of speakers in the games room that are used to make broadcasts or play background music in the room The overhead speakers are configured to act as a single station with talkback capability This station is named Games Room A and the station is required to deliver 15 Page 84 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL watts of audio power to drive the overhead speakers The master station Unit A Control or the Housing Super can make calls to this station 2 A bank of pole mounted speakers is used to broadcast messages to the exercise yard The bank of speakers is configured as a station named Exercise Yard A Twenty watts of audio power are required to drive the speakers The master station Unit A Control has permission to make calls to this station 3 A station named Entrance A requires 5 watts of audio power to drive the overhead speakers in the entrance area The master station Unit A Control or Housing Super can make calls to this station Since each output line can supply 5 watts of audio power 3 output lines must be paralleled to provide 15 watts of audio output power to the Games Ro
392. s case the master group that the master belongs to will appear in the Master Group entry Note that if this master is a member of more than one master group then all the master groups that it is a member of will appear in the Master Group drop down menu If you want to view the permission lists of a particular master group then click on the master group in the Master Group drop down menu and then scroll through the various permissions in Function Note the permissions that you are viewing are the permissions for the master group that this master belongs to and not the permissions of the master itself However if you add or delete devices from the information area while you are viewing the Master Group Permissions remember that you are adding and deleting the permissions to only the master and not the master group Even if you are currently viewing the Master Group permissions when you add or delete a device from the permission list the permission for this device is added to the master and not the master group IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 53 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Note that Paging Microphone Masters only have three selections in their Function permissions list Call Page Zone Control Page Zone Program and Control Page Zone Volume This is because Paging Microphones are only used to make pages to page zones 3 5 1 4 Master Properties Secondary When a master is unmanned it is good practise to xi Identification Switches Ton
393. s of the microphone line M I indicates an idle state A indicates a switch A line voltage B indicates a switch B line voltage The different states of the IMS are displayed in the table below Page 260 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Table The Intercom Master Station MCC Audio Inputs Option State Status for Intercom Master Station off hook o m oo CU o eo n ra so pr me e pr me PTT Push To Talk switch Touchscreen Master Module For a Touchscreen Master Module TMM the fist character displays the status of the speaker line S and the second character displays the status of the microphone line M This is displayed in the table below Table The Touchscreen Master Module MCC Audio Inputs Option S No State Status for SM Touchscreen Master Module gt Pm Push To Talk switch Telephone Master Station MCC Status For a Telephone Master Station the characters ON onhook and OF Touchscreen Telephone Ma ON offhook are displayed to indicate the status of the TSM If the interface SLIC associated with the telephone is shutdown due to a high temperature failure for example then this 1s indicated with an HT High Temperature symbol If the telephone is on hook and ringing then this is indicated with an RG Table The Telephone Set Master Station MCC Audio Inputs Option S No State Status for S
394. s placed on the TG 2034 ell third line of the display Date gt Feb 20 2002 e Next press the key to select the first field for editing the tens of 8 _ a System Time Date hours in this case The cursor alternates with a blank in the tens of 2 Time gt lo 32 PM hours position to indicate that 1t is selected for modification Dees Das 20 2002 e Next press the Y key once to decrement the tens of hours field to the System Time Date value 1 alternatively you could also press the T key to go up to 1 If M Time gt i 32 PM the system time was in military mode pressing the Y key would have J Date gt Feb 20 2002 selected a 2 rather than 1 e Next press the gt key three times to move to the units of minutes fl system Time Date field The units of hours and tens of minutes are separate fields that f Time gt 12 32 PM are not being changed in this example Date gt Feb 20 2002 e Next use the gt key to move to the time format field System Time Date rime I Ae Sis Date Fen 20 2007 System Time Date mime 12 9 Date AZ e Next use the Y key to select AM e Finally press the Enter key to complete the editing session At this point l l System Time Date the new value is stored and the cursor is returned to the first character ime gt 12 38 AM position of the display Date gt Feb 20 2002
395. s status to For a description of the other entries please refer to Section 3 24 1 12 Host Port Status Registers Sequential registers Station Status Register Blocks Apply Changes 3 7 1 12 Station Properties CCTV The basic purpose of this tab is to allow you to set up Station 2007 UnitATVRoom Properties x connections between monitors cameras on masters and Filters Status Registers Permissions Outputs Selectors Identification Switches Tones CallSettings Levels CCTV ALA monitors cameras on stations when a call is made from DENI evice Kind Video Camera Y a master to a station The CCTV camera tab lets you AL e associate a group of video cameras and video monitors with a master station so that the DXL knows what commands it needs to send to the video switch The appropriate video cameras and video monitors can then be connected for the call Note that you will have to first define the video switches in the Video Switches section of Configure After this you will have to define the video cameras and video monitors that are using these switches in the Video Cameras and Video Monitors section of Configure Only after this is done will you see the CCTV tab appear in the Station Properties window Also note that these CCTV settings are only defined for the CALL event 1 e when a call is made from a master to a station Calls that are made from masters to visiting booths and from
396. s well as setting the Type and then 4 Cal Seinge Levele Selectors Fater using the drop down menus to select a audio output port Number A that will provide the audio input to the call recorder You Name Amplifier AT Input will not be able to select audio ports that have been ntfs assigned previously Type MCC Line Out Port y For VOIP systems you can send to a VoIP RTP Real ron Ty mar TEIE y Time Protocol stream instead of a analog port by using the type IP Station Port and picking an exchange this will connect to typically the same exchange as the master port does not matter Previous Next Cancel NOTE The assigned call recorder Number in this case can not be the same as another IP Master TMM or IP station number as all are SIP devices and must have unique ID s this is not enforced by the DXL Administrator 3 15 1 2 Call Recorder Properties Call Settings The Call Setting tab has slider adjustments for setting the xl initial volume and call priority If any status outputs have Entel Cal Seting Levels CCTV Monitor Fiter been set to Audio Output Active the pull down menu for Volume Output Active Status Output the Output Active Status Output box will display all these outputs If you select one of these outputs to be associated with this call recorder then as soon as an audio channel is established to the specified line level audio output the associated status output contacts will c
397. s will also change the selected value Note that if there are many logs with the same date and time then the program will jump to the first log with that date and time Page 210 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL The figure below displays the date being entered in the Go To Date and Time window by using the standard calendar dialog Once the date and time are set the Log Viewer highlights the first log that matches the date and time that has been entered Date 21 01 2005 Time 12 27 43 RE he ZE DXL Log Yiewer connected to 1 exchange oj xi File Edit Search Filter Transfer Format Q Soo B Cancel apes fInternal Interco 21 01 2005 EEIT PM This exchange is acting as the clock master XE Debug fInternal Interco 21 01 2005 12 25 20 556 PM Sent periodic broadcast request to determine clock master NU_SUCCESS Debug Internal Shells 21 01 2005 12 27 43 63 PM Listener on port 50008 accepting client connection from 10 0 0 98 on socket 47 Listener on port 50008 bound and accepting connections on socket 5 MDebug Internal Shells 21 01 2005 12 27 43 63PM Listener on port 50009 accepting client connection from 10 0 0 98 on socket 48 ry January 2005 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri WE Debug fInternal Shells 21 01 2005 12 27 43 63 PM 3 te 3 yo fF 10 IE 12 Ad 4 17 18 19 Eh 21 24 25 26 27 28 31 lo 1b4 two_ex Block 420 Ex 30 Housing Building 2 A
398. screens 6 3 1 1 Editing from the Front Panel The process of editing a value from the front panel encompasses several steps 1 First use the a and v keys as necessary to ensure that the cursor is placed on the line containing the value that you want to edit The start of each line will always blink with the character on the first line and the H symbol 2 Next keep the gt key pressed in order to select the first available field for alteration and to begin the editing session The selected field alternates with the cursor to allow it to be identified During editing leading zero suppression is disabled to ensure that you can clearly identify all of the digits that can be modified Note that any field that you want to modify will always blink alternately with the character in that field and the a symbol 3 Next use the a and v keys to select the desired value for the field that you want to modify To prevent you from making erroneous choices only valid choices are presented as best as possible 4 Next press the gt key to select the next field for possible alteration Repeat Step 3 for each field as necessary If you make an error use the 4 key to return to a previous field to correct the error SE o l 5 Once you have made all the necessary changes press the key to complete the editing session and save the modified value The cursor is then returned to the leftmost position on the screen If the changes
399. sed padlock the configuration is currently in a locked state When saat al the configuration is in the locked state you will not be allowed to edit the configuration and will only be allowed to view the configuration To unlock the configuration you can click on the Unlock button If you have set a password the Enter Password window will appear and you will be required to type in the correct password in order to unlock the configuration If you have not set a password the configuration will immediately change to the unlocked state When the configuration is in this unlocked state you will be allowed to edit the configuration When this icon shows an open padlock it indicates that the configuration is currently in an eer a unlocked state and can be edited You will have to click on the Lock button in order to lock the configuration Page 22 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 1 2 4 Preferences This option brings up the DXL Administrator x Preferences dialog window which has five tabs General Configuration Logging Diagnostics Connection General Configuration Logging Diagnostics and Default project directory Connections i The General tab and the CAD ocuments and Settings KeithS My DocumentsiDXL Projects Browse Configuration tab were discussed in Section 242 1 De Refer DXL Log Viewer section for a Y Display recent projects on the file menu descr iption of the Logging tab Number of recent
400. settings is to adjust for different room acoustics Once these setting are established an operator cannot change them during normal operation 3 2 2 15 Microphone The Microphone adjustment sets the level of the outgoing audio from the device You can change each slider in 1 dB steps from 16 dB to 16 dB to change the levels The purpose of these level settings is to adjust for different operators and different room acoustics Once MicroComm DXL Master 11 Central Control 1 Properties x Secondary Permissions Paging Feedback Outputs Identification Switches Tones Cal Settings Levels Filters Control Speaker Microphone Cancel these setting are established an operator cannot change them during normal operation Tick the Use AGC Automatic Gain Control checkbox to automatically adjust the gain so that the transmitted sound will be at a uniform power level even 1f the audio input power to the microphone changes 3 2 2 16 Initial Buzzer Volume The volume setting is used to increase or decrease the volume of the buzzer at the master station The slider can change the buzzer volume in 8 steps from O off to a maximum of 7 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 33 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 3 Adding Exchanges Configuring an exchange requires several steps At the top level an exchange contains a DCC and up to 4 DCEs The DCC and DCEs in turn contain cards that must be specified for the application
401. sions Function gia Visiting Booth Visiting Control IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 10 Speaker Lines In the following example a PZE will be used in 4 different Page Zones in an example Housing Unit 1 The PZE is wired as follows Line Level Audio Output 1 Line Level Audio Output 2 PZE 110 Speaker Line Group 2 Speaker Line Gro r DCC or DCE Key Speaker Line Group 1 Speaker Line 6 Speaker Line Group 1 Speaker Line 5 Speaker Line Grpup 1 Speaker Line 4 Speaker Line Group 1 Speaker Line 3 Speaker Line Group 3 Speaker Line 2 Speaker Line Group 2 Speakar Ling 2 Speaker Line Group 1 Speaker Line 2 Speaker Line Group 3 Speaker Line 1 Speaker Line Group 2 Speakar Ling 1 Speaker Line Group 1 Speaker Line 1 ZN N J ZN 2 en Exercise Exercise Games Games p Yard Yard Room Room Spk 4 Spk 2 Spk 4 Spk 2 ZN ZN N N N Enee Exercise Exercise Games Games p Yard Yard Room Room Spk 3 Spk 1 Spk 3 Spk 1 The four page zones are to consist of 1 Page zone named Games Room uses audio amplifier 1 and transmits audio to four speaker lines in the Games Room The mute control for amplifier 1 uses the Key relay associated with Speaker Group 1 In addition two other status output relays are to be operated when this page zone is activated The master station Unit Control is permitted to make pages to this page zone 2 Page zone named Exercise Yard uses audio
402. sition to indicate that it is selected for modification Leading zero suppression is disabled for standard numerical values only it is not disabled in the tens of hours field e Next press the v key to decrement the tens of hours field to the value 1 alternatively you could also press the a key to go up to 1 If the system time was in military mode pressing the v key would have selected a 2 rather than 1 e Next press the gt key three times to move to the units of minutes field The units of hours and tens of minutes are separate fields that are not being changed in this example e Next press the a key and hold it down After a Y second pause the units of minutes field will begin to auto increment The key is released after it reaches the desired value of 8 e Next press the gt key to select the time format field for editing e Next press the v key to select AM IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 MicroComm DXL System Time Date Mime 2 32 PM Date Feo 20 200 System Time Date Time 2 32 pm Date Feb 207 200 2 System Time Date Time fJ2 32 pm Date Fep 20 2002 System Time Date Time 12 3 PM Date Feb 20 200 System Time Date Time 12 38 pM Dake Feb 2005 2010 System Time Date Time 12 38 MM Date Feo Ca OO System Time Date Time 12 38 MM
403. snees 147 PAS ALAAN O LEVEL ALAIN DICT OT SARA AAA ARA AAA AAA AA 150 zl Dennis ALA DESEES T a odids 150 32541 ALA Detector Properties dentici n 150 3 20 152 ALA Detector Properties Fille ida 150 20 Zo Pee Par aniete rs a ioe 150 LIZ Piter DES CA DIOS a e OE 153 3 25 1 3 ALA Detectors Properties Detecta A a 154 A O 156 3201 Video switches Properties Dialog BOX oboe 156 3 26 1 1 Video Switches Properties Identilicat ie an nima 156 3 26 1 2 Video Switches Properties Alarm Contacts Connection oooccccccnnnncncnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnss 156 3 26 1 3 Video Switch Properties Alarm Contacts AlarMWMS ooooooooonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnos 157 3 26 1 4 Video Switches Properties Serial COME i 160 3 26 1 5 Video Switches Properties Serial Command i ccc c0ccccseedessevidscceaccadsccesesssssadeseesessedsscnacesdssussesesneatweres 161 3 26 1 6 Video Switches Properties Serial Alarim ccccsssssssssseeeeeeccceeccenaneceesssseeeeceecccceesessaaeegsssssseeeeeeeess 161 327 VICO CAMAS area asa saree tn a eae eas eee eae eee eee 164 SO ACI OS chistes pi ice lt aaah o eae orn oe 165 4 MicroComm DXL Diagnostics and Maintenanc ccccccsssscssccccssssssssscccccsssssssscccccsscssssssscccssccssssssccccssssssssssccooes 167 4 1 rodne O A di on di iilccia 167 4 1 1 Opening MicroComm DXL Diagnostics and Maintenance cccccccccnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnn
404. ssigned to every device in a DXL x system Bach device in a class requires a unique D i as number where ID numbers are restricted to 5 digits 1 e from 1 to 99999 Type the ID number of a master ie station visiting booth page zone etc into the Number entry It is recommended that all master stations have ID EEN El numbers with the same number of digits Type IMSMaster y A consideration when assigning ID numbers to a system rms E my at that has Telephone Masters is to minimize the number of digits that are required to call a master For example if you keep all the Master Stations ID numbers to 2 digits then the master station could be called faster than if a full 5 digits are used to identify the masters For the same reason you should keep the length of the ID numbers for stations as short as possible as this will minimize the number of digits that you will need to dial to call a station Initially the default length for master station IDs is 2 digits and the default length for station ID s is 4 digits You can change these values in the System option of the Configure entry If you enter an ID number for a station master page zone etc whose length exceeds the value defined for the system the DXL Configuration Editor will prompt you to change the system properties For example if you decide to use the ID number 99999 for a station then the system will prompt you with a message shown below Click on
405. system where tens or hundreds of logs are coming in per second Page 234 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL e Exchange to view the Exchange that a log is downloaded from you can choose for the Exchange to appear with the Number of an Exchange the Name of an Exchange or Both the number and the name of an Exchange Restore Defaults Option You can click the Restore Defaults button to change all the Format Settings back to their original default values This will display a confirmation dialog Click on Restore to continue with the changes or click Cancel to cancel the operation Note that the changes will not take effect until you click OK on the Column Format Settings window DXL Administrator x change will not actually be saved until you press OK on the Column Format Settings dialog Do you wish _ Warning All the format settings on this dialog will be changed back to their original default values The to proceed Cancel Note that when you view logs an Exchange or set of exchanges might appear in a Exchange number format This occurs when you are viewing logs that were generated while running a Configuration that is no longer installed on the DXL and 1s missing on the PC Since the program cannot find the Configuration that these logs belong to 1t chooses to map the log into the current Configuration by displaying a with the Exchange number of the current Configuration that
406. t Administrator Version 14 1 0 beta 6 Designed using VolP master stations Cancel IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 19 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 1 1 9 File Manager This invokes the File Manager after prompting to save your changes For more information refer to the MicroComm DXL Diagnostics and Maintenance section later in this manual 3 1 1 10 Exit Select this option to close the DXL Configuration Editor window Note x that the program asks for no confirmation if you have not edited the Pi Configuration test has been changed Ws Do you wish to save changes I Discard Cancel configuration since the last time that you saved it If you have edited the configuration and have not saved the changes then the program will display a message that will ask if you want to save your changes Click on Save if you want to save your changes and then exit the DXL Configuration Editor Click on Discard if you want the program to exit the window after discarding the changes that you made since you last saved the configuration The program will revert to the last saved settings and will then exit the window Click on Cancel if you want to cancel the current operation and leave the DXL Configuration Editor window open Even after the DXL Configuration Editor window is shut down the MicroComm DXL Administrator window will still be available Therefore even though you have closed the configuration the project tha
407. t can be physically acknowledged or cleared only in the Unacknowledged Faults window and not in any of the other windows This is because the DCC Faults window and the DCE Faults windows only display the status of the faults You can set the status of the faults to one of three characters A C or K and they are described below Character A this character stands for an Active fault and appears next to the description of a fault when a fault has occurred You can press the key to acknowledge a fault in the Unacknowledged Faults window however this does not mean that the fault has been rectified Once you have acknowledged a fault it disappears from the Unacknowledged Faults window Note that this does not mean that this fault has disappeared from the DCC Faults window or DCE Faults window depending on where it has occurred Character K this character stands for an acKnowledged fault and informs the user that a fault has been acknowledged but has not been rectified Hence even though the fault has been acknowledged in the Unacknowledged Faults window and disappears from that window it will still appear in the DCC Faults window or DCE Faults window depending on where the fault has occurred with a K beside it Page 268 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL The fault will only disappear from the DCC Faults window or the DCE Faults window when the fault has been rectified e C
408. t of the line without saving the changes Timeout The Timeout option lets you to enable or disable a timeout When enabled this option will take the user to the System Time Date window if there has been no activity on the keypad for a period of time that is set by the user To edit the Timeout option on the LCD display move the cursor to the start of the Timeout line and then press the gt key to move to the start of the first editable field If the timeout has been disabled then the word Disabled will appear To increase the timeout period use the a key and to decrease the period use the v key The Timeout option will run through the loop Disabled a 1 4 2 a 3 a 4 a 5 a 6 a 7 a g a o a Disabled Once you have finished editing the Timeout you can press the key to save the changes which returns the KY cursor to the start of the Timeout line If you do not want to save the changes then press the key which will return the cursor to the start of the line without saving the changes 6 5 1 2 The System Time Date Option Select this option by placing the cursor at the start of this line and then press the key You can enter this option if you want to change the date and time on the DXL To edit the time on the system Time Date Time gt 23 37 ML Date gt Feb 14 2004 LCD display move the cursor to the start of the Time line and then press the gt key to move to the start of the first editab
409. t the configuration is located in remains open Page 20 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 1 2 Edit Menu The Edit menu of the MicroComm DXL Configuration Menu has the following list of Edit entries where only the five entries Copy Item List Change Password Lock ee Unlock Configuration Preferences and Sounds are implemented at this time chix The entries Undo Cut Copy Paste Select All and Delete are not implemented oe ee select Al crits Delete Del Copy Item List Ctrl I Change Password Lock Configuration Preferences 3 1 2 1 Copy ltem List When active select the Copy Item List option or ctrl I and the current contents of the right hand list pane along with the column headings 1s copied as text to the clipboard in a Tab separated format This 1s useful when copying for example station or master lists for pasting into Excel etc 3 1 2 2 Change Password Select the Change Password option to bring up the Change Password window which allows you to set up a password to change the current password or to remove the password altogether The purpose of this option 1s to prevent unauthorized users from making changes to the configuration Once a password has been set and is active you will need to know the password to unlock the configuration and make changes Note the configuration can be viewed without entering the password Setting up a Password for the Fi
410. take you back to the Switch Properties window Select the Contact Type for the switch from the drop down menu Input Settings Page 62 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 5 4 2 Paging Microphone Master Properties Call Settings The Page Control area has three options VOX Voice EEG SS xl Control Status Registers Permissions Paging Feedback Outputs Operated Switch PTT Press to Talk or On The PTT i carol Call Settings R cctv zs option will not be available until you define a PTT switch in the Switches tab When a page master makes a page announcement the audio connection is made CE immediately if you select On or only after the PTT Nore El a Call Priority Se pee switch is depressed if you select PTT or when the no ep com speech is started if you select VOX The PTT and VOX options allow the operator time to compose his thoughts before transmitting the message The PTT option allows the operator to have a local conversation without having it broadcast as a part of the page message Select the appropriate tape recorder in the Call Recorder drop down menu to record all the conversations of this master station 3 5 5 Master Groups Both IMS TMM and TSM Masters can be configured to act as a single master or as a member of one or more groups of masters Each master and master group can be independently configured with their own set of master permiss
411. tations y Lock Y View Hardware y Number Surber Nene rio Template Live Port Grey Institutuin dyl 500 ac one Speak ht dminis tratio ne DL iE 240 Ios Seres SC aD 17 Statio Ja Po Support Services Housing 1 Housing 2 Special Handling Administration 4 gt Properties Add Delete Duplicate Duplicating Station 5001 SW Tower Entry x Number To Duplicate fi First Number 5002 First Name sw Tower Exit Exchange Card Port First Port Administration y faz y 400 Series SCC 1 y 2 y cor 4 Single Exchange Only First Number The First Number entry displays the next available ID number that continues from the ID numbers of the stations Duplicating Station 5001 SW Tower Entry Number To Duplicate that have already defined If you want the stations to begin A T with a different ID number then type the ID number of the O first duplicated station into the First Number entry Only E T digits can be used for the ID number and the program will Fist Port Administration Y pe m fo Sese soe 1 T 2 xl automatically increment the last digit of the ID number F Single Exchange Only when it generates the remainder of the duplicated Stations mecs If you enter any kind of character other than a number in the First Number entry the program will display an error message as shown below Notice how the ID number has been set to 1A which is invalid because of the alphabetic chara
412. tch the value used in the DXL configuration 4 6 3 4 IP Address This represents the desired IP address of the device When changed the device must be rebooted to use the new settings To use DHCP simply set this value to dhcp IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 193 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 4 6 4 IP Range Fill in the three IP digit boxes to specify the subnet to be scanned For example filling in 192 168 11 will cause the tool to scan the IP range 192 168 11 0 through 192 168 11 254 4 6 5 Scan Network Starts a scan of a live network based on IP subnet entered always scans 255 devices Note that any unsaved changes made to individual values in the columns are lost when you scan so do not rescan if you ve made any changes Note that this can take several minutes when a lot of devices are discovered to cancel a scan use the cancel button on the Scanning dialog Scanning for VOIP Devices 4 6 6 Select Template Device To select a device to use as a template simply select its row and click this button The template icon should appear in the left hand column for the selected device Note that only online devices can be used as templates The template device settings will be used as the basis for all settings on the device except the user editable columns values 4 6 7 Goto Template Website Allows the user to go to the template device website by invoking the systems default browser NOTE to go to another online devices
413. ted because the first station has been chosen This restriction can be removed by setting the first station to None Visiting Booth 1 Visiting Booth 1 Properties x Identification Tones Control Pemissions mEall Announce Reminder None h Page 95 Administrator Software 3 9 1 3 Visiting Booth Properties Control The Control tab has two main options Choose the Always enabled option to keep the visiting booths permanently connected so that they will become active the moment the handsets are taken off hook The Enabled on demand option allows a Master Station to control when a visiting booth is enabled The Default visit time minutes entry controls how long the visiting booth connection remains active 3 9 1 4 Visiting Booth Properties Permissions The Permissions tab is used to specify which master station s can talk to the visiting booth and which master station s can control the visiting booth The Function pull down menu has two choices Control Visiting Booth The Add button brings up a window that lists all the master stations in the system From this list you make the appropriate selection Page 96 MicroComm DXL Visiting Booth 1 Visiting Booth 1 Properties x Identification Tones Control Pemissions C Enabled on demand Default visit time minutes 30 Visiting Booth 1 Visiting Booth 1 Properties x Identification Tones Control Pemis
414. the Contrast line and then hit the gt key to move to the start of the first editable field which is the bar display that appears g a ai A If the Contrast is set to zero then no display will appear To increase the contrast press the a key and to decrease the contrast press the v key Note that the contrast increases or decreases by a half bar each time you press one of the keys Once you have finished editing the contrast press the key to save the changes and return the cursor to the start of the Contrast line If you do not want to save the changes that you have made then press the key which will return the cursor to the start of the line without saving the changes Backlight To edit the backlight on the LCD display move the cursor to the start of the Backlight line and then press the gt key to move to the start of the first editable field which is the bar display that appears a a a A If the Backlight 1s set to zero then no display will appear To increase the contrast press the key and to decrease the contrast press the v key Note that the contrast increases or decreases by a half bar each you press one of the keys Once IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 253 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL you have finished editing the contrast press the key to save the changes and return the cursor to the start of the Backlight line If you do not want to save the changes then press the key which will return the cursor to the star
415. the L T has changed with the new log coming in but the E T has also changed because 1t 1s relative to the L T Therefore the logs that you were browsing before the new log came in may suddenly become excluded from the display From the time filter shown below the logs are to be filtered between the date and time shown in the E T and the L T Hence the appropriate logs have been displayed in the Log Viewer window Time Filter 5 x Earliest Time C None oldest log C Relative f Hour s gt oforto Latest Time Specify 20 01 2005 e 30 04am Latest Time C Now most recent log Specify 20 01 2005 A 9 05 00 4M Match Selection Cancel 2 DXL Log Viewer offline Ioj x File Edit Search Filter Transfer Format S Filters T a x B 9 Info fInternal Intercom Tasks CLK IE nuary lo 9 01 27 56 AM This exchange is acting as the clock master XiDebug Internal Intercom Tasks CLK January 20 2005 09 01 27 56 AM Sent periodic broadcast request to determine clock master NU_SUCCESS iJ Info fInternal Intercom Tasks CLK January 20 2005 09 04 27 56 AM This exchange is acting as the clock master Debug Internal Intercom Tasks CLK January 20 2005 09 04 27 56 AM Sent periodic broadcast request to determine clock master NU_SUCCESS The Match Selection option is used to set the earliest and the latest date and time in the Time Filter to match the logs that are selected in the Log Vi
416. the Project Configurations area C 0 002 002a M test1 Delete You will also be able to see the configurations that are active on the a exchange s that the PC is currently ER connected to in the Configurations on 3127196518 Exchange s area Import Export Show Exchanges The Project Configurations area displays all the configurations that are currently defined in the open project The presence of a tick mark beside a configuration name indicates that this configuration has been activated at some point in time However this does not mean that it has been uploaded to the current exchanges on the DXL The Configurations on Exchange s area displays all the configurations that are currently stored on all the exchanges that the computer is connected to The presence of a tick mark beside the configuration name indicates that this configuration is currently active and running on the DXL 4 2 2 Application Files app Select this option to manage the application files by uploading applications to exchanges downloading applications from exchanges activating applications on exchanges etc The app refers to the file extension of the application files The Installed Applications area displays a x z A Configuration Files cfg list of all the application files that are sppicstion Fies app presently installed on your computer ee elsa Certain names appear with an invalid beside Sap ill
417. then select Find Next The search proceeds by Match whole word only highlighting the row of the message that contains the search string mo Regular expression Perl 5 style e Close this dialog on search The search will continue upwards or downwards from the current log depending on whether you choose Up or Down in the Find Log Message Text window By default the previous search string always appears in the Find What x menu each time a search is conducted Also by default the direction of l a e i stat the search will always be the same as the direction in the last search OO id For convenience the search strings that have been previously entered are available in the Find what drop down menu There will be up to 25 previous text strings stored in the Find what drop down menu If a particular phrase or word is required then put a tick in the Match whole word only box If this is left unchecked then the search will also identify words or sentences that contain the search string within their text body For example if the text Ed is being searched for then this will match the last two letters of the word Fred if Match whole word only is not checked You can select the Match Case option if you want the search to be case sensitive To look for a text string using a regular expression tick Regular expression perl 5 style and enter the text string in the appropriate format A link to using PERL 3 style s
418. this configuration appear Select Remove to deactivate the password and remove it If you click on Cancel then a message will appear informing you that the password has not been changed Click on OK to exit this window If you click the Unlock button after the password has been set then the program will xi prompt you to enter the password in the Enter Password window Password peeo Cancel If you enter an incorrect password an error message will be displayed and the MEETS xi configuration will remain in a locked state Press OK to exit the error message x a window If you enter the correct password the Lock button will change to an Undock button indicating that the DXL Configuration Editor window is now open for editing 3 1 2 3 Unlock Configuration Lock Configuration The Unlock Configuration or the Lock Configuration entry is available on the Edit menu Clicking on this entry will either toggle the configuration from the unlocked state to the locked state or from the locked state to the unlocked state If a password has been set then the Enter Password window will pop up when you click on the Unlock Configuration entry and you will need to type in the correct password to unlock the configuration You can also lock or unlock the configuration directly from the DXL Configuration Editor using the Unlock Lock button that appears at the top of the window adjacent to a padlock icon When this icon shows a clo
419. ting booth or a compound station any duplicated entries will be filtered to prevent the same camera from being connected to two or more Master Station monitors IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 58 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 5 1 6 Master Properties Outputs The Outputs tab is used to set outputs that will provide xl Identification Switches Tones Call Settings Levels CCTV Filters Control Secondary Status Registers Permissions Paging Feedback Outputs information on the status of the master station You can add an output by selecting the Add button This will bring up the Output Properties window followed by a 1 Master Call Request Status Indicator Delete Select Output Port Expand the tree structure until you Pro erties find the desired output Select Output Port Oj x Output Port EE Grey Institution dsl S upport Services DCC B 21M5 MCC E Status Output 1 Output Status Output 2 Status Output 3 Status Output 4 DCE E Housing 1 A Housing 2 Special Handling E Administration Cancel Output Properties x Function EGSA Tr Status When you have made your selection click the OK button and you will return to the Output Properties window which has two tabs Output and Settings The P Ys upport Services DCC 2 IMS MCC Status Output 1 Output Change
420. tly filtering Exchange Filter gt the logs and hence displays all the logs that are present in the Log Viewer window a Text Filter y Time Filter If you select this option then it appears with a tick mark beside it e Class and Type Filters allow the Log Viewer to display particular classes and types of messages e Exchange Filters allow the Log Viewer to display only those logs that belong to a particular Exchange or a group of Exchanges Any logs that do not belong to one of these exchange s are excluded from display in the Log Viewer window e Message Text Filters allow the Log Viewer to show or hide logs that contain text that 1s specified by the user e Time Filters allow the Log Viewer to display logs that fall in between a certain date and time 5 2 4 2 Class amp Type Filter Each log message 1s assigned to a particular class and given a Show All Shift Ctri A particular type They are displayed in the respective Class and a Type columns on the Log Viewer window The logs can be Exchange Filter A filtered so that only certain classes and types of messages are Message Text Filter id ES displayed Time Filter gt Load Save As Delete IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 213 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Classes form a hierarchy that groups related messages together There are 5 main classes of messages Host Internal Maintenance System Activity and System Startup Each of these classes has one or more subclass
421. to 1 exchange File Edit Search Filter Transfer Format SET Internal Interco 04 0 01200 ita Debug Internal Interco 04 0 i 5 5 lintrcom task E a m 9 Info Internal Shells 04 Configs hell lis stener Debug finternal Shells E O1 2005 Debug System Startup REY 01 2005 XE Debug Internal Shells 04 01 2005 starting on po mt SOI 007 10 0 1 200 on socket 73 lo 1b4 Configuration _2 Block 1 Ex 30 Housing Building 2 a Export Logs Saves Deko 6 emde My Recent Documents Desktop Toy XL S e application file DXL 0 4 0B3 4PP okay Listener on port 50007 accepting client connection from X Y My Computer LJ My Documents td My Network Places test project dxl data Company Y Harding Network 2 Marketing on NTSERVER ntserver W MicroComm DXL 21x Tushnas o My Documents om e My Computer A File name DxL Logs y Places Save as type Text tab delimited txt Text tab delimited txt CS comma delimited cs Web bane sedge html Styled Web Page htm h 5 2 1 3 Print Select File and then Print to print the logs that appear on the Log Viewer window First the Log Viewer prepares the logs for printing and then the standard print dialog is displayed in order to print the prepared logs Click on the red button to abort the print job and a message saying printing aborted will appear Note t
422. to continue with the activation process Note that in this case you will not have a choice as the DXL must reboot in order to activate a different application Applications on Exchangel s OE rr Is O DxL 0 5 5B2 O DxL 0 5 5B6 DXL 1 0 0B2 x Activate ep Are you sure you want to activate the selected application J RG Note Exchanges will need to reboot Cancel Activate Show Exchanges On start up a DXL Exchange runs the currently activated application As the application starts it loads the currently activated configuration which tells it how to operate the hardware on the exchange Note that when an application file is activated the File Manager will automatically try to connect to the rebooted exchanges after the DXL has rebooted However in the case of a PPP connection if the exchange that provides the main link between the PC and the exchanges is rebooted then the PPP connection will be severed In this case you will have to setup the PPP connection with the exchanges after they have rebooted IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 185 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 4 2 12 Distribute The distribute feature lets you distribute files that exist on the exchanges to all other eligible exchanges in the system over an Ethernet connection This feature requires that the distributing exchanges MUST be using protocol 2 0 Exchanges running the default application which uses protocol 1 0 will not be able to distr
423. to eh entry is accepted as time in seconds Another way to tell the system that you have completed a dialling sequence is by using the Termination Key which can be set to either or Enter this character when your dialling sequence is complete This is a single system wide setting Note that when the Timeout sec and the Termination Key are both set the program will implement whichever comes first when it is determining if you have finished entering the dialling sequence Select the Dial Masters by Name option to dial to a master station on a name basis Note that a TSM can use name or number dialling only when it is dialling another Master Station All Page Zones Stations and visiting booths can only be reached through number dialling Also note that the leading zeroes concept is not applicable when you dial to a master with its name Hence you can simply type the name of the master by using the telephone keypad Note that if the master s name contains characters that are not available on the TSM keypad then you will not be able to dial to this Masters by using its name Also since the DXL is aware of the names associated with each master station it allows the system to display names starting with the characters that you enter For example say a master station has the name Axel and another master has the name Acid and there are no other Master Stations present on the system If you typ
424. ton gt E 5 o e 4 In this mode you will be presented with some options that will allow you to e Choose the DXL Application that is to be loaded when the DXL starts up The choices in this option would include the Default Application which would load if no other applications are present plus any other applications loaded into the FLASH memory However the Configuration files on the DXL unit would not be affected e Clear the non volatile memory NVRAM and FLASH in the DXL units including all the downloaded Configurations Applications and IP addresses User confirmation will be required for this action e Invoke comprehensive SDRAM and optionally NVRAM FLASH memory tests and possibly other diagnostics In this case the Configuration files on the DXL unit will not be affected 7 1 The Boot Options Window 7 1 1 Introduction Select Boot Options gt This is the main window that you will initially see in the boot mode You can Clear IP Addresses use the options in this window to enable disable various self tests or clear Chea Ab DORMEMO Mess Configurations and IP addresses before booting You can use the a and v keys on the front panel of the DXL box in order to move to different lines This window has four options to select from DONE 1 Clear IP Addresses 2 Clear ALL select Application 3 Do Memory Tests 4 Select Application To enable a test or option go to the start of the line usin
425. tor End Station Master o Switch is deactivated when the Master ends monitoring of a Station Page 158 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Switch is activated when a Master makes a call request to Answer another Master Master CRQ Master Master Acknowledge Switch is deactivated when the call request is acknowledged by the Master Master Call Switch is activated when a Master makes a call request to End another Master Master Master Cancel Switch is deactivated when the call is terminated or cancelled Switch is activated when a Master makes a call to another Master End Master Master Switch is deactivated when either of the Masters ends the calls Switch is activated when a Master makes a call to a ere R visiting booth banc End aire it Booth ca Boot Switch is deactivated when the Master ends the call with the visiting booth a Visiting ih Switch is activated when a visiting booth is enabled enable Booth Switch is deactivated when the visiting booth is disabled Switch is activated when an alarm occurs Alarm Acknowledge N A Master Switch is deactivated when the Master acknowledges the alarm Switch is activated when an ALA occurs at a Station ALA Alarm Acknowledge Station Master Switch is deactivated when the ALA is acknowledged by the Master Switch is activated when a call recorder is turned on at a Call Station d Call recorder off Station N A recorder on Switch is deactivated when the call recorder is turned off
426. tor booth consists of an audio connection between two Handset Stations The audio connection may be enabled permanently or enabled by a Master Station operator on demand If the audio connection is established on demand then the connection remains intact for a predetermined length of time 3 9 1 Visiting Booth Properties Dialog Boxes There are four tabs associated with a visiting booth Identification Tones Control and Permissions 3 9 1 1 Visiting Booth Properties Identification The drop down menus in First Station and Second Station highlights all the stations that are defined as Handset Stations in the Stations section of Configure When you select a Station in the First Station entry then this station does not appear in the Second Station drop down menu and vice versa After you make the settings for First Station and Second Station this pair of Stations makes up a visiting booth 3 9 1 2 Visiting Booth Properties Tones The Visiting Booth has provisions to include Start End and Reminder tones during a call between the two stations The pull down menus list the tones that you have defined for the system and you can make your selections from this list IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 x Identification Tones Control Pemissions Number i Name visiting Booth Info P El First Station Second Station 51 09 VisitBooth Guest y 5111 isitBooth Resident y The selection for the second station has been restric
427. tored This allows the system to delete an hours worth of logs in blocks without having to delete all the logs in order to gain more memory However a case may occur where more than one block has the same base time This may occur in the case where the base time has changed the Configuration or the LMU files have changed the system time has changed or the threshold maximum memory available for a block has been exceeded As an example of the usefulness of blocks say the system time has suddenly changed This causes unrelated messages that may have the same time to be displayed together In this case you can use the block numbers to decipher the groups of messages that were part of the same block and hence you will be able to follow the correct sequence of logs without becoming confused with the time of the log messages Message this is the actual log message that is generated and displayed by the DXL Log Viewer 5 1 4 Log Window Operations There are various operations that you can use in the Log Viewer window They are listed below You can resize the Log Viewer window by clicking along the border of the window and resizing it You can also do this by clicking on the standard minimize or maximize buttons in the title bar You can change the order of the columns by dragging and dropping them Click on the column header and then drag the mouse or pointer across to where you want to insert the column To resize a column in the Log View
428. ts directed to Central Control then all the stations that are created from this template will send their call requests to Central Control If the template is edited and Central Control is replaced by Control A then all the stations derived from this template will have their call requests directed to Control A You can edit an individual station that is based on a template and change any of its properties to a different value In this case the station will retain its own value for that property but the other properties will still be determined from its template If you have many stations that are based on a single template then the properties for all the stations can be changed simultaneously by changing the property in the template Each station template is based on a single type of station You can define as many station templates as you need Stations that are based on the same template share the switch input and functional values defined for that type They also use the same initial values for the associated parametric fields such as call request priority tone settings etc The type of a station template cannot be changed if there are existing stations that are based on this template and the entry that allows you to select the type of station will be dimmed When you click on the Add button to define a new xl ld ifi 4 station template you will see the Stati on Template entification Switches Tones Call Settings Levels
429. ty vaes E Grey Institution dsl Support Services DCC Housing Unit 1 Housing Unit 2 Special Handling Administration Function Exchange Exchange Exchange 100 Support Services Add DCE Add DIO Add PZE Delete You can now add up to four DCEs and or TBEs to one exchange The DCE Properties oro window 1s shown on the right Use the pull down menus to select the appropriate options for the MCC SCC 1 and SCC 2 cards You must also indicate in the checkbox if the DCE has ALA Enhanced capability The pull down selections are shown below xi PCC Option Jv ALA Enhanced MCC 2 IMs y None e J Supervised Status Input 3 JV Supervised Status Input 4 SIE 400 Series y Snes 400 Series y Conce Page 38 x PCC Option Y ALA Enhanced MCC 2 IMS y MCC Option V Supervised Status Input 1 JV Supervised Status Input 2 JV Supervised Status Input 3 JV Supervised Status Input 4 SEES 400 Series y None 300 Series SCC z 400 Series 401 Series MCC 2 IMS y MCC Option Y Supervised Status Input 1 Y Supervised Status Input 2 J Supervised Status Input 3 Y Supervised Status Input 4 SCC 1 400 Series y SEC 2 1400 Series a Cancel PCC Option Y ALA Enhanced MCC 21MS MCC Option JV Supervised Status Input 1 Y Supervised Status Input 2
430. u Connect Via Modem y have selected You will have to choose the phone number of the ee exchange that you want to retrieve information from using the Dial Standard 56000 bps Modem x i et Dial Exchange Exchange drop down menu Note that administrative rights are CERTE required ie run the DXL Administrator as an administrator when connecting to an exchange this way See Appendix B for more details Cancel Serial When you connect via a serial connection the Connect Using menu xl displays the serial ports on your computer You will have to choose the S t P Addressles or Phone Number s From E y CM Ent port that your computer will be using to connect to the serial port on the a Configuration Configuguration_1 0 y DXL from the Connect Using drop down menu The serial port will be hard wired to a specific exchange See Appendix A for more details Communications Link Connect Via Serial v Note that direct serial connections are no longer supported with Vista Windows 7 due to a lack of support in the operating system caresi 4 1 2 1 2 Manual Entry Choose the Manual Entry option if you do not have a configuration ESS xl that can supply the information your PC needs to make the connection to 9t P Address es or Phone Numbeits From the exchanges on the DXL In this case your PC will be connected to o ZOTNI one specific exchange with the unique IP
431. u want to save the ney logs in Save in and type the name of the file in File isu name The file can be saved in a variety of different WE formats that you can choose from the Save as type Ry Eanes om e MEA File name DxL Logs drop down menu Places Save as type Text tab delimited txt Text tab delimited txt CS comma delimited csv Web Page htm html Styled Web Page h IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 207 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Note that once this option is ticked and you click the Delete button then ALL the logs that you have selected for deletion will be saved irrespective of the current Filter settings The program will prompt you to save the Logs in the Export Logs window It must be noted that ALL logs prior to this date and time are deleted irrespective of the current Filter settings Also if the logs are still present on the Exchange hardware then it is still possible for you to re download the logs However if the logs have been deleted from the Exchange hardware then it will not be possible to re download them If you have the options Automatically download logs as needed and Automatically stream current logs turned on then having these options on may interfere with the deletion of the logs This is because these options may trigger an immediate download of the logs that have just been deleted Therefore you will be prompted to turn these options off b
432. uest ee i F 50 TSM Answer Control queued at the time the handset is lifted This is likely the Connect to caller ID device Connect to highest priority device preferred method for phones that do not have caller ID display The Page Control area has three options VOX Voice Operated Switch PTT Press to Talk or On When a Master makes a page announcement the audio connection is made immediately if you select On or when the speech is started if you select VOX The PTT option is non selectable The VOX option allows the operator time to compose his thoughts before transmitting the message Select the appropriate tape recorder in the Call Recorder drop down menu to record the conversations of this Master Station 3 5 4 Paging Microphone Master A Paging Microphone is a Master Station that connects to an audio input port on a DCC or a DCE A Paging Microphone does not have a display and can only communicate in one direction Hence it is usually used to make pages to Page Zones and it cannot make call requests to other Masters or calls to Stations An external switch is required to act as a PTT switch when the Paging Microphone is making a page A Paging Microphone is used in conjunction with a Host Port or a Switch Panel IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 61 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 5 4 1 Paging Microphone Master Properties Switches The Switches Tab is shown on the right Initially there ET 5 a
433. uest Select the Guest option then click on Next gt button The next page of the Wizard the Connection Name asks you to give your PC serial connection a name Type in a suitable name we have used DXL Serial followed by clicking the Next gt button The next page of the Wizard asks you to select a device use the pull down menu to view all the port devices in your PC Select the one you want to use for your serial port then click the Next gt button IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 MicroComm DXL New Connection Wizard Host or Guest To connect two computers your computer must be identified as either a host or a guest New Connection Wizard Connection Name What is the name of the other computer you are connecting to New Connection Wizard Select a Device This is the device that will be used to make the connection Page 283 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL The next page of the Wizard titled Connection BES Connection Availability Availability asks you who should be able to use the dd A A ihc connection you can select Anyone s use or My use only A connection that is created for your use only is saved in your user account and is not available unless you are logged on Create this connection for Anyone s use My use only New Connection Wizard At this point you have almost completed configuring the Completing the New Connection serial connection and the Completed the New Connectio
434. ueue register block requires two registers per entry The first register in each pair will hold an alarm code depending on whether an alarm is active has been cleared or a device has been disabled The second register will hold the ID number of the device that generated the alarm The Sequential registers and Equal queue sizes selections ERRE x Register Block Status M Mode as well as the entry into the various address registers works A i cate in the exactly the same way as described in the previous Handshake 690000 fi E Pole sections Command 530001 E Eee Status 690006 5 J Equal queue sizes Alarm Queue 690011 5 3 fo Ack d Queue 630021 ls afo 3 Disabled Queue 690031 ls fio a Show Host Port Registers Cancel Note that this register assignment procedure has to be carried out for each Master Note that no changes will be accepted until you click on the Apply Changes button which will update the changes to the system When Page 146 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL satisfied with your settings click on OK to save the changes and return to the main Masters tab Click on Cancel in order to cancel the changes made and return to the Masters Tab 3 24 1 12 Host Port Register Based Messages Status Registers Each Master Station and Page Zone can have status registers which can be selected under the Status Registers tab These registers which are optio
435. ueue size for three registers Alarm Ack d and Disabled can be individually set using the adjacent scroll bars and However if the Sequential Registers check box is unchecked then you have the option of defining a separate address for Command Alarm Queue Ack d Queue and Disabled Queue The Length fields are non editable entries and are meant for reference purposes only Note that no changes will be accepted until you click on the Apply Changes button which will update the changes to the system The changes will not be updated on the system if you just click on the OK button without first clicking on the Apply Changes button The Apply Changes button is also convenient if you have the Host Host Port 1 Host Port 1 Properties Identification Connection Protocol Messages Monitor Masters Registers Status Registers Register Blocks Handshake Status Eommand 14000 Alarm Gueue aoc 0111 0001 21 DXL Address PLC Address Entries Length 40001 00 4000101 40001 06 SEE ll o Ml 29410 11 Status Message Mode Peer to peer Polled Show Host Port Registers J Equal queue sizes Apply Changes MicroComm DXL xi Cancel Host Port 1 Host Port 1 Properties Identification Connection Protocol Messages Monitor Masters Registers Status Registers Register Blocks Handshake 40001 00 D
436. until no further connections are possible either the cameras or the monitors run out So the program begins sending commands for connecting the monitors on the master to the cameras on the station in sequential order and this continues until either the monitors on the master run out or the cameras on the station run out Next IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 57 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL the cameras on the master are connected to the monitors on the station in sequential order and this continues until either the cameras on the Master or the monitors on the Station run out Example A Master has monitors M100 M101 and cameras C100 and C101 A Station has monitor M200 and camera C200 So when the master calls the station the following connections are made M100 gt C200 and this assignment stops here as the station does not have any more cameras to connect M101 to Next commands are sent for the following connections to be made C100 gt M200 This assignment stops here as the station does not have any more monitors to connect C101 with When a master calls a visiting booth or a compound station where a monitor has been assigned to each of the constituent stations the first camera that is assigned to the master will be connected to the first monitor of each constituent station even if the master has more than one camera This multiple connection also applies if additional master station cameras and visiting booth station monitors
437. up and making connections Page 178 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software 4 2 5 1 Connection problems There could be a case when the computer is able to retrieve the IP address phone number but is unable to set up a connection with the DXL box This could be because the DXL box has been switched off or your computer cannot access 1t due to some other reasons MicroComm DXL Connection Status Ed Exchange 1 Exchange 01 Exchange 2 Exchange O Exchange 3 Exchange 03 In this case the Communication Status window appears and displays the exchanges that you have chosen to connect to in grey Also note that when this happens the Configurations on Exchange s area will appear but it will be empty because the computer has been unable to connect to the required exchanges You will also see that the Connect button changes to a Disconnect button This is because the computer has been able to retrieve the IP addresses or phone numbers File Manager x Configuration Files cfg C Application Files app Disconnect Refresh Select Exchanges Project Configurations Configurations on Exchange s J 0 002 000d 0 002 001 C 0 002 001k gt Copy gt but it has been unable to access the required 0002002 N exchanges Ea tent Delete Size 38 394 Checksum 3127196518 Notice how the Configurations on Exchange s area is empty Import Export Show Exchanges Also the Conne
438. up a Modem Configuration dialog Select a device Communications cable between two computers COM1 box Y Show icon in notification area when connected In the Modem Configuration dialog box use the pull down menu to EE select a speed of 57600 bps and use the check boxes to turn off all the y orca beisen ia compdes COM Hardware Features Once these setting are made click OK to return tO Maximum speed ps 57600 the General tab of the DXI Serial Properties dialog box Modem protocol Select the Security tab of the Modem Configuration dialog box Select Ax the Typical option and click OK to return to the Connect DXL Serial General Options Securty Networking Advanced a Security options dialog box Typical recommended settings Validate my identity as follows Allow unsecured password Automatically use my Windows logon name and password and domain if any Require data encryption disconnect if none Advanced custom settings Using these settings requires a knowledge ot security protoco 5 Settings IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 285 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL You will now return to the Connect DXL Serial dialog box and you can close the dialog box at this time User name ld Password To change the saved password click here IV Save this user name and password for the following users C Me only Anyone who uses this computer Comet
439. ups that will be driven by the audio from this paging output You can visualize these group inputs as being driven directly from MicroComm DXL Paging Output 22 Amplifier 1 Input Properties i x Identification Call Settings Levets Selectors Filter Volume Output Active Status Output 201 Key Amp 16dB o 16dB Call Priority L E 0 o 100 16dB jo 16dB Paging Output 22 Amplifier 1 Input Properties x Identification Call Settings Levels Selectors Filter Selector Kind ARA 201 PZE1 Group 202 PZE1 Group2 Delete the paging output even though in practice they are connected to the output of an amplifier that has this paging output as 1ts input Once a group has been associated with a paging output 1t will no longer be available for other Page 102 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL paging outputs i e it will not show up when the Add button is clicked In our example Amp 1 is connected to both PZE 1 Speaker Line Group and PZE 1 Speaker Line Group 2 If we select Zone Select Outputs then click the Add HERA al Identification Call Settings Levels Selectors Fiter button a list of all the available status outputs with the Zone Select Outputs functions are displayed In this Selector Kind Zone Select Outputs y example we have defined four status outputs two of which are to be used for page zone Games Room
440. user or import them into another project etc Remember that you can only export configurations from the current project that you are working in however you can export any installed application file that is on your computer Also remember that you do not have to be connected to the exchanges on the DXL if you want to export a configuration file or an application file The Export button works similarly for both the configuration files and the application files so it will be explained using the configuration files as an example To use the Export button you have to first click on 21x the configuration that you want to export from the o EE A ete Project Configurations area When you click on this button the program brings up the Export Configuration To window and inserts the name of the configuration that you want to export into the File Name entry Use the icons to select a destination for saving this exported configuration file Note that an exported configuration file would have a cfg file extension while an exported application File would have an app file extension File name DxL 1 1 0B3 APP Save as type DXL Application app z Cancel Click on Save to export this configuration to the location that you have selected in the Save in entry or click on Cancel in order to cancel the operation IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 177 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 4 2 4 Import You wil
441. utputs VOX Voice Op erated Switch PTT Press to Talk SL Identification Switches Tones Call Settings Levels CCTV Filters Control On When a Master makes a page announcement the Initial Volume Program Group audio connection can be made immediately if On Is mea Nee selected or only after the push to talk PTT switch is IN A Cal Recorder depressed if PTT is selected or when speech is started if ns VOX is selected The PTT and VOX options allow the rom Page Control p n a cv e PTT C On operator time to compose his thoughts before transmitting a message The PTT option allows the operator to have a local conversation when the PTT button is released without having it broadcast as a part of the page message Select a tape recorder from the Call Recorder drop down menu to record all the conversations of this Master Select the appropriate Program Group from the drop down menu to make programmed music available at this Master Page 60 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 5 3 TSM Master Stations Telephone Set Master TSM Stations use a standard telephone as a Master Station Pre defined prefixes and suffixes allow an operator to make page announcements calls to Stations and other Master Stations and perform monitoring and control functions The default operation of telephone Masters is similar to the standard operating procedures for a MicroComm DXL system h
442. utton to try again right away The retry box will keep popping up until a connection is established or until it gives up after a number of tries a message box will be displayed to explain the error Firewalls can also create problems with connections Verify that exceptions are setup to allow ICMP PING Telnet and FTP protocols 4 1 2 2 Select Exchanges Once a connection is made the Select Exchanges dialog lets you choose the exchange that the PC can connect to if there is more than one exchange in a configuration that the computer can connect to Therefore the Select Exchanges option will be dimmed not selectable 1f the computer only connects to one exchange such as in the case of a manual entry The Select Exchanges window displays the valid exchanges that the PC could connect to If an exchange appears in green this means that the computer is currently connected to this exchange If an exchange appears in black this means that the PC is periodically checking its connectivity with the exchange and as long as the exchange remains black it is possible for the computer to make a connection to the exchange If an exchange appears in grey this means that it is not possible for the computer to make a connection to that exchange This could be because the DXL boxes have been switched off or the I P address is not consistent with the IP address in the Configuration or for some other reason From the figure below notice how Exchange 1 is in gre
443. volatile memory These logs will be NOT be lost if the exchange is 1 checkedlog messages willbe stored Non Volatle memo reset or there is a power failure Selected log class and all its subclasses C Selected log class only O and control of You can select the logs that you want to save from the Log Message NW Log Class NY Log Type Storage window This window allows the user to save all or selected F Enors Messages on the DXL WM Register Protocol 3 ball MMi Text Protocol Iv Information gt y EA Internal MV Debug Please refer to the DXL Log Viewer section of this manual for a H A Maintenance 7 Other i z M System Activity description of these options Note that in this case the Log Class and aA System Startup Log Type are referred to as NV Log Class and NV Log Type where NV E is an acronym for non volatile Page 134 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 23 1 5 System Properties General The General tab is used to configure some general system wide settings E System Properties TSM Dialing Master Operations Clock Logging General ALA Operation W Use improved ALA algorithm lf you are unsure leave this setting checked Network Audio Trunk Settings Traffic Type ATP Port Base 6512 The ALA Operation setting allows you to select the improved ALA algorithm With this algorithm there are fewer parameters to set when configur
444. w Communication status window when connected option the Communication Status window will always be displayed when the PC is connected to the exchanges on the DXL If you leave this option unchecked then this window will not be displayed The time period of the connectivity status is the rate Meee at which the PC checks the communication status of i Cancel the exchanges that it is already connected to and to the exchanges with which it is possible for it to make a connection The PC will check these connections with the time period that you specify in the box Refresh communication status every ___ seconds Remember that this time period is in seconds 2 4 3 Communications Menu The Communications menu is used to establish connection links between your PC Fe Edt Communications Help Connect and the DXL system The Configuration Logging and Diagnostics modules use these A links to transfer information between your PC and the exchanges in the DXL system Show Statua Selecting the Communications tab displays the following choices Connect Show Setup and Show Status Initially the Connect entry can be selected while the Show Setup and Show Status are cannot be selected Once one or more connection links have been established these two entries can then be selected For more information on setting up and using connections refer to the MicroComm DXL Diagnostics and Maintenance section 4 Communicat
445. website simply double click its row but be aware that any changes made there are not read unless you re scan 4 6 8 Update Selected Based on Template Device After selecting a template device and verifying that it s website has the values desired the next step is to propagate those changes to other online devices To update the configuration on online devices simply edit their column values as needed select the devices use ctrl or shift to select multiple devices and click Update Selected Based on Template Device This will update the selected devices configurations using the template values plus the values in each devices user editable columns Note that all selected devices must be online and of the same type 4 6 9 Update Firmware on Selected Devices To upgrade firmware on online devices simply select the devices use shift select to select multiple devices and click Update Firmware on Selected Devices This will update the selected devices firmware using a user chosen file Note that all selected devices must be online and of the same type Careful loading firmware we employ a filter when selecting the firmware filename to try and prevent the user from loading the wrong kind of firmware which can brick the device but this should be done with care When upgrading multiple devices we suggest updating one first and verifying it works before updating the rest Page 194 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 4 7 IMS 640
446. when an alarm is active e The Ack d Queue register holds the alarms that have been acknowledged but have not been cleared yet Most often this queue displays tamper alarms and call requests that have been disabled e The Disabled Queue register shows the devices that have been disabled Note that the register addresses that you enter must be compatible with the register address format requirements of the selected PLC or external host There are 2 modes of operation for a register based protocol and they are the Peer to peer mode and the Polled mode These modes determine whether the registers are located in the external host or in the DXL Hence changing the Status Message Mode between Peer to peer and Polled causes the register start address edit controls to move between the DXL Address and the PLC Address columns Peer to peer mode In the Peer to peer mode the registers are located in the host system and the DXL will write to these registers to send messages to the host This mode provides the highest performance and minimizes the band width requirements In the Peer to peer mode the DXL will write a message to the registers and then wait for the external host to read those registers before writing another message Since the registers are located on the external host in this mode the DXL cannot tell when the external host has read them Hence the external host must write to the Handshake register in order to acknowledge that it h
447. will not implement the tab settings until you click on OK in the General tab Also note that this button appears with each tab in the DXL Administrator Preferences window Remember that even though the button performs the same function it has to be used individually for each tab 2 4 2 1 2 Preferences Configuration Clicking on the Configuration tab allows you to set xi General Configuration Logging Diagnostics Connection the combined length of all the sounds in the Configurations These sounds are comprised of tones and messages You can specify the T On open automatically unlock non activated and non password protected configurations for editing maximum length of all the combined sound files by Maximum combined length of all sounds in a configuration 2 Minutes y filling in a number for Maximum combined length of all sounds in a configuration and then use the drop down menu to set the value to either seconds or minutes Sounds are explained in greater detail in the Sounds section of the Edit menu of the MicroComm DXL Configuration Editor Once a configuration has been downloaded to a working DXL system and activated it can no longer be edited You will be required to make a copy of the configuration in order to carry out editing tasks Place Restore Defaults a tick mark in the checkbox beside the On open automatically for editing option if you want the program to automatically unloc
448. x for the Log Viewer to revert on start up to the format settings that were used before the user last exited the Log Viewer window Choosing this option affects the Column Settings menu item in the Format menu If the option is left unchecked then the program will use the default settings for the system which are the settings that you get by choosing the Restore Defaults button in the Column Format Settings dialog this dialog appears when you select the Column Settings menu item in the Format menu Put a tick mark in the Restore last layout setting checkbox for the Log Viewer to revert on start up to the layout settings that were used when the user last exited the Log Viewer window These options are dependent on the Font and Font Size options in the Format menu and whether or not the user had manually changed the size or positions of the columns when the program was last run If the option is left unchecked then the program will use the default settings for the system Color Scheme Option and the Filters Option There are various settings for the Filters and the Color Scheme that have to be Color Scheme None Non Restore last used n Restore saved Select None if no Colour Scheme is required when the program starts in which case the default colour scheme where all the log messages appear in black is used Any Filters that are set to None will be disabled when the Log Viewer starts up configured so that t
449. xample a Call Request Cancel You can use any of the unused status input switches that are located on the same DCC or DCE or any of the unused switches on a DIO The only restriction in using DIO switches is that due to latency they cannot be assigned audio functions such as a PTT function The software will prevent you from making such an assignment Page 76 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Now click on the OK button to add this switch to the Switches tab Switch 3 is now added to the list To change the properties of this switch simply click on the switch and click on the Properties button Click on the Delete button to delete Switch 3 Note that it is not possible to delete predefined Switches Switch 1 and Switch 2 Clicking on the button Change in the Switch Properties dialog box will immediately bring up the tree structure of the Select Switch Port window and allow you to change the designated switch Switch Properties E x Select Switch Port loj x Switch Port Function IEA Greylnstitution ds Housing Building 1 E Input Settings E DEL 2 145 MCC Port MS Housing Building 1 DCC 2 IMS MCC Status Input 2 Switch 1 Change A Contact Type El MNO Momentary Normally Open Status Input 3 H Status Input 4 DCE 1 E DCE DCE Cancel Switch Properties Settings The settings for this tab are identical to the settings for the p
450. y off or 1 to turn it on Enter the required Prefix the Station ID the configured Separation Character and then 0 to turn the ALA off or 1 to turn the ALA on Enter the required Prefix the Station ID the configured Separation Character and then 0 to disable call requests or 1 to enable call requests Enter the required Prefix the Station Group ID the configured Separation Character and then 0 to turn to turn the ALA off or 1 to turn the ALA on Enter the required Prefix the Station Group ID the configured Separation Character and then 0 to disable call requests or 1 to enable call requests Enter the required Prefix the Station Group ID the configured Separation Character and then 0 to turn Program availability off or 1 to turn it on Enter the required Prefix the Station ID the configured Separation Character and then 0 to turn Program availability off or 1 to turn it on IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 127 Administrator Software Control Visiting Booth Monitor Station Page 128 Visiting booths can be enabled with timer support and disabled from TSMs Allows a TSM to monitor a Station This is like a Master making a call to a Station but with audio only travelling from the Station back to the Master MicroComm DXL Enter the configured Prefix the visiting booth ID the configured Separation Character and a 2 digit Par
451. y the audio that is sent to the line level audio output The Filter tab allows you to Sy se E specify the characteristics of this filter Type None Call Recorder 9999 Properties Identification Call Settings Levels CCT Monitors Filter soo 1 000 2 000 Previous Next Cancel IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 109 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL 3 16 Music Sources Three types of music sources are supported MCC Line in line level audio input ports on the DCCs or DCEs Generic Station Ports utilizing SPA adapters on 300 series ports and Speaker Station Ports utilizing SPA adapters on 400 series ports Up to six music sources can be circulated throughout a DXL system via the digital audio trunk and are available at every exchange At an exchange a music source can be transmitted to stations as two selectable separate music channels one at a low volume level and a second at a higher volume level Select Music Sources from Configure and then click on the Add box You will see a new dialog box called Music Source Properties 3 16 1 Music Sources Properties Dialog Box This dialog box has 4 tabs Identification Call Settings Levels and Filter Note that music sources have to be included in program groups so that they can be played at masters stations and page zones Program groups are discussed in the next section 3 16 1 1 Music Source Properties Identification The Identification tab requires you to assign
452. y the external log message utility program These databases are needed to translate from the internal log entry format used by the exchanges to easily readable log messages displayed by the log viewer module The log message databases are stored in compressed form in the LMU file Configuration this records the Configuration that was active on the exchange when the log was generated Date this indicates the date at which a log was generated Note that this time is based on the DXL Exchange clock and not on the PC clock Page 202 IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 determine clock master NU_SUCCESS determine clock master NU_SUCCESS l Administrator Software MicroComm DXL Time this indicates the time at which a log was generated Note that this time is based on the DXL Exchange clock and not on the PC clock Exchange this indicates the DXL Exchange from which the log was downloaded Block a block is memory that usually encompasses an hours worth of logs and always contain logs that have the same base time the same hour All blocks are assigned with a block number and they are used for debugging purposes Both volatile and non volatile memories on the DXL have their own blocks When logs of the same base time the same hour are generated they are stored in a block of memory and newer blocks are added for each new base time So when the memory gets full the older blocks are deleted so that there is room for newer blocks to be s
453. yed Similarly only the speaker lines in the speaker line groups associated with the included paging output members will be displayed after you select speaker line as the device kind You must add paging outputs to a page zone before you can add any of the selectors associated with that page output to a page zone 3 14 1 5 Page Zone Properties Permissions The Permissions tab specifies which master stations can PERERA ES Identification Tones Call Settings Members Permissions make an announcement over the page zone which masters can change the volume and which masters can control page zone programming i e transmitting background Function MENA Unit Control music over the page zone The Function pull down menu offers the following selections Function Call Fage one Fe Control Page one Program Control Page one Yolume In this example only Unit Control is allowed to make caca pages to the Games Room IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 105 Administrator Software 3 14 1 6 Page Zone Properties Status Registers Note that the Status Registers tab will not appear if the you have not defined any Host Ports in the system since the Status Register Tab is used with a register based Host Port If you have already defined Host Ports then you will see a list of them and they will all appear with a checkbox which is unticked by default beside them Tick the Host Ports that you want the Station to r
454. yle of the font You can click on any of the Font Style selections that are listed They are usually Regular Italic Bold and Bold Italic Use Size to change the size of the font Use the scrollbar to view different sizes of fonts and then click on the font size that you want to use Use Script to change the characters of the font by using the drop down menu and scroll bar Normally this value should remain unchanged The figure below shows how the font of the logs has been changed in the Log Viewer window Font Font style Italic O Lucida Console 4 Bold Italic 0 Lucida Sans Unicode Mangal F Map Symbols x z AaB YYA Script Westem v This font style is imitated for the display The closest matching style will be used for printing SE DXL Log Viewer connected to 1 exchange jE Oj x File Edit Search Filter Transfer Format O con Twe Glass essa O info Atnternal ntercom Fasks Gik January 21 2095 0819216348 This exchange is acting as tie clock master Amternal Imtercom Tasks CiX January 21 2005 08192153448 Seni periodic broadcast request to determine clock master WE SUCCESS Amternal imtercom Tasks C1K January 21 2805 0822215648 This exchange is acting as the clock master Amternal Imtercom fasks ik January 21 2005 0822215648 Sent periodic kroadcast request to determine clock master NU SUCCESS 0 1b4 two_ex Ex 1 Colin YW Note that no changes will be mad
455. yntax can be found at www perl org under the Online Documentation section on the website Select Close this dialog on search to close the Find Log Message Text window once the first search matching the search string is found If this box is not checked then the Find dialog will remain open after the search and the user can repeat the search by clicking the Find Next button Hence a new log will be highlighted each time the search string 1s found in one IM DXL ADM 1 5 0 Page 209 Administrator Software MicroComm DXL The user can cancel the search by selecting Cancel For convenience the user can abort the search by hitting the red STOP button on the Log Viewer window If the search is successful then the appropriate log is highlighted If it is x not successful then a message will inform you that the search string 7 The search string sent was not found was not found 5 2 3 2 Find Again You can repeat the same search in the same direction again by SS Find Log Message Text i x selecting Find Again on the Search menu Find what sent If a search string had not been entered prior to selecting Find aer a a au Match whole word only Direction ance Again then the Find Log Message Text dialog will open so that atch case C Up f Down you can enter the string that you want to search for Click on f Regular expression PERL 5 style Find Next to begin the search or click on Cancel to cancel the 1

IM-DXL-ADM-1.5.0 - Harding Instruments

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents